Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
`~
MSC.Software Corporation
2 MacArthur Place
Santa Ana, CA 92707 USA
Telephone: (800) 345-2078
Fax: (714) 784-4056
b
MSC.Software GmbH
Am Moosfeld 13
81829 Munich, Germany
Telephone: (49) (89) 43 19 87
0
Fax: (49) (89) 43 61 71 6
^~=m~
MSC.Software Japan Ltd.
Shinjuku First West 8F
23-7 Nishi Shinjuku
1-Chome, Shinjyku-Ku, Tokyo
160-0023, Japan
Telephone: (81) (03) 6911 1200
Fax: (81) (03) 6911 1201
t=t
www.mscsoftware.com
a~
q=~I=~==~==~===I=====~=~=====
~~======K
jp`Kp~=`~=====~=~==~=~==~=~===
===K
q=I=I=~=~=====~==~=~=~~==I=~=~=
====~===~==~=~~====K=jp`Kp~=`~=
~==~====~===~=====~~======
~=~=~=K
r=a~W=`= OMMT=jp`Kp~=`~K=m==rKpK^K=^=o=oK
q==~==~==~====~I=====~K=^===
===I=====~I=======jp`Kp~=`~==
K
q=~===~=~=~=J~=~=~=====~===
jp`Kp~=K=
jp`I=jaI=a~I=jp`=c~I=j~I=ja=m~~I=jp`=m~~=^~=j~~I=jp`=m~~=i~~=jI=jp`=
m~~=j~~I=jp`=m~~=q~I=~=m^qo^k=~=~~===~~==jp`Kp~=
`~===r=p~=~L==K=
k^pqo^k==~==~~==k^p^K=m^jJ`o^pe==~=~~===~~==bpf=dK=
p^j`bc==~=~~===~~==p~=p^K=ipJavk^==~=~~===~~==
i=p~=q=`~K=^kpvp==~==~~==p^p=fmI=fKI=~===
~==^kpvp=fK=^_^nrp==~==~~==^_^nrp=fK=^`fp==~==~~==p~~=
qI=fK=`^qf^==~==~~==a~~=pI=p^K=br`ifa==~==~~==j~~=
a~~=`~K=cibu==~==~~==dil_b=p~I=fK=emdi==~=~~==
e=m~~K=mp==~==~~==^=pI=fK=mq`I=`^aap=~=mLbkdfkbbo=~=
~~===~~==m~~=q=`~===~===r=p~=
~L==Kr~I=m~~=~=fJab^p=~==~~==b=a~~=p=
`~===~===r=p~=~L==K=^==~=~I==~==
~~=====K
NA*2007R1*Z*INON*Z*DC-USR
Contents
MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) Users Guide
Introduction
MSC.Software Products
10
12
Grid Point Force Balance and Element Strain Energy in Nonlinear Static
Analysis
40
46
47
50
51
Singularity Ratio
84
83
60
67
56
80
48
CONTENTS v
92
93
116
Static Analysis
118
Post-Buckling
119
Creep, Viscoplastic, and Viscoelastic Behavior
Body Approach
120
Buckling Analysis
121
Eigenvalue Buckling Prediction
Bifurcation Approach
122
Eigenvalue Extraction Methods
121
123
Normal Modes
124
Eigenvalue Analysis
126
Free Vibration Analysis
129
Support of Complex Eigenvalue Analysis
Transient Dynamic Analysis
132
Direct Transient Response
132
Technical Background
134
Time Step Definition
138
Initial Conditions
138
Damping
139
Creep
140
130
119
Analysis Techniques
Domain Decomposition
144
Specifying Domain Decomposition
144
Single Input File Parallel Processing for SOL 600
DDM Results in MSC.Patran
146
DDM Configuration
147
RESTARTS
148
Specifying Restarts and Parameters
Inertia Relief with Auto-Support
Review
149
General Formulation
150
SUPPORT6 Entry
151
148
149
154
155
146
159
Modeling
Coordinate Systems
162
Nodal Coordinate Systems
162
Element Coordinate Systems
162
Nodes
Elements
164
165
Modeling in MSC.Patran
166
Creating Geometry in MSC.Patran
166
Creating Finite Element Meshes in MSC.Patran
168
177
CONTENTS vii
Translation Parameters
179
Specifying the Translation Parameters
Solution Parameters
182
Specifying Solution Parameters
Subcases
185
Specifying Subcases
179
182
185
Subcase Parameters
188
Specifying Static Subcase Parameters
188
Specifying Normal Modes Subcase Parameters
190
Specifying Buckling Subcase Parameters
192
Specifying Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters
193
Specifying Creep Subcase Parameters
195
Specifying Body Approach Subcase Parameters
197
Execution Procedure for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear from the
Command Line
199
Using MSC.Patran to Execute MSC.Nastran
200
How to Tell When the Analysis is Done
200
How to Tell if the Analysis Ran Successfully
201
Monitoring the Analysis
202
Editing a MSC.Nastran Input File
203
213
217
Output Requests
218
Specifying Output Requests
218
231
229
Assigned Conditions
Constraints
236
Boundary Conditions
236
Multi-Point Constraints
236
Support Conditions
247
Loads and Boundary Conditions
248
Using MSC.Patran to Apply Loads and Boundary Conditions
Displacement LBCs
253
Force LBCs
254
Pressure LBCs
255
Temperature LBCs
257
Inertial Loads LBCs
259
Velocity LBCs
260
Acceleration LBCs
261
Distributed Load LBCs
261
Total Load LBCs
263
Contact LBCs
264
Initial Conditions
265
Initial Displacement LBCs
265
Initial Velocity LBCs
265
10
Materials
Overview
268
Constitutive Models
269
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear Material Entries
Linear Elastic
272
Isotropic Materials
273
Orthotropic Materials
274
Anisotropic Materials
276
Nonlinear Elastic
278
Hypoelastic - Isotropic
278
Hyperelastic - Isotropic
278
Viscoelastic
305
Narayanaswamy Model
315
Inelastic
317
270
250
231
CONTENTS ix
Yield Conditions
318
Work Hardening Rules
323
Flow Rules
327
Rate Dependent Yield
330
Experimental Stress-Strain Curves
332
Temperature-Dependent Behavior
341
Temperature-Dependent Stress Strain Curves
342
Specifying Elastoplastic Material Entries
344
Failure and Damage Models
349
Isotropic/Orthotropic/Anisotropic Failure Models
Damage Models
358
349
Creep
365
Oak Ridge National Laboratory Laws
368
Viscoplasticity (Explicit Formulation)
369
Creep (Implicit Formulation)
369
Specifying Creep Material Entries
370
Composite
372
Specifying Composite Material Entries
Gasket
374
Specifying Gasket Material Entries
Material Damping
380
Specifying Material Damping Entries
Experimental Data Fitting
11
373
378
381
382
Element Library
Overview
402
Element Types
402
Element Selection
404
Element Interpolation
404
Element Integration
404
Incompressible Elements
405
Overriding MSC.Nastran Element Selections
405
406
409
Line Elements
410
MSC.Patran FE Application Input Data
410
12
417
Contact
Overview
420
Contact Methodology
421
Contact Bodies
421
Numerical Procedures
430
Implementation of Constraints
434
Separation
436
Higher Order Elements
437
3-D Beam and Shell Contact
437
Friction Modeling
438
Defining Contact Bodies
447
Deformable and Rigid Surfaces
447
Motion of Surfaces
447
Cautions
448
Control Variables and Option Flags
448
Time Step Control
449
Dynamic Contact - Impact
449
Two-dimensional Rigid Surfaces
449
Specifying Contact Body Entries=
462
Selecting and Controlling Contact Behavior
Contact Parameters
467
Contact Table
471
Movement of Contact Bodies
475
467
407
CONTENTS xi
Initial Conditions
476
13
477
480
482
515
500
Introduction
MSC.Software Products
Feature List
2
3
12
10
MSC.Software Products
MSC.Software Corporation provides an extensive array of software products that make it possible to
simulate almost any engineered component with any level of detail you require. MSC is recognized as a
leader in finite element analysis software with a product list that includes MSC.Nastran, MSC.Patran,
MSC.Marc, MSC.Dytran and many others. Each of these codes within themselves are powerful generalpurpose analysis codes that can be used to solve structural, heat transfer, and coupled thermal-structural
finite element problems. When paired together and supplemented with special purpose application
modules and interfaces these software products can be tailor made to suit specific industries and
engineering problems unique to those industries.
CHAPTER 1 3
Introduction
The analysis preference also specifies that the model information be output in the MSC.Nastran Input
File format.
Throughout this Users Guide, actual examples are described in the context of using MSC.Patran. Actual
MSC.Patran forms and instructions are provided.
Nonlinear Analysis
Linear analysis assumes a linear relationship between the load applied to a structure and the response of
the structure. The stiffness of a structure in a linear analysis does not change depending on its previous
state. Linear static problems are solved in one step, by a single decomposition of the stiffness matrix. A
number of important assumptions and limitations are inherent in linear static analysis. Materials behavior
is such that the stress is directly proportional to strain (linear) and to loads that do not take the material
beyond its permanent yield point (the material remains elastic). Linear analysis is restricted to small
displacements, otherwise the stiffness of the structures changes and must be accounted for by
regenerating the stiffness matrix. Lastly, loads are assumed to be applied slowly as to keep the structure
in equilibrium.
It becomes necessary to consider nonlinear effects in structures when modeling materials with nonlinear
behavior and where large deformations (rotations and/or strains) occur. In addition, contact problems
exhibit nonlinear effects due to changes in boundary conditions.
In a nonlinear problem the stiffness of the structure depends on the displacement and the response is no
longer a linear function of the load applied. As the structure displaces due to loading, the stiffness
changes, and as the stiffness changes the structures response changes. As a result, nonlinear problems
require incremental solution schemes that divide the problem up into steps calculating the displacement,
then updating the stiffness. Each step uses the results from the previous step as a starting point. As a result
the stiffness matrix must be generated and decomposed many times during the analysis adding time and
costs to the analysis.
Nonlinear problems present many challenges. A nonlinear problem does not always have a unique
solution. Sometimes a nonlinear problem does not have any solution, although the problem can seem to
be defined correctly.
Nonlinear analysis requires choosing a solution strategy which includes dividing the loading into logical
steps, controlling the numerical processing, and planning for the possibility of changing the solution
strategy during the analysis using restarts. Which solution method to use depends on the structure itself,
the nature of the loading, and the anticipated nonlinear behavior. In some cases, one method can be
advantageous over another; in other cases, the converse might be true.
If a solution is obtainable, there is also the issue of efficiency. Each solution procedure, has pros and cons
in terms of matrix operations and storage requirements. In addition, a very important variable regarding
overall efficiency is the size of the problem. The time required to assemble a stiffness matrix, as well as
the time required to recover stresses after a solution, vary roughly linearly with the number of degrees of
freedom of the problem. On the other hand, when using a direct solver the time required to go through
the solver varies roughly quadratically with the bandwidth, as well as linearly with the number of degrees
of freedom.
CHAPTER 1 5
Introduction
Results
Like the enormous amount of data needed to define the simulation model to an analysis code, there is a
large volume of data returned from the simulation analysis. And just as it is virtually impossible to
construct a model with a text editor alone, it is equally as difficult to read and interpret the results by
hand. Using a postprocessor with a graphical user interface such as MSC.Patran is highly recommended.
Postprocessing Features of MSC.Patran
The MSC.Patran Results application gives you control of powerful graphical capabilities to display
results quantities in a variety of ways:
Deformed structural plots
Color banded fringe plots
Marker plots (vectors, tensors)
Freebody diagrams
Graph (XY) plots
Animations of most of these plot types.
The Results application treats all results quantities in a very flexible and general manner. In addition, for
maximum flexibility results can be:
Sorted
Reported
Filtered
Derived
Deleted
All of these features help give meaningful insight into results interpretation of engineering problems that
would otherwise be difficult at best.
The Results application is object oriented, providing postprocessing plots which are created, displayed,
and manipulated to obtain rapid insight into the nature of results data. The imaging is intended to provide
graphics performance sufficient for real time manipulation. Performance will vary depending on
hardware, but consistency of functionality is maintained as much as possible across all supported display
devices.
Capabilities for interactive results postprocessing also exist. Advanced visualization capabilities allow
creation of many plot types which can be saved, simultaneously plotted, and interactively manipulated
with results quantities reported at the click of the mouse button to better understand mechanical behavior.
Once defined, the visualization plots remain in the database for immediate access and provide the means
for results manipulation and review in a consistent and easy to use manner.
CHAPTER 1 7
Introduction
Feature List
The complete features of MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) are presented in the following list.
1. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) solves linear and nonlinear (material, contact and/or
geometric) static, modal (vibration), buckling, and transient dynamic structural finite element
problems.
2. Eigenvalue solutions are available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) for solving
linear or nonlinear modal and buckling analyses using either Lanczos or Inverse Power Sweep
methods of iteration. Through the use of parameters you can control the convergence of the
eigenvalues, and the modes to retain.
3. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) has a variety of solution procedures and bandwidth
optimizers.
4. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) supports the following elements/bodies:
3 and 6 noded triangular shell/membrane/plane stress/(generalized) plain strain/axisymmetric
elements
4 and 8 noded quadrilateral shell/membrane/plane stress/(generalized) plain
strain/axisymmetric elements
4 and 10 noded solid tetrahedral elements
6 and 15 noded solid wedge elements
8 and 20 noded solid hexahedral elements
2 and 3 noded beam element
2 and 3 noded bar element
2 and 3 noded axisymmetric shell element
2 noded gap element
1 and 2 noded spring elements
1 and 2 noded damper elements
Rigid and deformable contact bodies
Point Mass element
RBE elements and multi-point constraint equations are supported in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600) to tie specific nodes or degrees-of-freedom to each other. Special MPC
entities are supported, (e.g. rigid links) which can be used to tie two nodes together or equate the
motion of two DOFs.
5. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) supports the following loads and boundary
conditions:
Constrained nodal displacements (zero displacements at specified
CHAPTER 1 9
Introduction
12. Nodal displacements, velocities and accelerations, mode shapes, element and nodal stresses,
element and nodal strains, element and nodal plastic strains, element and nodal creep strains,
nodal reaction forces and contact interface stress/force values, shell element stress resultants,
element strain energy, strain energy density, and phase angle values can all be requested as output
and visualized with the aforementioned results visualization tools such as MSC.Patran. Stress
functions, for example von Mises, beam stresses, strains, and internal forces, can also be
requested as output. Composite element results are returned for each layer of the composite.
13. A restart capability is available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600). Any analysis can
be saved from any point for a possible restart. A new static load case or a buckling analysis can
be solved by restarting from the original static analysis.
CHAPTER 1 11
Introduction
Nastran.f06,
.f04, .log files
Successful
Translation?
No
Yes
Write jobname.marc.dat
Submit Marc
No
Analysis?
Yes
Use std Nast output req generate std xdb,op2,f06
Is marccpy
= 1or 2?
Yes
Stop
No
Figure 1-1
MSC.Marc Documentation
MSC provides extensive documentation covering all aspects of the MSC.Marc code. In particular the
following manuals are recommended to use in conjunction with SOL 600:
MSC.Marc Volume A: Theory and User Information - explains the capabilities of MSC.Marc
subroutines.
CHAPTER 1 13
Introduction
Patran Documentation
Three key books from the Patran library may be of assistance in running SOL 600:
Patran Users Guide - this introductory guide gives you the essential information you need to
immediately begin using MSC.Patran for SOL 600 projects. Understanding and using the
information in this guide requires no prior experience with CAE or finite element analysis.
Patran Reference Manual -a counterpart to the MSC.Nastran Reference Manual, this manual
with MSC.Nastran as the intended analysis code. All application forms and required input are
tailored to MSC.Nastran.
Output Requests
Results Files
38
28
16
Model data starting with the BEGIN BULK option and terminated by the ENDDATA option
IFP (Input File Processing) Checking
Checking of most SOL 600 Bulk Data entries are done during IFP. When one of these entries
has erroneous data entered it is more likely that IFP will flag the entry and issue a FATAL
ERROR. In most cases, IFP error checking has been enhanced to point to the field and
continuation line where the erroneous data occurs.
(Additional History Definition
Element and
Material
Properties,
Fixed Displ,
Etc.
Bulk Data
Case Control
Control Information
p
Complete Input Deck
CHAPTER 2 17
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
Executive Control
Load Incrementation,
Applied Loads,
Applied Displacements
Etc.
Input Conventions
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear performs all data conversion internally so that the system does not abort
because of data errors made by you. The program reads all input data options alphanumerically and
converts them to integer, floating point, or keywords, as necessary. MSC Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
issues error messages and displays the illegal option image if it cannot interpret the option data field
according to the specifications given in the manual. When such errors occur, the program attempts to
scan the remainder of the data file and ends the run with a FATAL ERROR or SEVERE WARNING
message.
Two input format conventions can be used: fixed and free format. You can mix fixed and free format
options within a file.
The syntax rules for fixed fields are as follows:
Give floating point numbers with or without an exponent. If you give an exponent, it must be
standard fixed-format control. This syntax rule allows you to mix fixed-field and free-field
options in the data file because the number of options you need to input any data list are the same
in both cases.
Separate data items on a option with a comma. The comma can be surrounded by any number of
blanks. Within the data item itself, no embedded blanks can appear.
Give floating point numbers with or without an exponent. If you use an exponent, it must
be preceded by the character E or D and must immediately follow the mantissa (no embedded
blanks).
Give keywords exactly as they are written in the manual.
All data can be entered as uppercase or lowercase text.
Small field format is limited to 8 columns per field. Large field is 16 columns, see the MD
Defaults
For most bulk data entries, SOL 600 does not make the distinction between zero and blank. Thus, if a
zero is entered and the default is some other value, the default will normally be used. If you wish to use
zero, enter a small number such as 1.0E-12 instead.
Section Descriptions
Executive Control
This group of entries provides overall job control for the problem and sets up initial switches to control
the flow of the program through the desired analysis. This set of input must be terminated with an CEND
parameter. See Executive Control Statements (Ch. 3) in the for additional descriptions on input formats.
Case Control
This group of options provides the loads and constraints and load incrementation method and controls
the program after the initial elastic analysis. Case Control options also include blocks which allow
changes in the initial model specifications. Case Control options can also specify print-out and
postprocessing options. Each set of load sets must be begin with a SUBCASE command and be
terminated by another SUBCASE or a BEGIN BULK command. If there is only one load case, the
SUBCASE entry is not required. The SUBCASE option requests that the program perform another
increment or series of increments. See Case Control Command Descriptions (Ch. 4) in the for additional
descriptions on input formats.
CHAPTER 2 19
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
Example
The following text illustrates a simple example of an MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear input file. It
includes the required Executive Control, Case Control, and Bulk Data sections that are required for any
MSC.Nastran analysis.
$ NASTRAN input file created by the MSC MSC.Nastran input file
$ translator (MSC.Patran 2004) on February 03, 2003 at 15:09:41.
$ Direct Text Input for File Management Section
$ Advanced Nonlinear Analysis
SOL 600,106 PATH=1 STOP=1
CEND
SEALL = ALL
SUPER = ALL
TITLE = MSC.Nastran job created on 03-Feb-03 at 15:04:03
$ Direct Text Input for Global Case Control Data
SUBCASE 1
$ Subcase name : Default
SUBTITLE=Default
NLPARM = 1
SPC = 2
LOAD = 2
DISPLACEMENT(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
SPCFORCES(SORT1,REAL)=ALL
STRESS(SORT1,REAL,VONMISES,BILIN)=ALL
$ Direct Text Input for this Subcase
BEGIN BULK
PARAM
PRTMAXIM YES
NLPARM
1
10
AUTO
1
25
P
YES
$ Direct Text Input for Bulk Data
$ Elements and Element Properties for region : shell_props
PSHELL
1
1
.253
1
1
$ Pset: "shell_props" will be imported as: "pshell.1"
CQUAD4
1
1
1
2
5
4
CQUAD4
2
1
2
3
6
5
CQUAD4
3
1
4
5
8
7
CQUAD4
4
1
5
6
9
8
$ Referenced Material Records
$ Material Record : steel
$ Description of Material : Date: 03-Feb-03
Time: 15:01:32
MAT1
1
3.+7
.3
.0075
$ Nodes of the Entire Model
GRID
1
0.
0.
0.
GRID
2
5.
0.
0.
GRID
3
10.
0.
0.
GRID
4
0.
5.
0.
GRID
5
5.
5.
0.
GRID
6
10.
5.
0.
GRID
7
0.
10.
0.
GRID
8
5.
10.
0.
GRID
9
10.
10.
0.
$ Loads for Load Case : Default
SPCADD
2
1
$ Displacement Constraints of Load Set : fix_edge
SPC1
1
123456 1
4
7
$ Contact Table for Load Case: Default
$ Nodal Forces of Load Set : point_load
FORCE
1
9
0
100.
0.
0.
-1.
$ Referenced Coordinate Frames
ENDDATA
CHAPTER 2 21
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
STOP=
Some items such as dmap, beam, CONTINUE and S67OPT are explained here. See the MSC.Nastran
QRG for a complete discussion. An explanation of these items follows:
dmap
The user will enter his own DMAP to create whatever type of output that is desired, such as
op2, xdb, punch, f06. For all other options, DMAP as needed is generated internally by
MSC.Nastran.
beam
The beam option must be specified if op2,xdb,pch. or f06 options are specified and beam
internal loads are to be placed in any of these files. The beam and eig options are mutually
exclusive (you cannot specify both).
CONTINUE=
CONTINUE= An option that specifies how MSC.Nastran will continue its analysis after MSC.Marc
finishes. To continue the analysis, do not enter any STOP or OUTR options. It is possible to perform
more than one of these operations if necessary.
MSC.Nastran will continue the current solution sequence as normal. For example, if SOL
600,106 is entered, SOL 106 will continue as normal after MSC.Marc finishes. Only 3-D
contact or materials supported by SOL 106 may be used.
MSC.Nastran will continue the current solution sequence as normal. For example if SOL
600,106 is entered, SOL 106 will continue as normal after MSC.Marc finishes. Of course, no
3-D contact or materials not supported by SOL 106 may be used.
MSC.Nastran will switch to SOL 107 to compute complex eigenvalues. MSC.Marc will
generate DMIG matrices for friction stiffness (and possibly damping) on a file specified by
pram,marcfil1,name and time specified by param,marcstif,time. This is accomplished by
making a complete copy of the original MSC.Nastran input file and spawning off a new job
with the SOL entry changed and an include entry for the DMIG file.
(Option not presently available.) MSC.Nastran will switch to SOL 107 to compute complex
eigenvalues. MSC.Marc will generate OUTPUT4 matrices for friction stiffness (and possibly
damping) on a file specified by pram,marcfil2,name and time specified by
param,marcstif,time, This is accomplished by making a complete copy of the original
MSC.Nastran input file and spawning off a new job with the SOL entry changed and an
include entry for the DMIG file.
The original MSC.Nastran file should include CMETHOD=id in the Case Control command
and a matching CEIG entry in the Bulk Data.
MSC.Nastran will switch to SOL 111 to compute modal frequency response. MSC.Marc will
generate natural frequencies and mode shapes in (tbd) format which are read into
MSC.Nastran from a file specified by param,marcfil3,name.
(Option not presently available.) Same as option 3 except SOL 112 for linear transient
response will be used.
MSC.Nastran will switch to the solution sequence given in field 9 of the MDMIOUT entry.
In addition, the DMIG entries specified by MDMIOUT will be included in a separate
MSC.Nastran execution spawned from the original execution. Case Control and Bulk Data
will be added to the original input to properly handle these matrices in the spawned
MSC.Nastran execution.
CHAPTER 2 23
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
Same as option 1 except SOL 110 is run. For this option, the original MSC.Nastran input file
must contain METHOD=ID1 and CMETHOD=ID2 in the Case Control as well as matching
EIGRL (or EIGR) and CEIG entries in the Bulk Data.
Same as option 1 except SOL 103 is run for real eigenvalues/eigenvectors. The database can
be saved to restart into SOL 110 if desired. This should be done on the command line or in a
rc file with scratch=no. For this situation, the original MSC.Nastran input file must include
METHOD=id in the Case Control command and a matching EIGRL or EIGR entry in the
Bulk Data. (CMETHOD and CEIG can also be included.) The actual restart from SOL 103
to 110 must be performed manually at the present time.
101+
Continue options 101 to 400 are used to convert MSC.Marcs initial contact tying constraints
to MPCs and then continue in SOL 101 to 112 as a standard MSC.Nastran execution. For
example, if CONTINUE=101, a SOL 101 run with all the geometry load cases, etc. from the
original run would be conducted with the addition of the initial contact MPC determined from
MSC.Marc. The continue=101+ options are frequency used to model dissimilar meshes as
well as glued contact which does not change throughout the analysis. This option can be used
for any standard MSC.Nastran sequence where the initial contact condition does not change.
In order for initial contact to work, the surfaces must be initially touching. If they are
separated by a gap, the MPCs will be zero until the gap closes and thus the initial MPCs are
zero. This option automatically sets BCPARA INITCON=1.
YES
(rest of deck is the same as any other SOL 600 input file)
CQUAD4
CQUAD4
ENDDATA
239
240
2
2
271
272
272
273
293
294
292
293
The full input for this example can be obtained from MSC.Nastran development. The name of the input
file continu2.dat
CHAPTER 2 25
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
Critical new items are Case Control command, CMETHOD=101, the four parameters after BEGIN
BULK and Bulk Data entry, EIGC. An explanation of the parameters follows:
param,marcfil1,dmig002
This means that a file named dmig002 will be used. It contains stiffness
matrix terms (possibly from a set of unsymmetric friction stiffness
matrices)
param,mrmtxnam,kaax
This means that in the dmig002 file, use DMIG matrix terms labeled kaax
(or KAAX case does not matter).
param,mrspawn2,tran
This means that the primary MSC.Nastran run will spawn another
MSC.Nastran run to compute the complex eigenvalues. The name of the
command is nastran (nas is always used and the characters specified by
this parameter are added to the end of nas. Thus, we get
nas+tran=nastran).
param,mrrcfile,nast2.rc
This is the name of the rc file to be used for the second (spawned)
MSC.Nastran run.
jid.nast.dat will be created from the original input file. This file will contain the CMETHOD
Case Control and CEIG commands, all of the original geometry and additional entries to read
the dmig002 file.
A second MSC.Nastran job will be spawned from the primary MC.Nastran run using the
command
nastran jid.nast rc=nast2.rc
The nast2.rc file can be the same as nast1.rc or can contain different items. Usually memory will
need to be larger in nast2.rc than in nast1.rc.
The second MSC.Nastran run computes the complex eigenvalues and finishes.
Control of the process returns to the primary MSC.Nastran run and it finishes.
When the PATH keyword is omitted on the SOL 600 Executive statement, the program will search the
following location to find MSC.Marc:
MSC_BASE/MSC_VERSD/marc/MSC_ARCHM/marc20xx/tools
If MSC_ARCHM does not exist, MSC_ARCH is used instead. The environmental variables
MSC_BASE, MSC_VERSD, MSC_ARCH and/or MSC_ARCHM are set by the MSC.Nastran script
(see the MSC.Nastran Installation and Operations Guide for further details). If MSC.Marc is not found
on the above path, likely locations near that path are searched. If MSC.Marc is still not found, the job will
terminate with an appropriate message and the user must determine the correct location of the MSC.Marc
installation, use the PATH=1 keyword (see the MD Nastran Quick Reference Guide for further details).
DMIG-OUT
A new option named DMIG-OUT allows the stiffness, differential stiffness and mass matrices
(assembled or element-by-element) to be output for selected output times or at the end of each nonlinear
subcase for use in other analyses. This is a less expensive procedure, than using the Bulk Data entry,
MDMIOUT (which creates a superelement), but results in a much larger matrix.
Restart from SOL 600 into SOL 103 or into Another Linear
Solution Sequence
For the purpose of a prestressed normal modes analysis, the old way of restarting from SOL 106 into SOL
103 is no longer necessary; the user can, instead, restart from a SOL 600 run into another SOL 600 run
to perform the prestressed normal modes calculation.
Restarts from SOL 600 into linear solution sequences are not recommended to the novice user because
of several limitations. The results of the linear restart are incremental values with respect to the preload,
CHAPTER 2 27
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
not total values. However, some experienced users restart from SOL 600 into SOL 103 to perform
prestressed modal analysis with changing boundary conditions, or restart into another linear solution
sequence to perform a perturbed linear solution on a preluded structure.
Using MSC.Patran, you can run a MSC.Nastran analysis or you may generate the MSC.Nastran Input
File to run externally. For information on generating the MSC.Nastran Input file from within
MSC.Patran, see Analysis Form (Ch. 3) in the MD Patran MD Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1:
Structural Analysis.
Editing the BDF
Once the Bulk Data File has been generated, you can edit the file directly from MSC.Patran.
1. Click the Analysis Application button to bring up Analysis Application form.
2. On the Analysis form set the Action>Object>Method combination to Analyze>Existing
Deck>Full Run and click Edit Input File...
MSC.Patran finds the BDF with the current job name and displays the file for editing in a text
editing window.
Output Requests
As a part of the input, you can request which results quantities you want to be returned from MSC.Marc
back to MSC.Nastran and the formats of the results files.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) produces stress and strain results that differ from those
results available with SOL 106 and 129. A detailed discussion of the stress and strain measures for SOL
600 is given in the following section. For a complete listing of all possible results quantities that can be
returned for a SOL 600 analysis, see Output from the Analysis (Ch. 8).
Any of the results quantities can be placed on MSC.Marcs t16/t19 output files to be postprocessed by
MSC.Patran. In addition, the more basic types of output (displacements, velocities, accelerations,
Cauchy stress tensor and one type of strain tensor) and basic contact information, can be translated to
MSC.Nastranss standard op2, xdb, punch and even f06 files using the OUTR option described above.
At present, new datablock definitions have not been created to handle all types of nonlinear output.
Therefore, it is strongly suggested that the t16 or t19 file be selected for postprocessing in order to view
all types of output. MSC.Patran can postprocess nearly all types of output selected by the MARCOUT
entry. For a complete description of the outputs available using MARCOUT, please see Bulk Data
Entries of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Deformations
Consider a three dimensional body B in its undeformed and deformed configuration (see Figure 2-1).
With respect to a Cartesian coordinate system ( E 1, E 2, E 3 ) , the position vector of a material point in the
undeformed configuration is written as:
X
Z X1 E1 H X2 E2 H X3 E3
(2-1)
In the deformed configuration, the material point has a position vector x , given by:
x
Z x1 E1 H x2 E2 H x3 E3
(2-2)
The displacement vector u is defined as the difference between the position vector in the deformed and
the undeformed configuration and reads:
u
Z x X
Z u1 E1 H u2 E2 H u3 E3
(2-3)
CHAPTER 2 29
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
Undeformed
B
Deformed
dA 0
^
dF
dA
N
E2
dF
x
E1
E3
Figure 2-1
It will be assumed that there is always a unique relation between the position vector of a point in the
deformed and the position vector of this point in the undeformed configuration. This can formally be
expressed as:
x
Z x (X )
(2-4)
Based on Equation (2-4), a fundamental deformation measure can be given, namely the deformation
gradient F , which is defined by:
x 1 x 1 x 1
JJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJ
X 1 X 2 X 3
F Z
x 2 x 2 x 2
JJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJ
X 1 X 2 X 3
(2-5)
x 3 x 3 x 3
JJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJ
X 1 X 2 X 3
Substituting Equation (2-5) into Equation (2-3) shows that the deformation gradient can also be written
as a function of the coordinates in the undeformed configuration and the displacement components:
u 1
1 H JJJJJJJJJ
J
X 1
u 1
JJJJJJJJJ
J
X 2
u 1
JJJJJJJJJ
J
X 3
u 1 u 1 u 1
JJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJ
X 1 X 2 X 3
u 2
JJJJJJJJJ
J
X 1
u 2
J
1 H JJJJJJJJJ
X 2
u 2
JJJJJJJJJ
J
X 3
u 2 u 2 u 2
Z I H JJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJ
X 1 X 2 X 3
u 3
JJJJJJJJJ
J
X 1
u 3
JJJJJJJJJ
J
X 2
u 3
1 H JJJJJJJJJ
J
X 3
F Z
(2-6)
u 3 u 3 u 3
JJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJ
X 1 X 2 X 3
I Z
1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
(2-7)
Starting out from the deformation gradient, several well-known symmetric strain tensors can be defined,
namely the engineering strain tensor e , the Green-Lagrange strain tensor E and the right CauchyGreen strain tensor C :
T
1
e Z JJJ ( F H F 2I )
2
(2-8)
1 T
E Z JJJ ( F F I )
2
(2-9)
C Z F F
(2-10)
(2-11)
Example
Suppose that the deformation of a body is described by:
1
1
1
x 1 Z 4X 1 cos JJJ X 2 sin , x 2 Z 4X 1 sin H JJJ X 2 cos , x 3 Z JJJ X 3
2
2
2
This deformation can be obtained by first stretching a block of material in the E 1 -direction and then
rotating it around the E 3 -axis (see Figure 2-1). The deformation gradient can easily be evaluated as:
CHAPTER 2 31
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
F Z
1
4 cos JJJ sin 0
2
1
4 sin JJJ cos 0
2
1
JJJ
0
0
2
so that the engineering and the right Cauchy-Green strain tensors are given by:
4 cos 1
e Z
7
JJJ sin
2
1
JJJ cos 1 0 , C Z
2
1
0
JJJ
2
7
JJJ sin
2
0
16 0 0
1
0 JJJ 0
4
1
0 0 JJJ
4
From these expressions, it can be concluded that the engineering strain tensor only provides a useful
deformation measure if the angle remains small, so that cos 1 and sin 0 . On the other hand,
the components of the right Cauchy-Green tensor, and by virtue of Equation (2-11) also the components
of the Green-Lagrange strain tensor, are independent of the value of the angle .
The deformation gradient can be rewritten as:
E3
E2
L2
L3
L 2 H L 2
L 3 H L 3
L1
E1
Figure 2-2
L 1 H L 1
F Z
cos sin 0
sin cos 0
0
0
1
4 0 0
1
0 JJJ 0
2
1
0 0 JJJ
2
Z RU
in which R is a rotation tensor and U is a symmetric stretch tensor, where the stretch tensor and the right
Cauchy-Green strain tensor are related by:
C Z U
12
It can be proved that in this way any deformation gradient can be uniquely decomposed into a rotation
tensor and a stretch tensor.
If there is no rotation of the material the non-zero components of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor
can be expressed in terms of the components of the engineering strain tensor as:
C 11 Z 1 H e 11 ,
C 22 Z 1 H e 22 ,
C 33 Z 1 H e 33
Instead of 1 H e 11 , 1 H e 22 , and 1 H e 33 , one often uses the principal stretch ratios 1 , 2 and 3 ,
respectively.
A geometrical interpretation of the principal stretch ratios can be given by indicating the initial edge
lengths as L 1 , L 2 , L 3 and the changes in edge lengths as L 1 , L 2 , L 3 (see Figure 2-2). Now the
principal stretch ratios can be written as:
L 1 H L 1
L 2 H L 2
L 3 H L 3
1 Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J , 2 Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J , 3 Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
L1
L2
L3
In the example discussed above, the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor only has non-zero terms on its main
diagonal, indicating that the deformation consists of a pure stretch. In a general state of deformation,
there will also be non-zero off-diagonal terms. Then the principal stretch ratios must be determined based
on the eigenvalues of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor. Denoting these eigenvalues as CD 11 , CD 22 ,
and CD 33 , the principal stretch ratios are generally given by:
1 Z
CD 11 , 2 Z
CD 22 , 3 Z
CD 33
(2-12)
It can be concluded that the principal stretch ratios completely define the stretch of a material, but not the
rotation.
CHAPTER 2 33
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
Another way to characterize the deformation of a material is based on the invariants of the right CauchyGreen strain tensor. These invariants are defined as:
I 1 Z C 11 H C 22 H C 33
(2-13)
2
I 2 Z C 11 C 22 H C 22 C 33 H C 33 C 11 C 12 C 23 C 31
2
I 3 Z C 11 C 22 C 33 H 2C 12 C 23 C 31 C 11 C 23 H
2
(2-14)
(2-15)
C 22 C 31 C 33 C 12
Because I 1 , I 2 , and I 3 are invariants of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor, their values can also be
determined based on the eigenvalues of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor. Using Equation (2-12), this
yields:
2
I 1 Z 1 H 2 H 3
2 2
2 2
(2-16)
2 2
I 2 Z 1 2 H 2 3 H 3 1
2 2 2
I 3 Z 1 2 3
(2-17)
(2-18)
(2-19)
or:
I3 Z 1
(2-20)
The compressibility can also be expressed in terms of the determinant of the deformation gradient,
det ( F ) . Since F Z RU , this can be evaluated as:
1
det ( F ) Z det ( RU ) Z det ( R )det ( U ) Z det ( U ) Z det C JJJ Z 1 2
2
3
(2-21)
(2-22)
Stresses
Consider the deformed configuration of body B , as indicated in Figure 2-1. On an elemental area dA
with unit normal vector n , an elemental force vector dF is acting. This force vector is a result of forces
being transmitted from one portion of the body to another. According to the Cauchy stress principle, the
stress vector or traction vector t is defined as:
dF
Z JJJJJJJJJ
dA
(2-23)
Similar to Equation (2-1) to Equation (2-3), the components of t , n , and dF are indicated as t 1 , t 2 , t 3 ,
n 1 , n 2 , n 3 , dF 1 , dF 2 and dF 3 . Now the following relation between the components of the stress
vector and the components of the normal vector can be given:
t1
t2
t3
T 11 T 12 T 13
n1
T 21 T 22 T 23
n2
T 31 T 32 T 33
n3
(2-24)
T 11 T 12 T 13
n1
T 21 T 22 T 23
n 2 dA
T 31 T 32 T 33
n3
(2-25)
In Equation (2-24) and Equation (2-25), T 11 to T 33 are the components of the true or Cauchy stress
tensor T . The components T 11 , T 22 and T 33 are called the normal or direct stress components, while
the other components are called shear stress components. The first index of the stress components defines
the normal of the plane on which the stress vector acts. The second index indicates the positive direction
of the component (see Figure 2-1). It can be shown that the Cauchy stress tensor is symmetric, so
T 12 Z T 21 , T 13 Z T 31 and T 23 Z T 32 . The physical meaning of the Cauchy stress tensor is that it
gives the current force per unit deformed area.
Another frequently used stress tensor in a large deformation analysis is the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress
tensor. In order to define this tensor, the force vector dF is transformed using the inverse of the
deformation gradient F :
CHAPTER 2 35
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
E3
T 23
T 21
E1
E2
T
Figure 2-3
dF 1
dF
2
Z F
dF 3
22
dF 1
(2-26)
dF 2
dF 3
^
Assuming that the transformed force vector d F acts on the elemental area dA 0 with unit normal vector
N in the undeformed configuration (see Figure 2-1), the components S 11 to S 33 of the symmetric
second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor S are defined as:
dF 1
dF
2
dF 3
S 11 S 12 S 13
N1
S 21 S 22 S 23
N 2 dA 0
S 31 S 32 S 33
N3
(2-27)
The physical meaning of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor is not so clear. It can be considered to
give the transformed current force per unit undeformed area.
Using the deformation gradient, the Cauchy stress tensor and the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor
can be related to another by:
1
1 T
S Z det ( F )F T ( F )
(2-28)
T
1
T Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ FSF
det ( F )
(2-29)
Notice that for small deformations and small rotations, F I , so the differences between the Cauchy
stress tensor and the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor vanish. In that case they reduce to the so-called
engineering stress tensor , which is known to give the force per unit undeformed area.
Example
Due to a uniaxial tensile load, the state of deformation of a body is assumed to be given by (see also
Figure 2-1):
1
x 1 Z 4X 1 , x 2 Z JJJ X 2 , x 3 Z 1
JJJ X 3
2
2
The force is assumed to be homogeneously distributed over the cross section A in the E 2 - E 3 -plane.
Evaluating Equation (2-25) for the cases that n
Z E1 , n
Z E 2 , and n
Z E 3 yields:
A0
A0
F
A
F
E3
E2
A
E1
Figure 2-4
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
T 11 T 12 T 13
Z
T 21 T 22 T 23
T 31 T 32 T 33
T 11 T 12 T 13
T 21 T 22 T 23
T 31 T 32 T 33
T 11 T 12 T 13
T 21 T 22 T 23
T 31 T 32 T 33
1
0 A
0
0
1 A
0
0
0 A
1
so that the only nonzero component of the Cauchy stress tensor is:
F
T 11 Z JJJJ
A
CHAPTER 2 37
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
Because:
F Z
4 0 0
1
0 JJJ 0 , det ( F ) Z 1
2
1
0 0 JJJ
2
it follows from Equation (2-28) that the only non-zero component of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress
tensor is:
1 F
S 11 Z JJJJJJ JJJJ
16 A
Upon rewriting the current cross sectional area A in terms of the original cross-sectional area A 0 as
JJJ A 0 , the nonzero component of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor can also be written as:
A Z 1
4
1 F
S 11 Z JJJ JJJJJJJ
4 A0
in which F A 0 is recognized as the engineering stress 11 . The differences between the various stress
components can be summarized as:
1
T 11 Z 4 11 , S 11 Z JJJ 11
4
Results Files
When a SOL 600 analysis has been completed successfully, a message file and a results file are created
and saved. If you request that a print file be saved in addition to the standard results file, or if the analysis
aborts prematurely due to an error, a print file is also saved.
CHAPTER 2 39
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
immediately aborted.
E Z
dV d
(2-30)
0V
stress tensor
element volume
strain rate
The integration over time leads to the following recursive formula using the trapezoidal rule
T
1
E n H 1 Z E n H E n H 1 Z E n H JJJ n H 1 ( n H n H 1 ) dV
2
nH1
strain-increment
(2-31)
CHAPTER 2 41
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
(2-32)
For computational convenience, MSC.Nastran uses Equation (2-32) to calculate the element strain
energy. The internal element forces are readily available in every step because they are needed for the
force equilibrium. Note that temperature effects are included in the internal element forces.
When loads from temperature differences or element deformation are present, the default definition of
element strain energy for linear elements differ from the definition for nonlinear elements. For linear
elements, the element strain energy is defined as
T
1 T
E Z JJJ u K e u u P e t
2
(2-33)
where P e t is the element load vector for temperature loads and element deformation. Equation (2-33)
assumes that the temperatures are constant within a subcase. For nonlinear elements, the definition of
Equation (2-30) is used. In the case of linear material and geometry, Equation (2-30) becomes
1 T
1 T
E Z JJJ u K e u JJJ u P e t
2
2
(2-34)
Equation (2-34) assumes that the temperature varies linearly within a subcase. The user may request the
definition of Equation (2-34) to be applied to linear elements by adding PARAM,XFLAG,2 to the input
file. The default value for XFLAG is 0, meaning that linear elements will use the definition of
Equation (2-33).
User Input
The output of grid point force balance and strain energy in nonlinear analysis is requested with the
existing GPFORCE and ESE Case Control commands, respectively. The Case Control commands
remain unchanged.
Printed Output
The output is the same as in linear analysis. An example appears below.
Example
The following Nastran input deck represents a simplified model of a mechanical clutch that consists of
springs, beams, rigid elements, and gap elements. A geometric nonlinear analysis is performed. Both
GPFORCE and ESE output requests are applied above all subcases. This is a good example to show the
grid point force balance with both linear and nonlinear elements, that includes:
applied loads
element forces
SPC forces
MPC forces.
The model is shown in Figure 2-1. For clarity, only the elements are displayed.
The dashed lines represent rigid elements, the rest are gap and beam elements. Spring elements are
located at the intersection point of all dashed lines and are not visible in the figure because their
connection points are coincident.
CHAPTER 2 43
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data File and Results Files
SEPTEMBER
26, 2000
MSC.NASTRAN
9/25/00
0
2.00000E+00
G R I D
POINT-ID
1
ELEMENT-ID
1
1
248
SUBCASE 2
LOAD STEP =
PAGE
10001
1
1
100
100
100
100
101
101
101
101
101
102
10002
101
2004
1
101
102
102
102
2
P O I N T
B A L A N C E
SOURCE
APP-LOAD
.0
.0
.0
F-OF-SPC
BEAM
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
BEAM
*TOTALS*
F-OF-SPC
F-OF-MPC
ELAS2
*TOTALS*
F-OF-SPC
BEAM
BEAM
GAP
*TOTALS*
BEAM
BEAM
GAP
T1
F O R C E
T2
T3
R1
R2
.0
.0
.0
R3
-2.400000E+02
.0
.0
.0
2.400000E+02
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
-5.366200E-25 -4.514879E-24
.0
4.535559E-23 -6.400176E-24
.0
5.366200E-25
4.514879E-24
.0
-4.535559E-23
6.400176E-24
1.292178E-24
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
1.070983E-24
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
2.363161E-24
.0
.0
-3.078859E-28 -3.549490E-26
2.535672E-24
.0
-3.701448E-08
2.907432E-07
.0
.0
.0
-5.474456E-09
-3.888788E-07 -1.144153E-07
3.078859E-28
3.549490E-26 -2.535672E-24 -1.777338E-23
1.270000E-10
1.438901E-27
.0
.0
.0
.0
-4.257663E-07
1.763280E-07
.0
.0
.0
-5.474456E-09
-2.715682E-08 -2.918291E-07
.0
.0
.0
-2.549396E-09
-1.637746E-08
1.273060E-07
1.270000E-10 -9.144001E-27
.0
.0
.0
.0
.0
-1.374512E-25
.0
.0
SEPTEMBER
26, 2000
MSC.NASTRAN
9/25/00
PAGE
231
SUBCASE 1
LOAD STEP =
1.00000E+00
E L E M E N T
ELEMENT-TYPE = BEAM
SUBCASE
S T R A I N
E N E R G I E S
4.422530E+02
-1 =
4.422530E+02
0
ELEMENT-ID
STRAIN-ENERGY
PERCENT OF TOTAL
STRAIN-ENERGY-DENSITY
101
1.211380E+01
2.6928
5.680606E-02
102
1.049874E+00
.2334
4.923244E-03
103
1.323984E-01
.0294
6.208644E-04
104
1.323428E-01
.0294
6.206040E-04
105
1.374425E-01
.0306
6.445181E-04
106
1.407006E-01
.0313
6.597968E-04
107
1.478413E-01
.0329
6.932822E-04
108
1.483829E-01
.0330
6.958218E-04
109
1.032130E-01
.0229
1.936014E-04
110
3.163312E-01
.0703
7.020313E-04
111
4.605607E-01
.1024
1.927717E-03
112
7.067609E-01
.1571
2.958209E-03
113
4.186914E-01
.0931
1.752469E-03
121
3.068841E+00
.6822
2.905759E-02
Remarks
Linear and nonlinear elements can be mixed. The output for grid point force and element strain
energy in nonlinear analysis follow the same format as in linear analysis.
The reference system for the grid point force output is the grid point global coordinate system.
The user cannot specify another output coordinate system. In nonlinear, the grid point forces are
not aligned with element edges. Therefore, PARAM,NOELOF and PARAM,NOELOP are
ignored in nonlinear analysis.
In nonlinear analysis, the element strain energy must be calculated for each intermediate load
step even if the output is requested only in the last load step. To save computations, the element
strain energy is only calculated upon user request. The Case Control commands, GPFORCE
must be present to activate grid point force output or element strain energy calculations
and output.
Introduction
Applying Constraints
Iteration Methods
Convergence Controls
Singularity Ratio
46
47
50
55
66
71
81
84
86
60
48
Introduction
The finite element method is a powerful tool for analyzing complex problems in structural and continuum
mechanics. The analysis of a structure using the finite element method has four basic steps:
1. Modeling, in which the structure is subdivided into an assemblage of discrete volumes called
finite elements, and properties are assigned to each element.
2. Evaluation of element characteristics, such as stiffness and mass matrices, followed by
assembling the element characteristic matrices to obtain the assembled or so-called global
matrices characteristic of the entire structure. A similar process is followed to obtain the total
loads, in vector form, applied to the structure.
3. Solution of the system equations for displacements, natural frequencies and mode shapes, or
buckling load factors.
4. Calculating other quantities of interest, such as strains, stresses and strain energy.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses the finite element displacement method, in which a large system
of equations is solved to obtain the displacements at all node points of the structure. Strains are then
obtained on the element level as derivatives of displacements and stresses are obtained by multiplying a
small matrix of material constants by the strains. Comprehensive presentations of the finite element
method together with numerous applications are available in textbooks and the research literature.
The main purposes of this chapter are more limited, namely:
1. To give a brief overview of the finite element displacement method for solving linear and
nonlinear structural problems in statics.
2. To describe the theory, techniques and algorithms specifically used in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600).
3. Outline some guidelines for selecting appropriate analysis methods.
CHAPTER 3 47
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
CHAPTER 3 49
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
Applying Constraints
Once you have constructed a model of your structure, constraints are added that force selected portions
of your model to remain fixed or to move by a specified amount. These constraints can be either:
Single Point Constraints
Multipoint Constraints
(3-1)
where u is the value of the prescribed displacement on the degree of freedom i. The case of u = 0 is the
most common case, and is often used as a boundary condition, to fix or ground the movement of a
point in a certain direction.
Since the value of i is known, one could, in principle, eliminate the specified degree of freedom from
the other degrees of freedom to be solved for as unknowns. This would reduce the size of the system of
equations to be solved, but on the other hand it would take time to perform the elimination, and this
approach adds complexity to the code.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses a different technique. A number which is large compared to the
stiffness coefficients (say, for discussion, 1020) is added to the diagonal term Kii of the equation for the
degree of freedom to be constrained. Also, if the degree of freedom is to be constrained to a nonzero value
u, then u x 1020 is added to the right hand side of the modified equation. This modified equation is now:
K i 1 1 H H ( K i i )10 20 i H H K i n n Z F i H ( u 10 20 )
Assuming all Kij to be small with respect to 1020, the solution of the system of equations is obtained with
negligible error.
The modified system of equations remain well conditioned. The value used by MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear for the large number is 1010 times the largest stiffness coefficient found on the diagonal of the
stiffness matrix.
CHAPTER 3 51
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
8
2
5
X
Figure 3-1
To connect a plate or beam element (which has six degrees of freedom per node three displacements
and three rotations) to a solid element (which has only three translations), it is necessary to relate the
rotation of the plate to the displacements of the solid. As an example, consider Figure 3-2 where we see
the side view of a plate-to-solid transition. The equation:
ROTZ ( 3 ) Z ( UX ( 2 ) UX ( 6 ) ) ( DELTAY )
where DELTAY is the difference in Y-coordinate between nodes 2 and 6, will enforce the desired
compatibility on the rotation about the global Z axis. Other constraints would need to be written to ensure
the compatibility of the other displacements and rotations.
Y
5
Z
X
1
Figure 3-2
4
2
Compatibility requires that the rotations of the plate element be related to the displacements on the top
and bottom of the solid element.
Consider Figure 3-3, showing a rigid link connecting two nodes M and S, each of which has six degrees
of freedom and is attached to other elements in the structure.
The displacements at the dependent node S are related to those at the independent node M by the
following relationship:
UX s
UX m
ROTX m
UY s Z UY m H [ H ] ROTY m
UZ s
UZ m
ROTZ m
and
ROTX s
ROTX m
ROTY s Z [ I ] ROTY m
ROTZ s
ROTZ m
where [I] is a 3 x 3 unit matrix and [H] is given by
( Zs Zm)
( Ym Ys )
( Zm Zs )
( Xs Xm )
( Ys Ym )
( Xm Xs )
0
[H ] Z
Figure 3-3
If both nodes have six degrees of freedom, then multipoint constraint equations can be written to ensure
that, for small displacements, the two nodes move as a rigid body.
CHAPTER 3 53
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
(3-2)
where {}s are the dependent (slave) variables and {}m are the independent (master) variables.
Then, the global matrix of Equation (3-6) can be rewritten in partitioned form as
Ks s Ks m Ks i s
Fs
Km s Km m Km i m Z Fm
Ki s Ki m Ki i i
Fi
(3-3)
where the subscript i refers to those degrees of freedom which are not referenced in any
constraint equation.
Substituting {}s from Equation (3-2) into Equation (3-3) and rearranging, we get
K
F
m m K mi K ms A 0 m Z m
K
K i s A 0 i
Fi
i m Ki i
(3-4)
and
m
( [K s m K s i ] [Ks s A 0] ) Z { F s }
i
(3-5)
[ ]T, we get
T
T
ATK
m
AT Fs
sm A K s i A K ss A 0
0
0
0 i
0
0
(3-6)
K
Fi
Ki s A 0
0
0
0
0 i
i m Ki i
(3-7)
This symmetric Equation (3-7) gives the reduced equations, which can be solved for the variables
{}m,{}i. Values of {}s can then be recovered from Equation (3-2). However, this needs
rearrangement of the coefficients in the stiffness matrix. Hence, we do some more manipulation.
First, we combine Equation (3-2) with Equation (3-7):
[I ]
[A]
T
T
0 ( K m m K ms A A K s m H A K ss A ) ( K m i
( Ki m Ki sA )
0
s
A T K si ) m Z F m A T F s
Ki i
Fi
i
(3-8)
Then we restore symmetry to Equation (3-8) by first premultiplying the first equation of Equation (3-8)
by [A]T[Kss] and adding the resulting equation to the second part of Equation (3-8), and then,
premultiplying the first equation of Equation (3-8) by Kss. This results in
Ks s
Ks s A
A T K ss ( K m m K ms A A T K s m H 2A T K ss A ) ( K m i
0
( Ki m Ki s A )
0
s
A T K si ) m Z F m A T F s
Ki i
Fi
i
(3-9)
If we solve this modified Equation (3-9), which is symmetric, the resulting solution vector will satisfy the
constraint equations.
For large problems, the modifications implied by Equation (3-9) will take a substantial amount of
computer time, if performed on the global stiffness matrix.
CHAPTER 3 55
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
When these assumptions are violated, linear analysis is no longer valid and nonlinear effects must
be introduced.
Nonlinear problems are classified into three broad categories: geometric nonlinearity, material
nonlinearity, and boundary condition nonlinearity (contact).
Sources of Nonlinearity
Geometric Nonlinearity
Geometrically nonlinear problems involve large displacements; large means that the displacements
invalidate the small displacement assumptions inherent in the equations of linear analysis. For example,
consider a classical thin plate subject to a lateral load; if the deflection of the plates midplane is anything
close to the thickness of the plate, then the displacement is considered large and a linear analysis is
not applicable.
Another aspect of geometric nonlinear analysis involves follower forces. Consider a slender cantilever
beam subject to an initially vertical end load. The load is sufficient to cause large displacements.
In the deformed shape plot, the load is no longer vertical; it has followed the structure to its deformed
state. Capturing this behavior requires the iterative update techniques of nonlinear analysis.
For details on the finite element formulations for geometric nonlinearities, see Geometric Nonlinearities
(Ch. 4).
Material Nonlinearity
Recall that linear analysis assumes a linear relationship between stress and strain.
Material nonlinear analysis solution sequences can be used to analyze problems in static analysis where
the stress-strain relationship of the material is nonlinear. In addition, large strain situations can be
analyzed. Examples of material nonlinearities include metal plasticity, materials such as soils and
concrete, or rubbery materials (where the stress-strain relationship is nonlinear elastic). Various plasticity
theories such as von Mises or Tresca (for metals), and Mohr-Coulomb or Drucker-Prager (for frictional
materials such as soils or concrete) can be selected by the user. Three choices for the definition of
subsequent yield surfaces are available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. They are isotropic hardening,
kinematic hardening, or combined isotropic and kinematic hardening. With such generality, most plastic
material behavior, with or without the Bauschinger effect, can be modeled.
For details on the finite element formulations for material nonlinearities, see Material Nonlinearities
(Ch. 4).
Contact
Contact problems exhibit nonlinear effects due to changes in boundary conditions. If there is a change in
constraints due to contact during loading, the problem may be classified as a boundary nonlinear problem
and would require CGAP elements or the BCONTACT, BCBODY, or BSURF option. The use of GAP
elements is discouraged in SOL 600.
For details on the finite element formulations for boundary nonlinearities, see Nonlinear Boundary
Conditions (Ch. 4).
CHAPTER 3 57
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
and NLAUTO bulk data entries for more details. Load increments may be saved for restart if desired.This
is important because sometimes the solution does not converge during a subcase. If the loading is divided
into increments and these values are saved to the database, the restart strategy can continue from a
loading value closer to the problem value than having to go back to the previous subcase.
Iterations
In the incremental solution process, the unbalanced forces that occur during a load increment are
reintroduced internally into the solution until the solution has converged. The process of redistributing
the unbalanced force within a load increment is known as an iteration. The iteration is the lowest level
of the solution process. Iterations continue within a load increment until the solution converges or any
of the specified convergence parameters are exceeded.
(3-10)
K u Z F R Z r
(3-11)
T
where K is the elastic stiffness matrix, K is the tangent stiffness matrix in a nonlinear system, u is
the displacement vector, F is the applied load vector, and r is the residual.
The linearized system is converted to a minimization problem expressed as:
T
( u ) Z 1 2u Ku u F
(3-12)
For linear structural problems, this process can be considered as the minimization of the potential energy.
The minimum is achieved when
1
u Z K F
(3-13)
The function decreases most rapidly in the direction of the negative gradient.
( u ) Z F Ku Z r
(3-14)
One method to solve both linear and nonlinear problems is to use iterations. The objective of the
iterative techniques is to minimize the function, , without decomposing the stiffness matrix. In the
simplest methods,
uk H 1 Z uk H k rk
(3-15)
where
T
k Z r k r k r k Kr k
(3-16)
The problem is that the gradient directions are too close, which results in poor convergence.
An improved method led to the conjugate gradient method, in which
u k H 1 Z u k H k Pk
T
k Z P k r k 1 P k KP k
(3-17)
(3-18)
CHAPTER 3 59
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
Iteration Loop
Matrix Assembly
Matrix Solution
Stress Recovery
No
Convergence
Yes
Output Phase
Yes
Next
Increment
No
Stop
Figure 3-4
Direct
Profile
Iterative
Sparse
Multifrontal Sparse
(default)
CASI
Real Symmetric
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Real Nonsymmetric
Yes
No
Yes
No
Complex Symmetric
Yes
No
Yes
No
Complex nonsymmetric
No
No
Yes
No
Out-of-core
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Solver Option
Direct Methods
Traditionally, the solution of a system of linear equations was accomplished using direct solution
procedures, such as Cholesky decomposition and the Crout reduction method. These methods are usually
reliable, in that they give accurate results for virtually all problems at a predictable cost. For positive
definite systems, there are no computational difficulties. For poorly conditioned systems, however, the
results can degenerate but the cost remains the same. The problem with these direct methods is that a
large amount of memory (or disk space) is required, and the computational costs become very large.
CHAPTER 3 61
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
Iterative Methods
Iterative solvers are a viable alternative for the solution of large systems. These iterative methods are
based on preconditioned conjugate gradient methods. The single biggest advantage of these iterative
methods is that they allow the solution of very large systems at a reduced computational cost. This is true
regardless of the hardware configuration. The disadvantage of these methods is that the solution time is
dependent not only upon the size of the problem, but also the numerical conditioning of the system. A
poorly conditioned system leads to slow convergence hence increased computation costs.
When discussing iterative solvers, two related concepts are introduced: fractal dimension, and
conditioning number. Both are mathematical concepts, although the fractal dimension is a simpler
physical concept. The fractal dimension, the range of which is between 1 and 3, is a measure of the
chunkiness of the system. For instance, a beam has a fractal dimension of 1, while a cube has a fractal
dimension of 3.
The conditioning number is related to the ratio of the lowest to the highest eigenvalues of the system.
This number is also related to the singularity ratio, which is reported in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
output when using a direct solution procedure. In problems involving beams or shells, the conditioning
number is typically small, because of large differences between the membrane and bending stiffnesses.
Preconditioners
The choice of preconditioner can substantially improve the conditioning of the system, which in turn
reduces the number of iterations required. While all positive definite systems with N degrees of freedom
converges in N iterations, a well conditioned system typically converges in less than the square root of
N iterations.
The available preconditioners available in the sparse iterative solver are
Preconditioner
Sparse
Diagonal
Yes
Scaled Diagonal
Yes
Incomplete Cholesky
Yes
The sparse iterative solver requires an error criteria to determine when convergence occurs. The default
is to use an error criteria based upon the ratio between the residuals in the solution and the reaction force.
c
Z F
(3-19)
Res Z F F
Z F Ku
(3-20)
If the system is linear ( K does not change) and exact numerics are preformed, then Res Z 0 .
Because this is an iterative method the residual is nonzero, but reduces in size with further iterations.
Convergence is obtained when
Res Reac < TOL
(3-21)
The tolerance is specified through the NLPARM, TSTEPNL, NLAUTO, and NLSTRAT options.
Iterative Solvers
In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, two iterative solvers are available: one using a sparse matrix
technique and the other an element-based CASI technique. This method is advantageous for different
classes of problems.
There exist certain types of analyses for which the iterative solver is not appropriate. These types include:
Elastic analysis
Explicit creep analysis
Eigenvalue analysis
Use of gap elements
Elastic or explicit creep analysis involves repeated solutions using different load vectors. When a direct
solver is used, this is performed very efficiently using back substitution. However, when an iterative
solver is used, the stiffness matrix is never decomposed, and the solution associated with a new load
vector requires a complete re-solution.
The sparse iterative solver can exhibit poor convergence when shell elements or Herrmann
incompressible elements used for hyperelastic analyses are present.
Storage Methods
In general, a system of linear equations with N unknown is represented by a matrix of size N by N , or
2
N variables. Fortunately, in finite element or finite difference analyses, the system is banded and not
all of the entries need to be stored. This substantially reduces the memory (storage) requirements as well
as the computational costs.
In the finite element method, additional zeroes often exist in the system, which results in a partially full
bandwidth. Hence, the profile (or skyline) method of storage is advantageous. This profile storage method
is used in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to store the stiffness matrix. When many zeroes exist within
the bandwidth, the sparse storage methods can be quite advantageous. Such techniques do not store the
zeroes, but require additional memory to store the locations of the nonzero values. You can determine the
sparsity of the system (before decomposition) by examining the statements:
Number of nodal entries excluding fill in x
Number of nodal entries including fill in y
If the ratio ( x y ) is large, then the sparse matrix storage procedure is advantageous.
CHAPTER 3 63
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
Nonsymmetric Systems
The following analyses types result in nonsymmetric systems of equations:
The first three always result in a nonsymmetric system. The last three can be solved either fully using
the nonsymmetric solver, or (approximately) using a symmetric solver. The nonsymmetric problem uses
twice as much memory for storing the stiffness matrix. Approximations using the symmetric solver may
require more iterations.
3. Rewriting the code applying the multi-point constraint equations such that the amount of scratch
file access is tremendously reduced. This is active in solver by default. If needed, it can be
switched off by using the parameter feature, 4900.
Note:
For very large analyses, it may be advantageous to set the third entry of the OOC
parameter to 1, in which case the solver memory is also used to store some nodal vectors,
so that the amount of RAM needed for the analysis is decreased considerably. This is
activated using bulk data PARAM,MARCOOCC,2.
Large Models
Translator speed enhancements have been implemented for certain types of large models. These are not
necessary for small or medium sized models but can be requested using the following parameters:
PARAM,MSPEEDSE,1
PARAM,MSPEEDP4,1
CHAPTER 3 65
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
MSC.Nastran SOL 600. If MSC.Marc exit 2011 or convergence problems are encountered with such
models, you should try optimized contact. To invoke optimized contact from MSC.Nastran, set field 6
of each BCBODY entry with flexible contact to 2. In addition, set field 3 of each "SLAVE" continuation
line (the next line after all lines with SLAVE) to 2. In turn, this sets MSC.Marc's CONTACT entry 4th
datablock, 3rd field to 2 and each CONTACT TABLE 3rd datablock 8th entry to 2 respectively. Detailed
discussions and an example of optimized are provided in Chapter 8 of the MSC.Marc Theory and User
Information Manual (Volume A of the MSC.Marc documentation) - see text before and after Figure 8-4.
References
NLSTRAT (SOL 600) (p. 2005) in the .
For selecting the solution procedure in MSC.Patran, see Defining the Solution Type in
MSC.Patran (Ch. 7).
Iteration Methods
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) offers four iterative procedures that are employed to solve
the equilibrium problem at each load increment: Newton-Raphson, Modified Newton-Raphson,
Newton-Raphson with strain correction, and a secant procedure.
(3-22)
where u is the nodal-displacement vector, F is the external nodal-load vector, R is the internal
nodal-load vector (following from the internal stresses), and K is the tangent-stiffness matrix. The
internal nodal-load vector is obtained from the internal stresses as
R Z
dv
(3-23)
elem V
In this set of equations, both R and K are functions of u . In many cases, F is also a function of u (for
example, if F follows from pressure loads, the nodal load vector is a function of the orientation of the
structure). The equations suggest that use of the full Newton-Raphson method is appropriate.
i
Suppose that the last obtained approximate solution is termed u , where i indicates the iteration
number. Equation (3-22) can then be written as
i1
i1
K ( u n H 1 )u Z F R ( u n H 1 )
(3-24)
This equation is solved for u and the next appropriate solution is obtained by
i
u Z u
i1
i1
H u and u n H 1 Z u n H 1 H u
(3-25)
Solution of this equation completes one iteration, and the process can be repeated. The subscript n
denotes the increment number representing the state t Z n . Unless stated otherwise, the subscript
n H 1 is dropped with all quantities referring to the current state.
The full Newton-Raphson method is the default in MSC.Nastran Advanced Nonlinear (see Figure 3-5).
The full Newton-Raphson method provides good results for most nonlinear problems, but is expensive
for large, three-dimensional problems when the direct solver is used. The computational problem is less
significant when the iterative solvers are used. It is also the best method for contact problems.
CHAPTER 3 67
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
r1
Fn + 1
Fn
Force
u1
u1
Solution Converged
u2 u3
Incremental Displacements
Figure 3-5
Full Newton-Raphson
K ( u )u Z F R ( u
i1
(3-26)
Fn + 1
r1
Fn
Force
u1
Solution Converged
Figure 3-6
u1 u2
u5
Incremental Displacements
Modified Newton-Raphson
The process is computationally inexpensive because the tangent stiffness matrix is formed and
decomposed once. From then on, each iteration requires only forming the right-hand side and a backward
substitution in the solution process. However, the convergence is only linear, and the potential for a very
large number of iterations, or even nonconvergence, is quite high.
If contact or sudden material nonlinearities occur, reassembly cannot be avoided. The modified
Newton-Raphson method is effective for large-scale, only mildly nonlinear problems. When the iterative
solver is employed, simple back substitution is not possible, making this process ineffective. In such
cases, the full Newton-Raphson method should be used instead.
If the load is applied incrementally, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear recalculates the stiffness matrix at
the start of each increment or at selected increments, as specified.
nonlinear terms can dominate the linear terms. After each displacement update, the new strains E
i
i
i
1
Z E H JJJ ( u , H u , ) H u , u , H u , u i H u , u ,
2
This expression is linear except for the last term. Since the iteration procedures start with a fully
linearized calculation of the displacement increments, the nonlinear contributions yield strain increments
inconsistent with the calculated displacement increments in the first iteration. These errors give rise to
either incorrect plasticity calculations (when using small strain plasticity method), or, in the case of
elastic material behavior, yields erroneous stresses. These stresses, in their turn, have a dominant
effect on the stiffness matrix for subsequent iterations or increments, which then causes the relatively
poor performance.
The remedy to this problem is simple and effective. The linear and nonlinear part of the strain increments
are calculated separately and only the linear part of
i
l
i
i
1
( E ) Z E H JJJ ( u , H u , ) H u , u , H u , u
2
( E )
iH1
1
Z JJJ u , u ,
2
(3-27)
CHAPTER 3 69
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
is used as an initial strain in the next iteration or increment, which contributes to the residual load
vector defined by
R
, X , L
nl
E dV
(3-28)
V0
K ( u n H 1 )u Z F R ( u n H 1 ) R
(3-29)
Since the displacement and strain increments are now calculated in a consistent way, the plasticity and/or
equilibrium errors are greatly reduced. The performance of the strain correction method is not as good if
the displacement increments are (almost) completely prescribed, which is not usually the case. Finally,
note that the strain correction method can be considered as a Newton method in which a different
stiffness matrix is used.
Fn + 1
r1
Fn
Force
u1
u1
u4
Incremental Displacements
Figure 3-7
Secant Newton
The quasi-Newton requirement is that a stiffness matrix for iteration i could be found based on the
right-hand sides of iterations, i and i 1 , as follows
i
i1
K u Z [ F R ( u n H 1 ) ] [ F R ( u n H 1 ) ] Z r r
i1
(3-30)
This problem does not uniquely determine K i . The Davidon-rank one update uses an additive form on
the inverse of the tangent stiffness matrix as follows:
i 1
(K )
0 1
Z (K )
i1
0 1
i1
i1
0 1
i1
[ u
(K ) (r r
) ] [ u
(K ) (r r
)]
H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
T
1
i1
0
i
i1
i
i1
[ u
(K ) (r r
)] (r r
)
(3-31)
CHAPTER 3 71
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
increment is increased if the number of recycles required in the current increment is less than the desired
number. The same factor that is used for decreasing the time step is used for increasing it. The load step
is never increased during an increment. In addition, the same type of cut-back feature for fixed load
stepping, as described in Load Increments, 56, is available for this scheme as well.
There are some exceptions to the basic scheme outlined above. If an increment is consistently converging
with the original load step and the number of recycles exceeds the desired number, the number of recycles
is allowed to go beyond the desired number until convergence or up to the user specified maximum
number. The time step is then decreased for the next increment. An increment is determined to be
converging if the convergence ratio was decreasing in three previous recycles.
Special rules also apply in a contact analysis. For quasi-static problems, the NLAUTO option is designed
to only use the automated penetration check option (see CONTACT option, 7th field of 2nd data block;
option 3 is always used). Even if you flag the increment splitting penetration check option, MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear internally converts it to the automated penetration check. During the recycles, the
contact status can keep changing (new nodes come in contact, nodes slide to new segments, separate etc.).
Whenever the contact status changes during an increment, a new set of contact constraints are
incorporated into the equilibrium equations and more recycles are necessary in order to find equilibrium.
These extra recycles, which are solely due to contact changes, are not counted when the comparison is
made to the desired number for determining if the load step needs to be decreased within the increment.
Thus, only true Newton-Raphson iterations are taken into account. For the load step of the next
increment, the accumulated number of recycles during the previous increment is used. This ensures that
the time step is not increased when there are many changes in contact during the previous increment.
In addition to allowing MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear to use the number of recycles for automatically
controlling the step size for NLAUTO, user-specified physical criteria can be used for controlling the step
size. You can specify the maximum allowed incremental change within certain ranges for specific
quantities during an increment. The quantities available are displacements, rotations, stresses, strains,
strain energy, and temperature (in thermal or thermomechanically coupled analyses). These criteria can
be utilized in two ways. By default, they are used as limits, which means that the load step is decreased
if a criterion is violated during the current increment, but they do not influence the decision to change the
load step for the next increment (that is, only the actual number of recycles versus desired number of
recycles controls the load step for the next increment). The criteria can also be used as targets; in which
case, they are used as the main means for controlling the time step for the current and next increments.
If the calculated values of the criteria are higher than the user-specified values the time step is scaled
down. If the obtained values for a converged increment are less than the user-specified, the time step is
scaled up. The scale factor used is the ratio between the actual value and the target value and this factor
is limited by user-specified minimum and maximum factors (defaults to 0.1 and 10 respectively). If this
type of load step control is used together with the recycle based control, the time step can be reduced due
to whichever criterion that is violated. The decision to increase the step size for the next increment is
based upon the physical criteria.
In many analyses, it is convenient to obtain post file results at specified time intervals. This is naturally
obtained with a fixed load stepping scheme but not with an automatic scheme. Traditionally, the post
output frequency is given as every nth increment. With the NLAUTO procedure, you can request post
output to be obtained at equally spaced time intervals. In this case, the time step is temporarily modified
to exactly reach the time for output. The time step is then restored in the following increment.
CHAPTER 3 73
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
The NLAUTO option also has an artificial damping feature available by default for structured statics
analyses. If the time step is decreased to below the user-specified minimum time step, MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear normally stops with exit number 3015; but if the artificial damping feature is
activated, the analysis is continued with a smaller time step. The solution is stabilized by adding a
factored lumped mass matrix to the stiffness matrix and modifying the force vector consistently. This
artificial stabilization is turned off once the time step increases above the minimum time step. If the
feature is used, it might be useful to write post file results at fixed time interval; otherwise, many
increments might appear on the post file even for a small time period. The critical parameter for this
feature is the (artificial) mass density, is normally selected automatically by the program. Use of the
artificial damping feature allows solution of many post-buckling problems without the need to use
arc-length methods (see below).
The defaults of the NLAUTO option are carefully chosen to be adequate in a wide variety of applications.
There are cases, however, when the settings may need to be modified. Assume that the default settings
are used, which means that the recycle based control is active with an initial load of one per cent of the
total. If the structure is weakly nonlinear, convergence is obtained in just a few recycles and the for
successive increments get progressively larger. This can lead to problems if the initially weakly nonlinear
structure suddenly exhibits stronger nonlinearities; for instance, occurrence of plasticity or parts coming
into contact. Possible remedies to this problem include:
decrease the time step scale factor from 1.2 to a smaller number so the step size does not grow
so rapidly;
use a physical criterion like maximum increment of displacements to limit the load step;
use the maximum time step to limit large steps;
decrease the desired and maximum number of recycles to make the scheme more prone to
2
6
F
3
Force
4
5
u
Displacements
Figure 3-8
Snap-through Behavior
The issue at hand is the existence of multiple displacement vectors, u , for a given applied force vector,
F . This method provides the means to ensure that the correct displacement vector is found. If you have
a load controlled problem, the solution tends to jump from point 2 to 6 whenever the load increment after
2 is applied. If you have a displacement controlled problem, the solution tends to jump from 3 to 5
whenever the displacement increment after 3 is applied. Note that these problems appear essentially in
quasi-static analyses. In dynamic analyses, the inertia forces help determine equilibrium in a snapthrough problem.
Thus, in a quasi-static analysis sometimes it is impossible to find a converged solution for a particular
load (or displacement increment):
n H 1 F n F Z F
This is illustrated in Figure 3-8 where both the phenomenon of snap-through (going from point 2 to 3)
and snap-back (going from point 3 to 4) require a solution procedure which can handle these problems
without going back along the same equilibrium curve.
As shown in Figure 3-9, assume that the solution is known at point A for load level n F . For arriving at
point B on the equilibrium curve, you either reduce the step size or adapt the load level in the iteration
process. To achieve this end, the equilibrium equations are augmented with a constraint equation
expressed typically as the norm of incremental displacements. Hence, this allows the load level to change
from iteration to iteration until equilibrium is found.
CHAPTER 3 75
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
g
n + 1 F
B
n F
A
r
Figure 3-9
The augmented equation, c ( u, ) , describes the intersection of the equilibrium curve with an auxiliary
surface g for a particular size of the path parameter :
r ( u, ) Z F R ( u ) Z 0
(3-32)
c ( u, ) Z g ( u, ) Z 0
Variations of the parameter moves the surface whose intersection with the equilibrium curve r
generates a sequence of points along the curve. The distance between two intersection points, denoted
with 0 and , denoted by l is the so-called arc-length.
Linearization of equation Equation (3-33) around point A in Figure 3-9 yields:
K P u
r
Z r
T
n n 0
0
(3-33)
where:
r
r
K Z JJJJJJ : P Z JJJJJJ
u
c
c
Z JJJJJJ : n 0 Z JJJJJJ
u
(3-34)
(3-35)
r Z F R
(3-36)
r 0 Z g ( u, )
(3-37)
It can be noted that a standard Newton-Raphson solution procedure is obtained if the constraint condition
is not imposed. The use of the constraint equation causes a loss of the banded system of equations which
would have been obtained if only the K matrix was used. Instead of solving the N H 1 set of equations
iteratively, the block elimination process is applied.
Consider the residual at iteration i to which the fraction of load level
i
r (
i1
) Z
i1
F R (u
i1
i1
corresponds
(3-38)
r (
i1
H ) Z F H r (
i1
(3-39)
u (
i1
H ) Z u (
where u (
i1
i1
) H u *
(3-40)
i 1
) Z (K ) r
(3-41)
i 1
and u * Z ( K ) F
(3-42)
Notice that u * does not depend on the load level. The equation above essentially establishes the
i
influence of a change in the load level during one iteration on the change in displacement increment
for that iteration. After one iteration is solved, this equation is used to determine the change in the load
level such that the constraint is followed. There are several arc-length methods corresponding to
different constraints.
Among them, the most well-known arc-length method is one proposed by Crisfield, in which the iterative
solution in displacement space follows a spherical path centered around the beginning of the increment.
This requirement is translated in the formula:
c Z l
Z u u
(3-43)
where l is the arc length. The above equation with the help of Equation (3-46) and Equation (3-25) is
applied as:
i T
i 2
[ ( u * ) u * ] ( ) H [ 2 ( u
[ ( u
i1
H u (
i1
) ) ( u
i1
i1
H u (
i
H u (
i1
i1
) ) u * ] ( ) H
2
)) l ] Z 0
(3-44)
CHAPTER 3 77
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
full form of Equation (3-50) in the correction phase. Two solutions for are available. We choose the
one that maintains a positive angle of the displacement increment from one iteration to the next.
i
The two roots of this scalar equation are ( ) 1 and ( ) 2 . To avoid going back on the original
load-deflection curve, the angle between the incremental displacement vectors, u
i1
and u (before
i
and after the current iteration, respectively) should be positive. Two alternative values of u (namely,
i
cos 1
i1
[ ( u n H 1 ) 1 ] u n H 1
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
l
T
and cos 2
(3-45)
i1
[ ( u n H 1 ) 2 ] u n H 1
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
l
(3-46)
0
Once again, the prediction phase is interpreted with i Z 1 and u n H 1 Z u n , while Equation (3-51)
and Equation (3-52) retain their full form in the correction phase.
i
As mentioned earlier, the appropriate root, ( ) 1 or ( ) 2 is that which gives a positive cos . In case
both the angles are positive, the appropriate root is the one closest to the linear solution given as:
i1
i1
i
( u
H u ) ( u
H u ) l
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
i
i1
i
H u )u *
2 ( u
(3-47)
Crisfields solution procedure, generalized to an automatic load incrementation process, has been
implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear as one of the options using (NLPCI, NLSTRAT and
PARAM,MARCAUTO). Various components of this process are shown in Figure 3-10.
1 2
2 1
u ( ) Z K 2 f
Force
r1
1
1
0
( u * ) ( u * )
Incremental Displacement
( u * )
Figure 3-10
The constraints in Equation (3-49) and Equation (3-50) are imposed at every iteration. Disadvantage of
the quadratic equation suggested by Crisfield is the introduction of an equation with two roots and thus
the need for an extra equation to solve the system for the calculated roots if two real roots exists. This
1
situation arises when the contribution u (or u ) is very large in comparison to the arc-length. This
can be avoided in most cases by setting sufficiently small values of the error tolerance on the residual
force. In case the above situation still persists despite the reduction of error tolerance, MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear has two options to proceed:
1. To attempt to continue the analysis with the load increment used in the initial step of auto
increment process.
2. Use the increment resulting from the linear constraint for the load.
This is circumvented in Ramms procedure due to the linearization.
Another approach to impose the constraint is due to Ramm, who also makes use of a quadratic equation
to impose the constraint giving rise to the Riks-Ramm method. The difference is that while Crisfield
imposes the constraint as a quadratic equation, Ramm linearized the constraint.
Geometrically, the difference between the two methods is that the Crisfield method enforces the
correction on the curve of the augmented equation introducing no residual for the augmented equation.
Ramm takes the intersection between the linearizations of the curves which gives a residual of the
augmented equation for the next step. Both methods converge to the same solution, the intersection of
the two curves, unless approximations are made.
The Riks-Ramm constraint is linear, in that:
c Z l
Z u n u n H 1
CHAPTER 3 79
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
u n ( u H u * ) Z l
i 1 i
u n l ( u n ) [ ( K ) r ]
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
1
T
u n ( u * )
(3-48)
i
n H 1
i 1 i
( u n H 1 ) [ ( K ) r ]
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
i
T
i
( u n H 1 ) ( u * )
(3-49)
It is noted that in the definition of the constraint, the normalized displacement of the previous step is used
cJ Z n . Thus, problems can arise if the step size is too big. In
for the normal to the auxiliary surface JJJJJ
u
situations with sharp curvatures in the solution path, the normal to the prediction may not find
intersections with the equilibrium curve. Note that the norm of the displacement increment during the
iterations is not constant in Riks-Ramm method.
In contact problems, sudden changes of the stiffness can be present (due to two bodies which are initially
not in contact suddenly make contact). Hence, a potential problem exists in the Riks-Ramm method if
i
the inner-product of the displacement due to the load vector u * and the displacement increment u n
is small. This could result in a very large value of the load increment for which convergence in the
subsequent iterations is difficult to achieve. Therefore, a modified predictor can be used resulting in a
modified Riks-Ramm procedure as:
1
1 T
l n 1 u [ u * ] u
*
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
1
1
[ u * ]u *
(3-50)
where
T
u n u *
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
T
i
u n u *
(3-51)
This method effectively scales the load increment to be applied in the prediction and is found to be
effective for contact problems.
The initial value of the arc-length is calculated from the initial fraction of the load specified by you in
the following fashion:
Ku Z F R
2
li n i Z
(3-52)
(3-53)
In subsequent steps the arc-length can be reduced or increased at the start of a new load step depending
on the number of iterations I 0 in the previous step. This number of iterations in compared with the
desired number of iterations I d which is typically set to 3 or 5. The new arc-length is then given by:
Id 2
2
l new Z JJJJ l prev
I0
(3-54)
Two control parameters exist to limit the maximum enlargement or the minimum reduction in the
arc-length.
2
l
min < JJJJJJJ < max
2
l ini
(3-55)
In addition, the maximum value can be set to the load multiplier during a particular iteration. In general,
control on the limiting values with respect to the arc-length multiplier is preferred in comparison with the
maximum fraction of the load to be applied in the iteration since a solution is sought for a particular value
of the arc-length.
Also, attention must be paid to the following:
1. In order to tract snap-through problems, the method of allowing solution if the stiffness matrix
becomes nonpositive needs to be set.
2. The maximum number of iterations must be set larger than the desired number of iterations.
CHAPTER 3 81
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
Convergence Controls
Three methods are available for determining if convergence is obtained on any given iteration: residual
force, displacement, and strain energy. You can select one of these three criteria for convergence or you
may specify a combination of residual and displacement. The AND combination signals that both
residual and displacement must be met, while the OR combination specifies that either one can satisfy
convergence criteria. If you are using residual there may be cases in which the force residuals are null in
which case is it necessary to switch over to displacement. An Autoswitching option (on by default)
allows for this switching. In addition you can specify that the convergence measures be in absolute terms,
in relative terms, or in both.
The default measure for convergence in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is residual which is based on
the magnitude of the maximum residual load compared to the maximum reaction force. This method is
appropriate since the residuals measure the out-of-equilibrium force, which should be minimized. This
technique is also appropriate for Newton methods, where zero-load iterations reduce the residual load.
The method has the additional benefit that convergence can be satisfied without iteration. You have
complete control over how convergence is defined through the Iterations Parameters form in
MSC.Patran or through the options on the NLSTRAT card.
The basic procedures are outlined below.
1. RESIDUAL CHECKING
F r e si d u a l
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
< TOL 1
F re a c t i o n
(3-56)
M r e si d u a l
F r e si d u a l
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
< TOL 1 and JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ < TOL 2
F re a c t i o n
M re a c t i o n
(3-57)
F r e si d u a l
< TOL 1
F r e si d u a l
(3-58)
< TOL 2
(3-59)
Where F is the force vector, and M is the moment vector. TOL 1 and TOL 2 are control
tolerances. F indicates the component of F with the highest absolute value. Residual
checking has one drawback. In some special problems, such as free thermal expansion, there are
no reaction forces. If the AUTOSW flag on the NLSTRAT card is ON the program automatically
uses displacement checking in this cases.
2. DISPLACEMENT CHECKING
u
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J < TOL 1
u
(3-60)
u
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J < TOL 1 and JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J < TOL 2
u
(3-61)
< TOL 1
(3-62)
< TOL 2
(3-63)
un
Displacements at increment n
i
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ Tolerance
k
0
j Z 0
k+1
un + 1
un + 1
u
Figure 3-11
Displacement Control
(3-64)
where E is the strain energy of the increment and E is the correction to incremental strain
energy of the iteration. These energies are the total energies, integrated over the whole volume. A
disadvantage of this approach is that it results in at least one iteration, regardless of the accuracy
of the solution. The advantage of this method is that it evaluates the global accuracy as opposed
to the local accuracy associated with a single node.
Different problems require different schemes to detect the convergence efficiently and accurately. To do
this, the following combinations of residual checking and displacement checking are also available.
4. RESIDUAL OR DISPLACEMENT CHECKING
This procedure does convergence checking on both residuals (Procedure 1) and displacements
(Procedure 2). Convergence is obtained if one converges.
5. RESIDUAL AND DISPLACEMENT CHECKING
This procedure does a convergence check on both residuals and displacements (Procedure 4).
Convergence is achieved if both criteria converge simultaneously.
CHAPTER 3 83
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
For problems where maximum reactions or displacements are extremely small (even close to the
round-off errors of computers), the convergence check based on relative values could be meaningless if
the convergence criteria chosen is based on these small values. It is necessary to check the convergence
with absolute values; otherwise, the analysis is prematurely terminated due to a nonconvergent solution.
Such situations are not predicable and usually happen at certain stages of an analysis. For example,
problems with stress free motion (rigid body motion or free thermal expansion) and small displacements
(springback or constraint thermal expansion) may need to check absolute value at some stage of the
analysis, as shown in the table below. However, it is also difficult to determine when to check the
absolute value and how small the absolute criterion value should be. In order to improve the robustness
of an FE analysis, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to use the AUTOSW option specified
on the NLSTRAT card to switch the convergence check scheme automatically if the above mentioned
situation occurs during the analysis. Using the AUTOSW option allows MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
to automatically change the convergence check scheme to Procedure 4 if small reactions or
displacements are detected. This function can be deactivated by specifying an absolute value check
as before.
.
Convergence Variable
Analysis Type
Displacement/
Rotation
Residual
Force/Torque
Strain Energy
Stress-free motion
Yes
No
No
Springback
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Singularity Ratio
The singularity ratio, R , is a measure of the conditioning of the system of linear equations. R is related
to the conditioning number, C , which is defined as the ratio between the highest and lowest eigenvalues
in the system. The singularity ratio is an upper bound for the inverse of the matrix conditioning number.
1RC
(3-65)
C and R establish the growth of errors in the solution process. If the errors on the right-hand side of the
equation are less than E prior to the solution, the errors in the solution will be less than , with
CE
(3-66)
The singularity ratio is a measure that is computed during the Crout elimination process of MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear using the direct solver. In this process, a recursive algorithm redefines the
diagonal terms
(k )
Kk k
(k 1)
Kk k
k1
K mk K m k
1 ik1
(3-67)
m Z i
where i is a function of the matrix profile. K k k is a diagonal of the kth degree of freedom. The singularity
ratio is defined as
(k)
(k 1)
R Z min K k k K k k
(k )
(k 1)
If all K k k and K k k
(3-68)
are positive, the singularity ratio indicates loss of accuracy during the Crout
elimination process. This loss of accuracy occurs for all positive definite matrices. The number of digits
lost during the elimination process is approximately equal to
n l o s t Z log 10 R
(3-69)
The singularity ratio also indicates the presence of rigid body modes in the structure. In that case, the
(k )
elimination process produces zeros on the diagonal K k k 0 . Exact zeros never appear because of
numerical error; therefore, the singularity ratio is of the order
R Z O 10
nd i g i t
(3-70)
where n digit is the accuracy of floating-point numbers used in the calculation. For most versions of
(k)
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, n digit > 12 . If rigid body modes are present, K k k is very small or
negative. If either a zero or a negative diagonal is encountered, execution of MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear is terminated because the matrix is diagnosed as being singular.
CHAPTER 3 85
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
You can force the solution of a nonpositive definite or singular matrix. In this case, MSC.Nastran Implicit
(k )
Nonlinear does not stop when it encounters a negative or small term K k k on the diagonal. If you use
Lagrangian multiplier elements, the matrix becomes nonpositive definite and MSC.Nastran Implicit
(k )
Nonlinear automatically disables the test on the sign of K k k . However, it still tests for singular behavior.
MSC.Nastran SOL 600 also supports the PARAM,AUTOSPC, in which case the rigid body mechanism
is suppressed by putting a large number on the diagonal. The value of EPS on the AUTOSPC case control
is set to 1.E-8.
Note:
General Tips
A nonlinear problem does not always have a unique solution. Sometimes a nonlinear problem does not
have any solution, although the problem can seem to be defined correctly.
Nonlinear analysis requires good judgment and uses considerable computing time. Several runs
are often required. The first run should extract the maximum information with the minimum
amount of computing time. Some design considerations for a preliminary analysis are:
Minimize degrees of freedom whenever possible.
Always run a linear static analysis to check the model before attempting a nonlinear analysis.
Impose a coarse tolerance on convergence to reduce the number of iterations. A coarse run
determines the area of most rapid change where additional load increments might be required.
Plan the increment size in the final run by the following rule of thumb: there should be as many
load increments as required to fit the nonlinear results by the same number of straight lines.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear solves nonlinear static problems according to one of the following two
methods: tangent modulus or initial strain. Examples of the tangent modulus method are elastic-plastic
analysis, nonlinear springs, nonlinear foundations, large displacement analysis and gaps. This method
requires at least the following three controls:
A tolerance on convergence.
A limit to the maximum allowable number of recycles.
Specification of a minimum number of recycles.
An example of the initial strain method is creep or viscoelastic analysis. Creep analysis requires the
following tolerance controls:
Maximum relative creep strain increment control.
Maximum relative stress change control.
A limit to the maximum allowable number of recycles.
CHAPTER 3 87
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
The four iterative procedures available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are: Newton-Raphson,
Modified Newton-Raphson, Newton-Raphson with strain correction modification, and a
Secant procedure.
For Static analysis, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses the Newton-Raphson method as the default for
solving the nonlinear equilibrium equations. The motivation for this choice is primarily the convergence
rate obtained by using Newtons method compared to the convergence rates obtained by alternate
methods (modified Newton or quasi-Newton methods) for the types of nonlinear problems most often
studied by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
where buckling, limit load, or some modeling error causes the problem to stall. Other controls are built
into the algorithm, for example, it will cut back the increment size if an element inverts due to excessively
large geometry changes.
Nonlinear Dynamics
In dynamic analysis when implicit integration is used, the automatic time stepping is based on the
concept of half-step residuals. The basic idea is that the time-stepping operator defines the velocities and
accelerations at the end of the step in terms of displacement at the end of the step and conditions at the
beginning of the step. Equilibrium is then established at the end of the step. This, then ensures an
equilibrium solution at the end of each time step, and thus, at the beginning and end of any individual
time step. However, these equilibrium solutions do not guarantee equilibrium throughout the step. The
time-step control is based on measuring the equilibrium error (the force residuals) at some point during
the time step, by using the integrator operator together with the solution obtained at the end of the step,
to interpolate within a time step. This evaluation is performed at the half step. If the maximum entry in
this residual vector (the maximum half step residual) is greater than a user-specified tolerance, the time
step is considered too big and is replaced by an appropriate factor. If the maximum half-step residual is
sufficiently below the user-specified tolerance, the time step may be increased by an appropriate factor
for the next increment. Otherwise, the time step is deemed adequate.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is designed to analyze structural components, by which is meant that
the overall dynamic response of a structure is sought, in contrast to wave propagation solutions associated
with relatively local response in continua. These are labelled inertial problems, classified as problems
in which wave effects such as focusing, reflection, and diffraction are not important. Structural
problems are considered inertial because the response time sought is long compared to the time
required for waves to traverse the structure. The equilibrium considerations are similar to those for
nonlinear statics.
Buckling
In problems which are linear until buckling occurs, due to a sudden development of nonlinearity, it is
sometimes necessary for you to guide the arc-length algorithm by making sure that the arc length remains
sufficiently small prior to the occurrence of buckling.
Efficiency
Even if a solution is obtainable, there is always the issue of efficiency. The pros and cons of each solution
procedure, in terms of matrix operations and storage requirements have been discussed in the previous
sections. A very important variable regarding overall efficiency is the size of the problem. The time
required to assemble a stiffness matrix, as well as the time required to recover stresses after a solution,
vary roughly linearly with the number of degrees of freedom of the problem. On the other hand, the time
required to go through the solver when using the direct method varies roughly quadratically with the
bandwidth, as well as linearly with the number of degrees of freedom.
CHAPTER 3 89
Solution Methods and Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis
In small problems, where the time spent in the solver is negligible, you can easily wipe out any solver
gains, or even of assembly gains, with solution procedures such as a line search which requires a
double stress recovery. Also, for problems with strong material or contact nonlinearities, gains
obtained in assembly in modified Newton-Raphson can be nullified by increased number of iterations
or nonconvergence.
References
1. Zienkiewicz, O. C. and R. L. Taylor. The Finite Element Method (4th ed.) Vol. 1. Basic
Formulation and Linear Problems (1989),) Vol. 2. Solid and Fluid Mechanics, Dynamics, and
Nonlinearity (1991) McGraw-Hill Book Co., London, U. K.
2. Bathe, K. J. Finite Element Procedures, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1995.
3. Hughes, T. J. R. The Finite Element MethodLinear Static and Dynamic Finite Element Analysis,
Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ. 1987.
4. Ogden, R. W. Large Deformation Isotropic Elasticity: On The Correlation of Theory and
Experiment for Incompressible Rubberlike Solids, Proceedings of the Royal Society, Vol. A
(326), pp. 565-584, 1972.
5. Cook, R. D., D. S. Malkus, and M. E. Plesha, Concepts and Applications of Finite Element
Analysis (3rd ed.), John Wiley & Sons, New York, NY, 1989.
6. Bathe, K. J. Finite Element Procedures, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1996.
7. Riks, E. An incremental approach to the solution of solution and buckling problems, Int. J. of
Solids and Structures, V. 15, 1979.
8. Riks, E. Some Computational Aspects of the Stability Analysis of Nonlinear Structures, Comp.
Methods in Appl. Mech. and Eng., 47, 1984.
9. Crisfield, M. A. A fast incremental iterative procedure that handles snapthrough, Comput. &
Structures, V. 13, 1981.
10. Ramm, E. Strategies for tracing the nonlinear response near limit points, in K. J. Bathe et al
(eds), Europe-US Workshop on Nonlinear Finite Element Analysis in Structural Mechanics,
Ruhr University Bochum, Germany, Springer-Verlag, Berlin, pp/ 63-89. Berlin, 1985.
Static Analysis
Body Approach
Buckling Analysis
Normal Modes
Creep
140
92
116
118
120
121
124
132
93
Linear Analysis
SOL 600 allows you to perform linear elastic analysis using any element type in the program. Various
kinematic constraints and loadings can be prescribed to the structure being analyzed; the problem can
include both isotropic and anisotropic elastic materials.
The principle of superposition holds under conditions of linearity. Therefore, several individual solutions
can be superimposed (summed) to obtain a total solution to a problem.
Linear analysis does not require storing as many quantities as does nonlinear analysis; therefore, it uses
the core memory more sparingly. The assembled and decomposed stiffness matrices can be reused to
arrive at repeated solutions for different loads.
Nonlinear Analysis
Nonlinear analysis, while most complex and expensive, must be used to establish accurate results when
a structure is subject to large deformations, when the material behavior falls outside of a linear elastic
model, or where the structural interactions include contact.
In nonlinear analysis the stiffness matrix is assembled and decomposed repeatedly throughout the
incrementation process. This adds considerable time and cost to the analysis. In addition, because the
response is not proportional to the loads, each load case must be solved separately and the principle of
superposition is not applicable.
CHAPTER 4 93
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Elasto-Plastic Behavior
Elasto-Viscoplastic Behavior
Creep Behavior
Figure 4-1
Material Nonlinearity
Linear
Stable
Pc
Neutral
Unstable
Figure 4-2
Buckling
P
u
u
Figure 4-3
Snap-Through
Boundary conditions and/or loads can also cause nonlinearity. Contact and friction problems lead to
nonlinear boundary conditions. This type of nonlinearity manifests itself in several real life situations;
for example, metal forming, gears, interference of mechanical components, pneumatic tire contact, and
crash (see Figure 4-4). Loads on a structure cause nonlinearity if they vary with the displacements of the
structure. These loads can be conservative, as in the case of a centrifugal force field (see Figure 4-5); they
can also be nonconservative, as in the case of a follower force on a cantilever beam (see Figure 4-6). Also,
such a follower force can be locally nonconservative, but represent a conservative loading system when
integrated over the structure. A pressurized cylinder (see Figure 4-7) is an example of this.
Figure 4-4
CHAPTER 4 95
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
The three types of nonlinearities are described in detail in the following sections.
Geometric Nonlinearities
Geometric nonlinearity leads to two types of phenomena: change in structural behavior and loss of
structural stability.
There are two natural classes of large deformation problems: the large displacement, small strain problem
and the large displacement, large strain problem. For the large displacement, small strain problem,
changes in the stress-strain law can be neglected, but the contributions from the nonlinear terms in the
strain displacement relations cannot be neglected. For the large displacement, large strain problem, the
constitutive relation must be defined in the correct frame of reference and is transformed from this frame
of reference to the one in which the equilibrium equations are written.
The collapse load of a structure can be predicted by performing an eigenvalue analysis. If performed after
the linear solution (increment zero), the Euler buckling estimate is obtained. An eigenvalue problem can
be formulated after each increment of load; this procedure can be considered a nonlinear buckling
analysis even though a linearized eigenvalue analysis is used at each stage.
The kinematics of deformation can be described by the following approaches:
Lagrangian Formulation
Eularian Formulation
The choice of one over another can be dictated by the convenience of modeling physics of the problem,
rezoning requirements, and integration of constitutive equations, and can be specified using
PARAM,MARUPDAT.
Lagrangian Formulation
In the Lagrangian method, the finite element mesh is attached to the material and moves through space
along with the material. In this case, there is no difficulty in establishing stress or strain histories at a
particular material point and the treatment of free surfaces is natural and straightforward.
The Lagrangian approach also naturally describes the deformation of structural elements; that is, shells
and beams, and transient problems, such as the indentation problem shown in Figure 4-8.
sz
Figure 4-8
CHAPTER 4 97
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
This method can also analyze steady-state processes such as extrusion and rolling. Shortcomings of the
Lagrangian method are that flow problems are difficult to model and that the mesh distortion is as severe
as the deformation of the object. Severe mesh degeneration is shown in Figure 4-9b. However, recent
advances in adaptive meshing and rezoning available in MSC.Marc have alleviated the problems of
premature termination of the analysis due to mesh distortions as shown in Figure 4-9c.
(a) Original
(Undeformed Mesh)
Figure 4-9
Rezoning Example
The Lagrangian approach can be classified in two categories: the total Lagrangian method and the
updated Lagrangian method. In the total Lagrangian approach, the equilibrium is expressed with the
original undeformed state as the reference; in the updated Lagrangian approach, the current
configuration acts as the reference state. The kinematics of deformation and the description of motion is
given in Table 4-1 and Figure 4-10.
Table 4-1
Configuration Measures
Reference (t = 0 or n)
Current (t = n + 1)
Coordinates
Deformation Tensor
C (Right Cauchy-Green)
b (Left Cauchy-Green)
Strain Measure
E (Green-Lagrange)
F (Deformation Gradient)
e (Logarithmic)
Stress Measure
S (second Piola-Kirchhoff)
P (first Piola-Kirchhoff)
(Cauchy)
Previous
t=n
Current
t=n+1
Fn
un + 1
un
Reference
t=0
Fn+1 = Fn
Figure 4-10
Description of Motion
S i j E i j dV Z
b i i dV H
t i i dA
(4-1)
0
0
Here S i j is the symmetric second Piola-Kirchhoff stress tensor, E i j , is the Green-Lagrange strain, b i is
0
the body force in the reference configuration, t i is the traction vector in the reference configuration, and
i is the virtual displacements. Integrations are carried out in the original configuration at t Z 0 . The
strains are decomposed in total strains for equilibrated configurations and the incremental strains
between t Z n and t Z n H 1 as:
nH1
Ei j
Z E i j H E i j
(4-2)
CHAPTER 4 99
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
while the incremental strains are further decomposed into linear, E i j and nonlinear, E i j parts as:
n
E i j Z Ei j H E i j
where E is the linear part of the incremental strain expressed as:
n
1 u i u j
1 u k u k
JJ
J
JJ
J
JJJJJJJJ
E Z
JJJJJJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJJJJJ H J JJJJJJJJJJJJJ
2 X j
2 X i X j
X i
(4-3)
The second term in the bracket in Equation (4-3) is the initial displacement effect. E
part of the incremental strain expressed as:
E
u k u k
u kn u k
1
JJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
JJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
JJ
J
Z
H JJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJ
2 X i X j
X j X i
is the nonlinear
(4-4)
(4-5)
i m n D mn p q p q j dV
{ i mn D mn p q p q j H i mn D mn p q p qj H i mn D m n p q p q j } dV
0
0
in the above equations, i m n and i m n are the constant and displacement dependent symmetric shape
function gradient matrices, respectively, and D m n p q is the material tangent,
and K 2 is the initial stress stiffness matrix
( K 2 )i j Z
N i, k N j, l S k l dV
V0
in which S k l is the second Piola-Kirchhoff stresses and N i, k is the shape function gradient matrix.
Also, u is the correction displacement vector. F and R are the external and internal
forces, respectively.
This Lagrangian formulation can be applied to problems if the undeformed configuration is known so
that integrals can be evaluated, and if the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress is a known function of the strain.
The first condition is not usually met for fluids, because the deformation history is usually unknown. For
solids, however, each analysis usually starts in the stress-free undeformed state, and the integrations can
be carried out without any difficulty.
For viscoelastic fluids and elastic-plastic and viscoplastic solids, the constitutive equations usually
supply an expression for the rate of stress in terms of deformation rate, stress, deformation, and
sometimes other (internal) material parameters. The relevant quantity for the constitutive equations is the
rate of stress at a given material point.
It, therefore, seems most obvious to differentiate the Lagrangian virtual work equation with respect to
time. The rate of virtual work is readily found as
v k k
S i j E i j H S i j JJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJ dV Z
X i X j
b i i dV H
t i i dA
(4-6)
This formulation is adequate for most materials, because the rate of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress can
be written as
S i j Z S i j ( E k l, S m n, E p q )
(4-7)
For many materials, the stress rate is even a linear function of the strain rate
S i j Z D i jk l ( S mn, E p q )E k l
(4-8)
Equation (4-6) supplies a set of linear relations in terms of the velocity field. The velocity field can be
solved noniteratively and the displacement can be obtained by time integration of the velocities.
The second Piola-Kirchhoff stress for elastic and hyperelastic materials is a function of the GreenLagrange strain defined below:
Si j Z Si j ( Ek l )
(4-9)
(4-10)
the resulting set of equations is still nonlinear because the strain is a nonlinear function of displacement.
CHAPTER 4 101
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
assumed to be infinitesimal.
In general, this approach can be used to analyze structures where inelastic behavior (for example,
plasticity, viscoplasticity, or creep) causes the large deformations. The (initial) Lagrangian coordinate
frame has little physical significance in these analyses since the inelastic deformations are, by definition,
permanent. For these analyses, the Lagrangian frame of reference is redefined at the last completed
iteration of the current increment.
It is instructive to derive the stiffness matrices for the updated Lagrangian formulation starting from the
virtual work principle in Equation (4-9).
Direct linearization of the left-hand side of Equation (4-9) yields:
S i j ( d( E i j ) ) dV Z
V0
i k k j u i j dv
(4-11)
Vn H 1
where u and are actual incremental and virtual displacements respectively, and kj is Cauchy stress
tensor.
dS i j E i j dV Z
V0
s
i j L i jk l ( u k l ) dv
(4-12)
Vn H 1
denotes the symmetric part of , which represents the gradient operator in the current configuration.
Also, in Equation (4-11) and Equation (4-12), three identities are used:
1
i j Z JJJ F i m S mn F jn
J
s
E i j Z F mi mn F n j
and
1
L i jk l Z JJJ F i m F jn F k p F l q D m n p q
J
(4-13)
in which D m n p q represents the material moduli tensor in the reference configuration which is convected
to the current configuration, L i jk . This yields:
{ K 1 H K 2 }u Z F R
(4-14)
i m n L m n p q p q j
Vn H 1
in which i m n is the symmetric gradient operator-evaluated in the current configuration and k l is the
Cauchy stresses
and K 2 is the geometric stiffness matrix written as
( K2 )i j Z
k l N i, k N j, l dv
Vn H 1
E i j Z d i j,
JJJJJJJJJ Z JJJJJJJJ,
X i
x i
Si j Z i j
(4-15)
Vn H 1
v k k
i j d i j H i j JJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJ dv Z
x i x j
Vn H 1
b i i dv H
An H 1
ti i da
(4-16)
CHAPTER 4 103
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
in which b i and t i is the body force and surface traction, respectively, in the current configuration
In this equation, i j is the Truesdell rate of Cauchy stress which is essentially a Lie derivative of Cauchy
stress obtained as:
i j Z
1
1
F i n ( JF n k k l F ml ) F m j
(4-17)
The Truesdell rate of Cauchy stress is materially objective implying that if a rigid rotation is imposed on
the material, the Truesdell rate vanishes, whereas the usual material rate does not vanish. This fact has
important consequences in the large deformation problems where large rotations are involved. The
constitutive equations can be formulated in terms of the Truesdell rate of Cauchy stress as:
i j Z L i jk d k
(Chapter 7).
Note:
Depending on the type of analysis specified by all entries in the input deck,
PARAMETER,MARUPDAT will be specified automatically as -1 or 1 unless entered by
the user.
Note:
Do not use MSC.Marcs CENTROID parameter with this parameter. Always use residual
load corrections with this parameter. To input control tolerances for large displacement
analysis, use model definition option NLSTRAT.
Using only the LGSTRN, 2 parameter, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses the total Lagrangian
method. When the total Lagrangian method is specified, the program uses and prints second PiolaKirchhoff stress and Green-Lagrange strain. These measures are suitable for analysis with large
incremental rotations and large incremental strains.
More on Using Updated Lagrangian
You can use the updated procedure with or without MSC.Nastrans LGDISP parameter. When you use
the LGDISP parameter, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear takes into account the effect of the internal
stresses by forming the initial stress stiffness. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear also calculates the strain
increment to second order accuracy to allow large rotation increments.
Another option is to use the MARUPDAT parameter (with or without the LGDISP parameter) to define
a new (Lagrangian) frame of reference at the beginning of each increment. This option is suitable for
analysis of problems of large total rotation but small strain. If analysis of large plastic strain is required,
use PARAM,MRFINITE,1 in addition to the PARAM, MARUPDAT parameter in which case
MSC.Nastran Implicit
With MARUPDAT,1 MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses Cauchy stresses and true strains. This
combination of parameters is suitable for analyses with small incremental rotations and small
incremental strains. Stress and strain components are printed with respect to the current state.
The MSC.Marc plasticity parameter with options 3 or 5 utilize the updated Lagrange procedure for
elastic-plastic analysis. The MSC.Marc,elasticity parameter with option 2 utilizes the updated Lagrange
procedure for large strain elasticity (Mooney or Ogden).
The combination of PARAM,MARUPDAT,1 and PARAM,MARCDILT (i.e., with constant dilatation) or
a MATEP material entry results in a complete large strain plasticity formulation (with B-Bar method) to
satisfy incompatibility using the updated Lagrange procedure. The use of MATEP replaces the need of
the MARCDILT parameter. The program internally uses true (Cauchy) stress and rotation neutralized
strains. In the case of proportional straining, this method leads to logarithmic strains.
Note:
For materials exhibiting large strain plasticity with volumetric changes (for example, soils,
powder, snow, wood) only MSC.Marcs LARGE DISP, FINITE and UPDATE should be
used (these are created automatically for you by the internal MSC.Marc translator in
MSC.Nastran). Use of MARCDILT parameter or MATEP will enforce the
incompressibility condition and, in such materials, yield incorrect and nonphysical
behavior.
CHAPTER 4 105
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Large strain rubber elasticity can be modeled in either total Lagrange MSC.Nastrans
PARAM,MARCUPDAT,1: second Piola-Kirchhoff stress, Green Lagrange strain or updated Lagrange
PARAM,MARCELAS,2: Cauchy stress, Logarithmic strain framework.
Options
Kinematics
Formulation
param,marcplas,1
Total Lagrange
param,marcplas,3
Updated Lagrange
param,marcplas,5
Updated Lagrange
param,marcelas,1
Total Lagrange
Large strain.
param,marcelas,2
Updated Lagrange
Large strain.
default
Theoretically and numerically, if formulated mathematically correct, the two formulations yield exactly
the same results. However, integration of constitutive equations for certain types of material behavior
(for example, plasticity) make the implementation of the total Lagrange formulation inconvenient. If the
constitutive equations are convected back to the original configuration and proper transformations are
applied, then both formulations are equivalent.
Material Nonlinearities
In a large strain analysis, it is usually difficult to separate the kinematics from the material description.
The following table lists the characteristics of some common materials.
Material
Composites
Characteristics
Anisotropic:
1) layered, ds i j Z C i j k d k
21 constants
Examples
Models
Bearings, aircraft
panels
Composite
continuum elements
Tires, glass/epoxy
Rebars
ORNL
Norton
Maxwell
2)Fiber reinforced,
E t
S Z JJJ ( T CT 1 )
2
one-dimensional strain in fibers
Creep
Metals at high
temperatures,
polymide films
Elastic
Small deformation
(below yield) for
most materials:
Hookes Law
metals, glass, wood
Elastoplasticity
Metals
Soils
Hyperelastic
Rubber
Mooney
Ogden
Arruda Boyce
Gent
Foam
Hypoelastic
Concrete
NLELAST
Viscoelastic
Rubber
Glass
Simo Model
Narayanaswamy
Viscoplastic
Metals
Powder
Power law
Shima Model
A complete description of the material types mentioned in the table is given in Materials (Chapter 10).
However, some notable characteristics and procedural considerations of some commonly encountered
materials behavior are listed next.
CHAPTER 4 107
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Inaccuracies in experimental data, misinterpretation of material model parameters and errors in userdefined material law are some common sources of error in the analysis from the materials viewpoint. It
is useful to check the material behavior by running a small model with prescribed displacement and load
boundary conditions in uniaxial tension and shear (single element tests are not recommended).
Elasticity
Structures composed of elastomers, such as tires and bushings, are typically subjected to large
deformation and large strain. An elastomer is a polymer, such as rubber, which shows a nonlinear elastic
stress-strain behavior. The large strain elasticity capability in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear deals
primarily with elastomeric materials. These materials are characterized by the form of their elastic strain
energy function.
For the finite element analysis of elastomers, there are some special considerations that do not apply for
linear elastic analysis. These considerations include:
Mesh Distortion
Incompressible Behavior
Instabilities
Existence of Multiple Solutions
Mesh Distortions
When extremely large deformations occur, the element mesh should be designed so that it can follow
these deformations without complete degeneration of elements. This problem is more prevalent when the
updated Lagrange procedure is used. For problems involving extreme distortions, the MSC.Marc global
adaptive remeshing capability should be used.
Incompressible Behavior
One of the most frequent causes of problems analyzing elastomers is the incompressible material
behavior. Lagrangian multipliers (pressure variables) are used to apply the incompressibility constraint.
The result is that the volume is kept constant in a generalized sense, over an element.
Both the total, as well as updated Lagrange formulations, are implemented with appropriate constraint
ratios for lower- and higher-order elements in 2D and 3D. For many practical analysis, the LBB
(Ladyszhenskaya-Babuska-Brezzi) condition does not have to be satisfied in the strictest sense; for
example, four node quadrilateral based on Herrmann principle.
For elements that satisfy the LBB condition, error estimates of the following form can be established
h
u u
H p p
where k and
Z O( h
mi n { k, H 1 }
(4-18)
K Z m in { k, H 1 } , the rate of convergence is said to be optimal, and elements satisfying the LBB
condition will not lock.
The large strain elasticity formulation may also be used with conventional plane stress, membrane, and
shell elements. Because of the plane stress conditions, the incompressibility constraint can be satisfied
without the use of Lagrange multipliers.
Instabilities
Under some circumstances, materials can become unstable. This instability can be real or can be due to
the mathematical formulation used in the calculations.
Instability can also result from the approximate satisfaction of incompressibility constraints. If the
number of Lagrangian multipliers is insufficient, local volume changes can occur. Under some
circumstances, these volume changes can be associated with a decrease in total energy. This type of
instability usually occurs only if there is a large tensile hydrostatic stress. Similarly, overconstraints give
rise to mesh locking and inordinate increase in total energy under large compressive stresses.
Existence of Multiple Solutions
It is possible that more than one stable solution exists (due to nonlinearity) for a given set of boundary
conditions. An example of such multiple solutions is a hollow hemisphere with zero prescribed loads.
Two equilibrium solutions exist: the undeformed stress-free state and the inverted self-equilibrating state.
An example of these solutions is shown in Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-12. If the equilibrium solution remains
stable, no problems should occur; however, if the equilibrium becomes unstable at some point in the
analysis, problems can occur.
Figure 4-11
Rubber Hemisphere
CHAPTER 4 109
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Figure 4-12
When incompressible material is being modeled, the basic linearized incremental procedure is used in
conjunction with mixed variational principles similar in form to the Herrmann incompressible elastic
formulation. These formulations are incorporated in plane strain, axisymmetric, and three-dimensional
elements. These mixed elements may be used in combination with other elements in the library (suitable
constraint equations may be necessary) and with each other. Where different materials are joined, the
pressure variable at the corner nodes must be uncoupled to allow for mean pressure discontinuity. MPCs
must be used to couple the displacements only.
Plasticity
In recent years there has been a tremendous growth in the analysis of metal forming problems by the
finite element method. Although an Eularian flow-type approach has been used for steady-state and
transient problems, the updated Lagrangian procedure, pioneered by McMeeking and Rice, is most
suitable for analysis of large strain plasticity problems. The main reasons for this are: (a) its ability to
trace free boundaries, and (b) the flexibility of taking elasticity and history effects into account. Also,
residual stresses can be accurately calculated.
The large strain plasticity capability in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to analyze problems
of large-strain, elastic-plastic material behavior. These problems can include manufacturing processes
such as forging, upsetting, extension or deep drawing, and/or large deformation of structures that occur
during plastic collapse. The analysis involves both material, geometric and boundary nonlinearities.
In addition to the options required for plasticity analysis, the PARAM,LGSTRN and/or PARAM,
MRTABLS1 parameters are needed for large strain plasticity analysis.
In performing finite deformation elastic-plastic analysis, there are some special considerations which do
not apply for linear elastic analysis. These considerations include:
Choice of Finite Element Types
Nearly Incompressible Behavior
Treatment of Boundary Conditions
Severe Mesh Distortion
Instabilities
CHAPTER 4 111
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Instabilities
Elastic-plastic structures are sometimes unstable due to necking phenomena. Consider a rod of a rigid
plastic incompressible workhardening material. With the current true uniaxial strain rate and H the
Z H
(4-19)
The applied force is equal to F Z A , where A is the current area of the rod. The rate of the force is
therefore equal to
F Z A H A
(4-20)
A H A Z 0
(4-21)
F Z ( H )A
(4-22)
Instability clearly occurs if > H . For applied loads (as opposed to applied boundary conditions), the
stiffness matrix becomes singular (nonpositive definite).
For the large strain plasticity option, the workhardening slope for plasticity is the rate of true (Cauchy)
stress versus the true (logarithmic) plastic strain rate. The workhardening curve must, therefore, be
entered as the true stress versus the logarithmic plastic strain in a uniaxial tension test.
Computational Procedures for Elastic-Plastic Analysis
For more information on computational procedures, please see the MSC.Marc Reference manual.
Creep
Creep is a time-dependent inelastic behavior that can occur at any stress level, either below or above the
yield stress of a material. Creep is an important factor at elevated temperatures. In many cases, creep is
also accompanied by plasticity, which occurs above the yield stress of the material.
Conventional creep behavior is based on a von Mises creep potential with isotropic behavior described
by the equivalent creep law:
cr
cr
Z f ( I IT It )
cr
c r
Z JJJJJJJJ t
cr
where JJJJJJJJ is the outward normal to the current von Mises stress surface and is the equivalent creep
strain rate.
There are two numerical procedures used in implementing creep behavior. The default is an explicit
procedure in which the above relationship is implemented in the program by an initial strain technique.
In other words, a pseudo-load vector due to the creep strain increment is added to the right-hand side of
the stiffness equation.
Ku Z P H
cr
D dv
where K is the stiffness matrix, and u and P are incremental displacement and incremental nodal
force vectors, respectively. The integral:
cr
D dv
is the pseudo-load vector due to the creep strain increment in which is the strain displacement relation
and D is the stress-strain relation. When plasticity is also specified through a suitably defined yield
criterion and yield stress inMSC.Nastran, the plasticity is treated implicitly while the creep is treated
explicitly.
As an alternative, an implicit creep procedure can be requested. In this case, the inelastic strain rate has
an influence on the stiffness matrix. Using this technique, significantly larger steps in strain space can be
used. This option is only to be used for isotropic materials with the creep strain rate defined by a creep
constant.
CHAPTER 4 113
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Creep Buckling
MSC.Nastran also predicts the creep time to buckling due to stress redistribution under given load or
repeated cyclic load. The buckling option solves the following equation for the first eigenvalue
( K H K G ) Z 0
(4-23)
The geometric stiffness matrix, K G , is a function of the increments of stress and displacement. These
increments are calculated during the last creep time step increment. To determine the creep time to
buckle, perform a buckle step after a converged creep increment. Note that the incremental time must be
scaled by the calculated eigenvalue, and added to the total (current) time to get an estimate as to when
buckling occurs.
Viscoelasticity
In certain problems, structural materials exhibit viscoelastic behavior. Two examples of these problems
are quenching of glass and time-dependent deformation of polymeric materials. The viscoelastic
material retains linearity between load and deformation; however, this linear relationship depends on
time. Consequently, the current state of deformation must be determined from the entire history of
loading. Different models consisting of elastic elements (spring) and viscous elements (dashpot) can be
used to simulate the viscoelastic material behavior described in Materials (Chapter 10). Both the equation
of state and the hereditary integral approaches can be used for viscoelastic analysis.
A special class of temperature dependence known as the Thermo-Rheologically Simple behavior (TRS)
is also applicable to a variety of thermal viscoelastic problems. To model the thermo-rheologically
simple material behavior, MATTVE can be used to choose the Williams-Landel-Ferry equation or the
power series expression or Narayanaswamy model.
In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, two options are available for small strain viscoelastic analysis. The
first option uses the equation of state approach and represents a Kelvin model. The second option is
based on the hereditary integral approach and allows the selection of a generalized Maxwell model. The
thermo-rheologically simple behavior is also available in the second option for thermal viscoelastic
analysis. The Viscoelastic (Chapter 10) discusses these models in detail.
The Simo model for large strain viscoelasticity can be used in conjunction with the damage and
hyperelastic Mooney, Ogden, Gent, or Arruda Boyce material model. The large strain viscoelastic
material behavior can be simulated by incorporating MATVE.
Nonlinear structural relaxation behavior of materials can be modeled by the Narayanaswamy model
which accounts for memory effect. This model allows simulation of evolution of physical properties of
glass subjected to complex time temperature histories. The thermal expansion behavior for the
Narayanaswamy model is controlled via the MATTVE bulk data option.
Viscoplasticity
There are two procedures in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for viscoplastic analysis: explicit and
implicit. A brief description of each procedure follows:
Explicit Method
The elasto-viscoplasticity model in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is a modified creep model to which
a plastic element is added. The plastic element is inactive when the stress is less than the yield stress of
the material. You can use the elasto-viscoplasticity model to solve time-dependent plasticity and creep as
well as plasticity problems with a nonassociated flow law.
The CREEP option in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has been modified to enable solving problems
with viscoplasticity. The method is modified to allow solving elastic-plastic problems with nonassociated
flow rules which result in nonsymmetric stress-strain relations if the tangent modulus method is used.
The requirements for solving the viscoplastic problem are:
PARAM,MCREEP,1 and creep controls
Load incrementation immediately followed by a series of creep increments specified by
PARAM,MAUTCREP,1.
Use of user subroutine CRPLAW and/or user subroutine NASSOC.
The following load incrementation procedure enables you to solve a viscoplastic problem:
1. Apply an elastic load increment that exceeds the steady-state yield stress.
2. Relieve the high yield stresses by turning on PARAM,MAUTCREP,1.
You may repeat steps 1 and 2 as many times as necessary to achieve the required load history.
The viscoplastic approach converts an iterative elastic-plastic method to one where a fraction of the
initial force vector is applied at each increment with the time step controls. The success of the method
depends on the proper use of the automatic creep time step controls. This means that it is necessary to
select an initial time step that will satisfy the tolerances placed on the allowable stress change.
The initial time step t =
The allowable stress change is specified in the creep controls. The most highly stressed element usually
yields the maximum strain rate. It is also important to select a total time that gives sufficient number of
increments to work off the effects of the initial force vector. A total time of 30 times the estimated t is
usually sufficient.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear does not distinguish between viscoplastic and creep strains. A flag is
set in the CREEP parameter in order to use the viscoplastic option with a nonassociated flow rule.
The viscoplasticity feature can be used to implement very general constitutive relations with the aid of
user subroutines ZERO and YIEL.
Since the viscoplasticity model in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is a modified creep model, you
should familiarize yourself with the creep analysis procedure (see Creep, Viscoplastic, and Viscoelastic
Behavior, page 119 of this chapter).
CHAPTER 4 115
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Implicit Method
A general viscoplastic material law can be implemented through user subroutine UVSCPL. When using
this method, you are responsible for defining the inelastic strain increment and the current stress.
CHAPTER 4 117
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Creep
This analysis procedure performs a transient, static, stress/displacement analysis. It is especially
provided for the analysis of materials which are described by the MATVP material form.
Viscoelastic (Time Domain)
This is especially provided for the time domain analysis of materials which are described by the MATVE
material options. The dissipative part of the material behavior is defined through a Prony series
representation of the normalized shear and bulk relaxation moduli.
Contact
This type of problem can be solved by either nonlinear static or nonlinear transient dynamic solution
procedures and simultaneous tracks the movement of multiple geometric bodies to detect contact and
then uses appropriate boundary conditions to simulate the friction between surfaces. A robust numerical
procedure is required to simulate these complex physical problems.
Static Analysis
Static stress analysis is used when inertia effects can be neglected. The problem may still have a real time
scale, for example when the material has a viscoplastic response, such as rate dependent yield. The
analysis may be linear or nonlinear. Nonlinearity may arise from large displacement effects, material
nonlinearity and boundary nonlinearity (such as contact and friction).
Linear static analysis involves the specification of load cases and appropriate boundary conditions.
Solutions may be combined in a postprocessing mode.
Nonlinear static analysis requires the solution of nonlinear equilibrium equations, for which the program
uses Full Newton-Raphson, Modified Newton-Raphson, Newton-Raphson with Strain Correction, or the
Secant method. Many problems involve history dependent response, so that the solution is usually
obtained as a series of increments, with iteration within each increment to obtain equilibrium. Increments
must sometimes be kept small (in the sense that rotation and strain increments must be small) to assure
correct modeling of history dependent effects, but most commonly the choice of increment size is a
matter of computational efficiency - if the increments are too large, more iteration will be required. Each
solution method has a finite radius of convergence, which means that too large an increment can prevent
any solution from being obtained because the initial state is too far away from the equilibrium state that
is being sought - it is outside the radius of convergence. Thus, there is an algorithmic restriction on the
increment size. For most cases, the automatic incrementation scheme is preferred, because it will select
increment sizes based on these considerations. Direct user control of increment size is also provided
because there are cases when the user has considerable experience with his particular problem and can
therefore select a more economic approach.
References
For directions on setting up a Static analysis using MSC.Patran, see Specifying the Analysis Type for a
Subcase and Specifying Static Subcase Parameters (Chapter 7)
CHAPTER 4 119
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Post-Buckling
Geometrically nonlinear static problems frequently involve buckling or collapse behavior, where the
load-displacement response shows a negative stiffness, and the structure must release strain energy to
remain in equilibrium. Several approaches are possible in such cases. One is to treat the buckling
response dynamically, thus actually modeling the kinetic response with inertia effects included as the
structure snaps. This is easily accomplished by using a transient dynamic procedure to include inertial
effects when the solution goes unstable. In some simple cases, displacement control can provide a
solution, even when the conjugate load (the reaction force) is decreasing as the displacement increases.
More generally, static equilibrium states during the unstable phase of the response can be found by using
an arc-length method. This method is for cases where the loading is proportional - that is, where the load
magnitudes are governed by a single scalar parameter. The method obtains equilibrium solutions by
controlling the path length along the load-displacement curve within each increment (rather than
controlling the load or displacement increment), so that the load magnitude becomes an unknown of the
system.
The method can provide solutions even in cases of complex or unstable response.
Body Approach
Body Approach enables you to position rigid bodies to just touch deformable bodies before beginning a
subsequent Load Step. No analysis is actually performed during a Body Approach step.It is used
commonly in multi-forming simulations where bodies are brought just into contact before the analysis
begins.
Body positioning can be synchronized or not, meaning that if Synchronized is ON, then as soon as one
rigid body contacts, all others stop at that point also. Otherwise all rigid bodies move until they come into
contact. The SOL 600 option, APPROACH and SYNCHRONIZE implement these concepts.
References
For directions on setting up a Body Approach analysis using MSC.Patran, see Specifying the Analysis
Type for a Subcase and Specifying Body Approach Subcase Parameters (Chapter 7).
CHAPTER 4 121
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Buckling Analysis
Buckling analysis allows you to determine at what load the structure will collapse. You can detect the
buckling of a structure when the structures stiffness matrix approaches a singular value. You can extract
the eigenvalue in a linear analyses to obtain the linear buckling load.You can also perform eigenvalue
analysis for buckling load in a nonlinear problem based on the incremental stiffness matrices.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) solves elastic instability problems using the bifurcation
approach. Bifurcation buckling analysis predicts the load at which the structure becomes unstable, and
it predicts the shape that the structure will tend to have after the onset of instability. It does not make any
statement about whether buckling is coincident with overall structural failure. Some structures, including
flat plates, retain finite positive stiffness in the post-buckled range; others, such as thin cylinders under
external pressure, do not. In general, bifurcation buckling calculates critical loads which are
unconservative (i.e., higher than the loads at which the structure actually becomes elastically unstable).
(4-24)
where [ K ] 0 is the stiffness caused by the material stiffness, and [ K ] p is the initial stress and load
stiffness caused by non-zero loading. For a stiff elastic system, [ K ] 0 is almost constant, and the
variation of [ K ] p is proportional to the load variation.
During the BUCKLING step there may be a non-zero dead load, P, and there must be a linear
perturbation load, Q, specified in the BIFURCATION BUCKLING step. We wish to estimate what
multiple of Q, combined with P, which causes instability. Since the response is assumed to be stiff and
elastic, and therefore closely proportional to load, the stiffness at P + Q. is, to a good approximation,
( [ K ] 0 H [ K ] p H [ K ] q ) , where [ K ] q is the initial stress and load stiffness caused by Q. Thus, the
buckling load estimate is provided by the eigen problem.
( [ K ] 0 H [ K ] p H [ K ]q ) { } Z { 0 }
(4-25)
The eigenvalue, , is a multiplier of the applied load which added to the preload provides the critical load
estimate: the predicted collapse load is P + Q. is the collapse mode.
If no boundary conditions are given in the BIFURCATION BUCKLING step, the boundary conditions
of the state at the start of the buckling investigation (that is, of the previous nonlinear step) are used for
the buckling modes as well as for the perturbation loading. Since boundary conditions within any linear
perturbation step apply only locally within the step, if BIFURCATION BUCKLING steps follow one
another, boundary conditions for the buckling modes must be repeated within each of the
BIFURCATION BUCKLING steps except in steps where they are the same as those belonging to the
state at the start of the buckling investigation.
If boundary conditions are specified in the BIFURCATION BUCKLING step, the complete set of
boundary conditions must be given, since MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear assumes complete definition
of such an option in any linear perturbation analysis.
Several modes can be extracted simultaneously. This is often useful when the structure has different
buckling modes for which the critical loads have about the same magnitude, so that the designer must
consider the possibility of collapse in any of these modes. The collapse modes may be plotted with
MSC.Patran.
Bifurcation Approach
To illustrate the bifurcation approach, consider Equation (4-3), which shows a flat plate loaded by
uniaxial edge compression. Using linear static analysis, we can find the so-called primary equilibrium
path of the structure, which is always a straight line (denoted A in Figure 4-3). As shown, increasing the
loads will produce no out-of-plane deflection
.
Z
Y
P
P
A
C
Pcrit
UZ
Figure 4-13
Load vs. Deflection Paths for Central Deflection of a Flat Square Plate
Subjected to Uniaxial Edge Compression
CHAPTER 4 123
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Pcrit =
Normal Modes
The usual first step in performing a dynamic analysis is determining the natural frequencies and mode
shapes of the structure with damping neglected. Eigenvalue analysis is used to determine these basic
dynamic characteristics. The results of an eigenvalue analysis indicate the frequencies and shapes at
which a structure naturally tends to vibrate. These results characterize the basic dynamic behavior of the
structure and are an indication of how the structure will respond to dynamic loading.
The natural frequencies of a structure are the frequencies at which the structure naturally tends to vibrate
if it is subjected to a disturbance. For example, the strings of a piano are each tuned to vibrate at a specific
frequency. The deformed shape of the structure at a specific natural frequency of vibration is termed its
normal mode of vibration. Each mode shape is associated with a specific natural frequency.
Natural frequencies and mode shapes are functions of the structural properties and boundary conditions.
A cantilever beam has a set of natural frequencies and associated mode shapes (Figure 4-14). If the
structural properties change, the natural frequencies change, but the mode shapes may not necessarily
change. For example, if the elastic modulus of the cantilever beam is changed, the natural frequencies
change but the mode shapes remain the same. If the boundary conditions change, then the natural
frequencies and mode shapes both change. For example, if the cantilever beam is changed so that it is
pinned at both ends, the natural frequencies and mode shapes change.
CHAPTER 4 125
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
y
z
1
y
z
2
y
z
3
y
z
4
Figure 4-14
Modal quantities can be used to identify problem areas by indicating the more highly stressed elements.
Elements that are consistently highly stressed across many or all modes will probably be highly stressed
when dynamic loads are applied.
Modal strain energy is a useful quantity in identifying candidate elements for design changes to eliminate
problem frequencies. Elements with large values of strain energy in a mode indicate the location of large
elastic deformation (energy). These elements are those which most directly affect the deformation in a
mode. Therefore, changing the properties of these elements with large strain energy should have more
effect on the natural frequencies and mode shapes than if elements with low strain energy were changed.
SOL 600 contains two methods for eigenvalue extraction and three time integration operators. Nonlinear
effects, including material nonlinearity, geometric nonlinearity, and boundary nonlinearity, can be
incorporated.
In addition to distributed mass, you can also attach concentrated masses associated with each degree of
freedom of the system. You can include damping in either the modal superposition or the direct
integration methods. You can also include (nonuniform) displacement and/or velocity as an initial
condition, and apply time-dependent forces and/or displacements as boundary conditions.
Eigenvalue Analysis
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses either the inverse power sweep method or the Lanczos method to
extract eigenvalues and eigenvectors. The inverse power sweep method is typically used for extracting a
few modes while the Lanczos method is optimal for a few or many modes.
In dynamic eigenvalue analysis, we find the solution to an undamped linear dynamics problem:
( K 2 M ) Z 0
where K is the stiffness matrix, M is the mass matrix, are the eigenvalues (frequencies) and are
the eigenvectors. In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, K is the tangent stiffness matrix, which can
include material and geometrically nonlinear contributions. The mass matrix is formed from both
distributed mass and point masses.
Inverse Power Sweep
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear creates an initial trial vector. To obtain a new vector, the program
multiplies the initial vector by the mass matrix and the inverse (factorized) stiffness matrix. This
process is repeated until convergence is reached according to either of the following criteria: single
eigenvalue convergence or double eigenvalue convergence. In single eigenvalue convergence, the
program computes an eigenvalue at each iteration. Convergence is assumed when the values of two
successive iterations are within a prescribed tolerance. In double eigenvalue convergence, the program
assumes that the trial vector is a linear combination of two eigenvectors.
Using the three latest vectors, the program calculates two eigenvalues. It compares these two values with
the two values calculated in the previous step; convergence is assumed if they are within the prescribed
tolerance.
When an eigenvalue has been calculated, the program either exits from the extraction loop (if a sufficient
number of vectors has been extracted) or it creates a new trial vector for the next calculation. If a single
eigenvalue was obtained, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses the double eigenvalue routine to obtain
the best trial vector for the next eigenvalue. If two eigenvalues were obtained, the program creates an
arbitrary trial vector orthogonal to the previously obtained vectors.
CHAPTER 4 127
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
After MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has calculated the first eigenvalue, it orthogonalizes the trial
vector at each iteration to previously extracted vectors (using the Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization
procedure). Note that the power shift procedure is available with the inverse power sweep method.
To select the power shift, set the following parameters:
Initial shift frequency This is normally set to zero (unless the structure has rigid body modes,
(4-26)
1
JJJJJJ M u Z M K 1 M u
2
(4-27)
(4-28)
T
Substituting Equation (4-30) into Equation (4-29) and premultiplying by the matrix Q on both sides of
the equation, we have
1
JJJJJJ Q T M Q Z Q T M K 1 M Q
2
(4-29)
(4-30)
Q T M K 1 MQ Z T
(4-31)
T Z
1 2 0
2 2 3
0 3 3 m
0
(4-32)
0 m m
Consequently, the original eigenvalue problem, Equation (4-26), is reduced to the following new
eigenvalue problem:
1
JJJJJJ Z T
2
(4-33)
F Z K M .
CHAPTER 4 129
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
param,marcfil1,dmig002
This means that a file named dmig002 will be used. It contains stiffness
matrix terms (possibly from a set of unsymmetric friction stiffness
matrices)
param,mrmtxnam,kaax
This means that in the dmig002 file, use DMIG matrix terms labeled kaax
(or KAAX case does not matter).
param,mrspawn2,tran
This means that the primary MSC.Nastran run will spawn another
MSC.Nastran run to compute the complex eigenvalues. The name of the
command is nastran (nas is always used and the characters specified by
this parameter are added to the end of nas. Thus, we get nas+tran=nastran).
param,mrrcfile,nast2.rc
This is the name of the rc file to be used for the second (spawned)
MSC.Nastran run.
jid.nast.dat will be created from the original input file. This file will contain the CMETHOD
Case Control command and EIGC Bulk Data entry, all of the original geometry and additional
entries to read the dmig002 file.
A second MSC.Nastran job will be spawned from the primary MC.Nastran run using the
command
nastran jid.nast rc=nast2.rc
The nast2.rc file can be the same as nast1.rc or can contain different items. Usually memory will
need to be larger in nast2.rc than in nast1.rc.
The second MSC.Nastran run computes the complex eigenvalues and finishes.
Control of the process returns to the primary MSC.Nastran run and it finishes.
CHAPTER 4 131
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
CHAPTER 4 133
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Direct Integration
Direct integration is a numerical method for solving the equations of motion of a dynamic system. It is
used for both linear and nonlinear problems. In nonlinear problems, the nonlinear effects can include
geometric, material, and boundary nonlinearities. For transient analysis, MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear offers three direct integration operators listed below.
Newmark-beta Operator
Houbolt Operator
Single Step Houbolt
Direct integration techniques are imprecise; this is true regardless of which technique you use. Each
technique exhibits at least one of the following problems: conditional stability, artificial damping, and
phase errors, but all can be minimized so that they are negligible.
Newmark-beta Operator
This operator is probably the most popular direct integration method used in finite element analysis. For
linear problems, it is unconditionally stable and exhibits no numerical damping. The Newmark-beta
operator can effectively obtain solutions for linear and nonlinear problems for a wide range of loadings.
The procedure allows for change of time step, so it can be used in problems where sudden impact makes
a reduction of time step desirable. This operator can be used with adaptive time step control. Although
this method is stable for linear problems, instability can develop if nonlinearities occur. By reducing the
time step and/or adding damping, you can overcome these problems.
Houbolt Operator
This operator has the same unconditional stability as the Newmark-beta operator. In addition, it has
strong numerical damping characteristics, particularly for higher frequencies. This strong damping
makes the method very stable for nonlinear problems as well. In fact, stability increases with the time
step size. The drawback of this high damping is that the solution can become inaccurate for large time
steps. Hence, the results obtained with the Houbolt operator usually have a smooth appearance, but are
not necessarily accurate. The Houbolt integration operator, implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear uses a fixed time step procedure, is particularly useful in obtaining a rough scoping solution
to the problem.
Single Step Houbolt Operator
Two computational drawbacks of the Houbolt operator are the requirement of a special starting
procedure and the restriction to fixed time steps. A Single Step Houbolt procedure has been presented
[Ref. 1.], being unconditionally stable, second order accurate and asymptotically annihilating. In this
way, the algorithm is computationally more convenient compared to the standard Houbolt method, and
the numerical damping for this method as implemented in SOL 600 has been significantly improved over
the standard Houbolt method. This algorithm is recommended for all dynamic analyses.
Technical Background
Consider the equations of motion of a structural system:
Ma H Cv H Ku Z F
(4-34)
where M , C , and K are mass, damping, and stiffness matrices, respectively, and a , v , u , and F are
acceleration, velocity, displacement, and force vectors. Various direct integration operators can be used
to integrate the equations of motion to obtain the dynamic response of the structural system. The
technical background of the three direct integration operators available in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear is described below.
Newmark-beta Operator
Ut
(t)
U t H t
( t H t )
U t H t
( t H t )
(4-35)
v n H 1 Z v n H ( 1 )ta n H ta n H 1
(4-36)
where superscript
denotes a value at the nth time step and u , v , and a take on their usual meanings.
The particular form of the dynamic equations corresponding to the trapezoidal rule
Z 12I
Z 14
results in
n
2
4
4J
JJJJJJJ
M H JJJJJ C H K u Z F n H 1 R H M a n H JJJJJ v n H Cv n
t 2
t
t
(4-37)
CHAPTER 4 135
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
R Z
T dv
(4-38)
u n H 1 Z u n H u
(4-39)
Notice that the operator matrix includes K , the tangent stiffness matrix. Hence, any nonlinearity results
in a reformulation of the operator matrix. Additionally, if the time step changes, this matrix must be
recalculated because the operator matrix also depends on the time step. It is possible to change the values
of and if so desired.
Step by Step Solution Algorithm using Newmark Beta Method
1. Initialize:
U o , U o , U o
2. Select time step size t and calculate integration constants:
1
a o Z JJJJJJJJJ ; a 1 Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
t
( t )
1
a 2 Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ; a 3 Z JJJJJJ 1
2
( t )
t
1
a 4 Z JJJ 1 ; a 5 Z JJJJJ JJJ 2
2
3. Form effective stiffness matrix [K]*:
[K]* = [K] + a0[M] + a1[C]
4. Triangularize (reduce) [K]*:
5. Compute effective load vector at time t + t:
)
R t*H t Z R t H t H [ M ] ( a 0 U t H a 2 U t H a 3 U
t
+ [ C ] ( a 1 U t H a 4 U t H a 5 U t )
6. Solve for displacements at time t + t:
[ K ] * U t H t Z R t*H t
(4-40)
3
2
(4-41)
and
a n H 1 Z ( 2u n H 1 5u n H 4u n 1 u n 2 ) t 2
(4-42)
6t
t 2
3
1 7
1
JJJJJ JJJ u n JJJ u n 1 H JJJ u n 2 C
2
t 6
3
(4-43)
This equation provides an implicit solution scheme. By solving Equation (4-39) for u , you obtain
Equation (4-44), and so obtain v
nH1
and a
nH1
u n H 1 Z u n H u
(4-44)
Equation (4-43) is based on uniform time steps errors occur when the time step is changed. Also, a
n1
and u
n2
CHAPTER 4 137
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
m1
Ma
nH1
c1
H Cv
nH1
k1
Ku
nH1
f1 n H 1
F
u
v
nH1
Z v H ta H ta
2 n
Z
(4-45)
f n
Z u H tv H t a H t a
HaF
nH1
H Ma H Cv H Ku
2 nH1
(4-46)
nH1
(4-47)
Notice that in contrast to the Newmark and the standard Houbolt method, the equilibrium equation also
contains terms corresponding to the beginning of the increment. Without loss of generality, the parameter
m1
can be set to 1. Based on asymptotic annihilation and second order accuracy, the remaining
Z 0, Z ,
Z ( 2 H ) 4
Z H ,
12
c1
Z 1 2 ,
1
k1
Z ( 2 H 3 ) 4
Z 1 2 ,
12
, Z ,
f1
k1
In this way, the number of unknown parameters has been reduced to two. Based on a Taylor series
1
expansion of the displacement about the nth time step, and should be related by H
1
Z 1 2,
which finally yields Z 1 2 ( 1 2 ) . According to [Ref. 1.], should be set to 3/2 (with
Z 1 2 ) to minimize the velocity error and to 1/2 (with Z 0 ) to avoid velocity overshoot. The
default values in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are
nH1
n
1
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J C H K u Z F
Ku H
M
H
1 2 k1
1
k1
t
t
m
n
2 n
n
1
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ M { tv H t a } JJJJJJJJJ Ma
1 2 k1
k1
t
1
c
c 1 n
n
2
n
JJJJJJJJ
J C v H ta JJJJJJJJJJJJ tv n H t a n JJJJJJJJJ Cv
k1
1
k1
(4-48)
Initial Conditions
In a transient dynamic analysis, you can specify initial conditions such as nodal displacements and/or
nodal velocities. To enter initial conditions, use the following option: TIC for specified nodal
displacements, and Bulk Data nodal velocities.
CHAPTER 4 139
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
Damping
In a transient dynamic analysis, damping represents the dissipation of energy in the structural system. It
also retards the response of the structural system.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to enter two types of damping in a transient dynamic
analysis: discrete dampers and Rayleigh damping.
For direct integration damping, you can specify the damping matrix as a linear combination of the mass
and stiffness matrices of the system. You can specify damping coefficients on an element basis.
Stiffness damping should not be applied to either Herrmann elements or gap elements because of the
presence of Lagrange multipliers.
Numerical damping is used to damp out unwanted high-frequency chatter in the structure. If the time step
is decreased (stiffness damping might cause too much damping), use the numerical damping option to
make the damping (stiffness) coefficient proportional to the time step. Thus, if the time step decreases,
high-frequency response can still be accurately represented. This type of damping is particularly useful
in problems where the characteristics of the model and/or the response change strongly during analysis
(for example, problems involving opening or closing gaps).
Element damping uses coefficients on the element matrices and is represented by the equation:
n
C Z
J K
i M i H i H i JJJJ
i
1
i Z
(4-49)
where
C is the global damping matrix
M i is the mass matrix of ith element
K i is the stiffness matrix of the ith element
a i is the mass damping coefficient on the ith element
i is the usual stiffness damping coefficient on the ith element
i is the numerical damping coefficient on the ith element
t is the time increment
If the same damping coefficients are used throughout the structure, Equation (4-49) is equivalent to
Rayleigh damping.
The damping on elastic foundations is the same as the damping on the element on which the foundation
is applied.
References
For directions on setting up a Transient Dynamic analysis, see Specifying the Analysis Type for a
Subcase and Specifying Transient Dynamic Subcase Parameters (Chapter 7).
Creep
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) offers two schemes for modeling creep in conjunction with
plasticity. Creep for SOL 600 is described differently than Creep for SOL 106. The CREEP entry used
in SOL 106 will not work in SOL 600, and if entered will cause the job to terminate with an appropriate
message. Creep in SOL 600 must be described using viscoplastic materials (MATVP). The creep
formulations for SOL 600 are:
1. Treating creep strains and plastic strains separately using an explicit procedure (where the creep
is treated explicitly) or an implicit procedure (where both creep and plasticity are treated
implicitly). These procedures are available with standard options via data input or with userspecified options via user subroutines. More details are provided below.
2. Modeling creep strains and plastic strains in a unified fashion (viscoplasticity). Both explicit and
implicit procedures are again available for modeling unified viscoplasticity. More details are
provided in the section titled Viscoplasticity in this chapter. The options offered by MSC.Nastran
for modeling creep are as follows:
Creep data can be entered directly through the MATVP Bulk Data data entry. The form of the
creep is designated with either POWER for empirical creep law or TABLE for a tabular input of
creep model parameters.
An automatic time stepping scheme can be used to maximize the time step size in the analysis.
Eigenvalues can be extracted for the estimation of creep buckling time. In addition, for explicit
(4-50)
or
(
cr
e l ) T
(4-51)
CHAPTER 4 141
Nonlinearity and Analysis Types
(4-52)
The time increment is repeated until convergence is obtained or the maximum recycles control is
exceeded. In the latter case, the run is ended.
If the first repeat does not satisfy tolerances, the possible causes are:
Excessive residual load correction
Strong additional nonlinearities such as creep buckling-creep collapse
Incorrect coding in user subroutine CRPLAW, VSWELL, or UVSCPL
(4-53)
(4-54)
(4-55)
Since the time increment is adjusted to satisfy the tolerances, it is impossible to predetermine the total
number of time increments for a given total creep time.
Creep Control Tolerances
SOL 600 performs a creep analysis under constant load or displacement conditions on the basis of a set
of tolerances and controls you provide.These are as follows:
1. Stress change tolerance This tolerance controls the allowable stress change per time step during
the creep solution, as a fraction of the total stress at a point. Stress change tolerance governs the
accuracy of the transient creep response. If you need accurate tracking of the transient response,
specify a tight tolerance of 1 percent or 2 percent stress change per time step. If you need only the
steady-state solution, supply a relatively loose tolerance of 10-20 percent. It is also possible to
check the absolute rather than the relative stress.
2. Creep strain increment per elastic strain SOL 600 uses either explicit or implicit integration of
the creep rate equation. When the explicit procedure is used, the creep strain increment per elastic
strain is used to control stability. In almost all cases, the default of 50 percent represents the
stability limit, so that you need not provide any entry for this value. It is also possible to check
the absolute rather than the relative strain.
3. Maximum number of recycles for satisfaction of tolerances The automatic creep option in SOL
600 chooses its own time step. In some cases, the program recycles to choose a time step that
satisfies tolerances, but recycling rarely occurs more than once per step. Excessive recycling can
be caused by physical problems such as creep buckling, poor coding of user subroutine
CRPLAW, VSWELL, or UVSCPL or excessive residual load correction that can occur when the
creep solution begins from a state that is not in equilibrium. The maximum number of recycles
allows you to avoid wasting machine time under such circumstances. If there is no satisfaction of
tolerances after the attempts at stepping forward, the program stops. The default of five recycles
is conservative in most cases.
4. Low stress cut-off Low stress cut-off avoids excessive iteration and small time steps caused by
tolerance checks that are based on small (round off) stress states. A simple example is a beam in
pure bending. The stress on the neutral axis is a very small roundoff-number, so that automatic
time stepping scheme should not base time step choices on tolerance satisfaction at such points.
The default of five percent of the maximum stress in the structure is satisfactory for most cases.
5. Choice of element for tolerance checking Creep tolerance checking occurs as a default for all
integration points in all elements. You might wish to check tolerances in only 1 element or in up
to 14 elements of your choice. Usually, the most highly stressed element is chosen.
References
1. Chung, J. and Hulbert, G.M., A family of single-step Houbolt time integration algorithms for
structural dynamics, Comp. Meth. in App. Mech. Engg., 118, 1994.
Analysis Techniques
Domain Decomposition
RESTARTS
BRKSQL
144
148
155
159
149
154
Domain Decomposition
The Domain
Decomposition Method
(DDM) is the ability to
subdivide your model into
domains. Each domain is
then submitted to a
separate computer or CPU
for parallel processing.
With this ability, you can
analyze large models with
much less over all compute
time. A single processor
job that might take 30
hours to run, can run in half
the time on two processors,
or even a quarter of the time with four processors. Jobs that take days to run on a single machine can be
run overnight on multiple processors that would otherwise lay idle. With DDM, large models that were
once thought impossible to practically optimize, now can be solved.
Description
Specifies parallel regions for domain decomposition in nonlinear analysis when
MSC.Marc is executed from MSC.Nastran
References
PARAMARC (SOL 600) (p. 2059) in the .
CHAPTER 5 145
Analysis Techniques
Decomposition Method
Automatic
Manual
Number of Domains
Model/Current Group
PARAMARC ID
3
KIND
10
NPROC
51
Field
Contents
ID
KIND
NPROC
A similar option to create a single-file MSC.Marc t16 file is also available. This option is selected using
Bulk Data PARAM,MARCOUTR,1 which is the default starting with the 2005 r3 version.
CHAPTER 5 147
Analysis Techniques
DDM Configuration
Please see the MSC.Marc Parallel Version for Windows NT / UNIX Installation and User Notes for
proper configuration. MSC.Marc Parallel must be configured properly in order for DDM to work from
MSC.Patran or MSC.Nastran. If you have trouble, please check the following:
On Windows machines:
1. Make sure MPICH is installed. This can be done automatically by including bulk data PARAM,
MARMPICH,1 and a file named mpich.dat in the same directory as the Nastran input deck with
3 lines having the content (book) user name (the name you use to log in the PC) domain name (if
you are not a member of the domain, enter local) password (password you enter to login in to the
PC). All items must start in column 1.
2. When using a cluster of Windows machines you must have all the input files in a shared directory
when you submit the job. The MSC.Marc installation on the master host must be in a shared
directory also unless all machines have their own installation of MSC.Marc, and then they must
be referenced in the hostfile.
For UNIX you must be able to rlogin to all referenced machines in the hostfile without
supplying a password. If you cannot, check that your .rhosts file has the name of all the
machines in it. Check with a system administrator if you need help.
Only homogeneous clusters of machines are currently supported. They must all be running the same MPI
service or daemons. For example a cluster of 64 bit HP machines must all use the HP MPI; a cluster of
32 bit HP machines can use either HP MPI or MPICH, but not a mixture; heterogeneous clusters should
work if they all use MPICH; UNIX and Windows clusters are not supported.
More information on running jobs in parallel is provided in the MSC.Nastran Implicit SOL 600
Parallel Guide.
RESTARTS
A restart capability is available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600). Any analysis can be
saved from any point for a possible restart. A new static load case or a buckling analysis can be solved
by restarting from the original static analysis.
Description
RESTART
References
RESTART (SOLs 600/700) (p. 2330) in the MSC.Natran Quick Reference Guide.
CHAPTER 5 149
Analysis Techniques
Review
Inertia relief has long been a feature in MSC.Nastran SOL 101, which enables applied static loading to
an unconstrained structure and the calculation of deformed shape and internal loads within the
accelerated structure. Inertia relief calculates the rigid body mass x acceleration loads imparted by the
applied loads, and applies them in combination to the flexible body to produce a load-balanced static
formulation in the linear acceleration reference frame. The steady-state relative structural
displacements and internal loads are calculated using support entries (PARAM,INREL,-1) or the new
auto-support capability (PARAM,INREL,-2).
Inertia relief is commonly used to calculate psuedo-static stresses, strains, and loads of unsupported
structures due to static loading.
General Formulation
Consider common 3D unconstrained structure with six rigid body modes.
Rigid body mechanics loads balance (small motion):
Fi m i ai
Z 0 and
( M i H r i o F i ) ( Ii i H ri o m i a i )
Z 0
(5-1)
(5-2)
R is a (a-dof x 6) geometric rigid body matrix resulting from unit displacements in each basic direction
with respect to GRDPNT or (0,0,0). R provides summation and cross-product utilities for loads and
motion at each dof i . Rigid body accelerations
PARAM,GRDPNT. All
Fi
and
Mi
ai
and
are represented by 6 x 1
mi
u o
at
{ u o } Z ( [ R ] [ M ] [ R ] ) [ R ] { P }
T
R MR
(5-3)
is the total 6 x 6 a-set mass, nonsingular for normal 3D models with appropriate mass properties.
Apply the balanced loads to the finite element structure in linear statics formulation. This form is
employed by the PARAM,INREL,-2 method:
[ K ] { U } Z { P } [ M ] [ R ] { u o }
(Inrel = -2)
(5-4)
In contrast, older method INREL = -1 and SOL 111 employ the following:
}
[K ]{ U } Z { P } [ M ][D ]{ U
r
(Inrel = -1)
(5-5)
[ K ] { U } Z { P } [ M ] [ r ] { q r }
(5-6)
Each method uses a different representation for the rigid body matrix and accelerations. Stiffness matrix
K is singular (i.e., rank l Z a 6 ), and each method likewise employs different techniques to solve for
displacement shape U.
CHAPTER 5 151
Analysis Techniques
SUPPORT6 Entry
SUPORT6
Inertia Relief for SOL 600 - Used in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear SOL 600 only
SID
METH
IREMOV
MODES
FMAX
FSHIFT
GID
CDOF
CID
3000
123456
8
IDS1
Examples:
SUPORT6
SUPORT6
0.6
-10.0
SUPORT6
SUPORT6
-2
101
10
Field
Contents
SID
METH
IREMOV
Method to retain or remove inertia relief from a previous subcase (Integer, Default = 1)
1 = Retain inertia relief conditions from previous subcase
1 = Remove inertia relief loads immediately
2 = Remove inertia relief loads gradually
IREMOV should be blank or 1 unless METH is 0
GID
CDOF
Degrees of freedom for which inertia relief loads will be applied (Integer, no Default).
Enter a string of values identifying the degrees of freedom for the model. For 3D
models, usually 123456 is entered. For 2D models two or three degrees of freedom as
applicable may be entered. The limit is 6 degrees of freedom for 3D models (see
Remark 2).
(Used for METH=1 ONLY)
CID
Coordinate system flag designating how to apply inertia relief loads (Integer, Default
= 0)
0= Basic coordinate system
N=Apply loads in coordinate system designated by field 7 of the GRID entry for grid
id N.
(Used for METH=1 ONLY)
CHAPTER 5 153
Analysis Techniques
Field
Contents
IDS1
MODES
FMAX
Rigid body modes frequency cutoff (Hz) (Real, Default =1.0 Hz)
(Used for METH=2 ONLY)
FSHIFT
Shift frequency used in Lanczos eigenvalue extraction (Hz) (Real, Default = -1.0 Hz)
(Used for METH=2 ONLY)
Remarks:
1. The continuation entry is required only if the eigenvalue method (METH=2) is used. Fields 5-7
must be blank if the eigenvalue method is to be used. The continuation option must be omitted if
the kinematic method is to be used. The kinematic method is similar to param,inrel,-2 for other
solution sequences except that the inertia relief loads are updated at each iteration.
2. For the kinematic method, a maximum of 6 degrees of freedom are allowed for 3D structures (2
or 3 dof for 2D structures). You are responsible for knowing how many rigid body modes need
to be constrained with inertia relief. For multiple contact bodies which are unsupported at the
beginning of an analysis but eventually contact, there are usually 6 dof per flexible body. This
situation requires the use of the eigenvalue method with MODES set to 6 times the number of
unsupported flexible bodies. If some flexible bodies are supported in some directions but not in
others, the number will be less than 6 per body. It is suggested that a preliminary SOL 103
eigenvalue extraction be performed to assess the number of rigid body modes.
3. The parameter INREL is ignored by SOL 600.
4. METH=3 is the only available METH for the 2005 r3 release. Inertia relief was not available prior
to the 2005 r3 release.
CHAPTER 5 155
Analysis Techniques
BRKSQL
Bulk Data entry BRKSQL is available for brake squeal simulation which replaces several parameters and
MARCIN entries previously used. It is now possible to determine the unstable brake squeal roots using
MSC.Nastrans complex eigenvalue solver and unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices form MSC.Marc
either for an undeformed structure or after a nonlinear subcase. Brake squeal analysis for SOL 600 is
accomplished by starting a primary MSC.Nastran job, spawning MSC.Marc to calculate the
unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices either at the beginning or end of a nonlinear subcase, then
spawning a second MSC.Nastran job to calculate the complex eigenvalues. Unstable roots indicate
potential brake squeal. They are designated by positive real roots and negative damping in the f06
output file.
BRKSQL
METH
AVSTIF
FACT1
R1
R2
R3
5.34E6
1.0
1.0
0.0
0.0
1.0
2.0
7
GLUE
3.0
4.0
NASCMD
RCFILE
Example:
BRKSQL
tran
nastb
8
ICORD
10
Field
METH
Contents
Method flag corresponding to the type of brake squeal calculations to be performed.
(Integer, Default = 1)
0 = Perform brake squeal calculations before any nonlinear analysis has taken place
1 = Perform brake squeal calculations after all nonlinear load cases
AVSTIF
Approximate average stiffness per unit area between the pads and disk. Corresponds to
MSC.Marcs PARAMETERS fifth datablock, field 1. This value is also known as the
initial friction stiffness in the MSC.Marc Volume C documentation. AVSTIF can be
obtained by either experiment or numerical simulation. A larger value of AVSTIF
corresponds to a higher contact pressure, which usually results in more unstable modes.
(Real; no Default; required field)
FACT1
Factor to scale friction stiffness values calculated by MSC.Marc. (Real; Default = 1.0)
GLUE
Flag specifying whether MPC for non-pad/disk surfaces with glued contact are used or
ignored (Integer, Default = 0). A value of 0 means ignore the MPC; a value of 1 means
include the MPCs (see Remark 6).
ICORD
Flag indicating whether coordinates are updated or not. A value of 0 means coordinates
are not updated. A value of 1 means coordinates are updated using the formula
Cnew=Corig+Defl where Cnew are updated coordinates, Corig are original coordinates,
and Defl are the final displacements from last MSC.Marc increment. (Integer; Default =
0)
R1
R2
R3
CHAPTER 5 157
Analysis Techniques
Field
Contents
NASCMD
RCFILE
Remarks:
1. This entry is used to calculate complex eigenvalues for brake squeal using unsymmetric stiffness
friction matrices calculated by MSC.Marc. Options exist to obtain the unsymmetric stiffness
matrices using the undeformed geometry (initial contact) or after all specified nonlinear subcases.
2. SOL 600 performs brake squeal calculations. The main (original) MSC.Nastran job with input
file jid.dat or jid.bdf spawns MSC.Marc just as it does for any other SOL 600 job. MSC.Marc
calculates unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices that1 are saved on a file (jid.marc.bde with
associated file jid.marc.ccc). The primary MSC.Nastran job then creates input data for a second
MSC.Nastran job (jid.nast.dat) to use the unsymmetric stiffness matrices in an complex
eigenvalue extraction. The primary MSC.Nastran job spawns a second MSC.Nastran job to
calculate the complex eigenvalues. The complex eigenvalues and eigenvectors are found in
jid.nast.f06, jid.nast.op2, etc.
NASCMD is the name of the command used to execute the secondary MSC.Nastran job.
NASCMD can be up to 64 characters long and must be left justified in field 2. The sting as entered
will be used as is -- except that it will be converted to lower case regardless of whether it is entered
in upper or lower case.
RCFILE is the name of an RC file to be used for the secondary MSC.Nastran job. It should be
similar to the RC file used for the primary run except that additional memory will usually be
necessary to calculate the complex eigenvalues and batch=no should also be specified. RCFILE
is limited to 8 characters and an extension of .rc will be added automatically. This entry will be
converted to upper case in MSC.Nastran but will be converted to lower case before spawning the
complex eigenvalue run. This RC file must be located in the same directory as the MSC.Nastran
input file. This entry is the same as specifying PARAM,MRRCFILE. One or the other should be
used.
3. MPC are produced for contact surfaces with glued contact. DMIGs are produced for contact
surfaces without glued contact. The brakes and drums should not use glued contact; other regions
of the structure can used glued contact.
4. The continuation lines may be omitted if defaults are appropriate.
5. When a BRKSQL entry is used, PARAM,MRMTXNAM and PARAM,MARCFIL1 should not
be entered.
6. When brake squeal matrices are output by MSC.Marc, unsymmetric friction stiffness matrices are
output for non-glued contact surfaces. For surfaces with glued contact, MPCs are output. The
GLUE flag signals SOL 600 to look for these MPCs and combine them with other MPCs that
might be in the model using MPCADD, or if no MPCs were originally used, to add the MCPs due
to glued contact. Glued contact surfaces may not be used for the disk-rotor interface. If GLUE is
zero or blank, the MPC for glued contact in the MSC.Marc brake squeal bde file (if any) will be
ignored. Sometimes MSC.Marc puts out MPCs with only one degree-of-freedom defined. Such
MPCs will be ignored; otherwise, MSC.Nastran will generate a fatal error.
7. If ICORD=1, an MSC.Marc t19 file will automatic.
CHAPTER 5 159
Analysis Techniques
USRSUB6
USRSUB6 U1
U2
U9
4
U3
5
U4
6
U5
7
U6
8
U7
10
U8
U10
Examples:
USRSUB6 UDAMAG UVOID
USRSUB6*
Field
Ui
TENSOF
SEPFORBBC
Contents
Name of user subroutine to be included (Character, no Default) See MSC.Marc
Volume D for list of available User subroutines
Remarks:
1. All user subroutines must reside in the directory where the MSC.Nastran input file resides.
2. All names must be in lower case and have the extension.f
3. SOL 600 combines all user subroutines into one large subroutine named u600.f and u600.f is
passed to the MSC.Marc command line when spawned from MSC.Nastran
4. If the subroutine name is greater than 8 characters you must use fixed format.
Modeling
Coordinate Systems
Nodes
Elements
Modeling in MSC.Patran
162
164
165
166
Coordinate Systems
The basic coordinate system in MSC.Nastran Nonlinear is a right-handed, rectangular Cartesian system.
Your may choose other systems locally for input, for output of nodal variables (displacements, velocities,
etc.) and point loads or boundary condition specification, and for material options. In general, all
coordinate systems are assumed to be right-handed. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear output is provided
in the Global Coordinate System. The Global Coordinate System is defined by field 7 of each GRID
entry and therefore may refer to a rotated rectangular or cylindrical coordinate system. If field 7 is blank
or zero, the output is in the Basic Coordinate System (which is rectangular). MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear does not support output in spherical coordinate systems, however input may be specified in
spherical coordinate systems.
CHAPTER 6 163
Modeling
Depending on the element type and material model, the default element coordinate system can be
overridden by referring to a nonzero Coordinate ID when meshing.
Note:
When used to define an element coordinate system, the Coordinate ID can reference only a
rectangular coordinate system.
Nodes
Model geometry is defined in MSC.Nastran with grid points. A grid point is a point on or in the structural
continuum which is used to define a finite element. A simple model may have only a handful of grid
points; a complex model may have many tens of thousands. The structures grid points displace with the
loaded structure. Each grid point of the structural model has six possible components of displacement:
three translations (in the x-, y-, or z-directions) and three rotations (about the x-, y-, or z-axes). These
components of displacement are called degrees of freedom (DOFs).
Degrees-of-Freedom
The degrees-of-freedom in MSC.Nastran Nonlinear are always referred to as follows:
1
x-displacement.
y-displacement.
z-displacement.
MSC.Nastran Nonlinear only activates those degrees-of-freedom needed at a node. Thus, some of the
degrees of freedom listed above may not be used at all nodes in a model, because each element type only
uses those degrees of freedom which are relevant. For example, two-dimensional solid (continuum)
stress/displacement elements only use degrees of freedom 1 and 2. The degrees of freedom actually used
at any node are thus the envelope of those variables needed in each element that uses the node.
CHAPTER 6 165
Modeling
Elements
Once the geometry (grid points) of the structural model has been established, the grid points are used to
define the finite elements.
MSC.Nastran has an extensive library of finite elements covering a wide range of physical behavior.
Some of these elements and their names are shown in figure below. The C in front of each element name
stands for connection.
Point Element (not a finite element, but can be included in the finite element model)
CMASS1 (Scalar mass connection)
CONM1 (Concentrated mass)
Spring Elements (they behave like simple extensional or rotational springs)
CELAS2
Line Elements (they behave like rods, bars, or beams)
CROD, CBAR, CBEAM
Surface Elements (they behave like membranes or thin plates)
CTRIA3
CQUAD4
CHEXA
CPENTA
CTETRA
Rigid Bar (infinitely stiff without causing numerical difficulties in the mathematical model)
RBE2
Structural elements are defined on Bulk Data connection entries that identify the grid points to which
the element is connected. The mnemonics for all such entries have a prefix of the letter C, followed by
an indication of the type of element, such as CBAR and CROD. The order of the grid point identification
defines the positive direction of the axis of a one-dimensional element and the positive surface of a plate
element. The connection entries include additional orientation information when required. Some
elements allow for offsets between its connecting grid points and the reference plane of the element. The
coordinate systems associated with element offsets are defined in terms of the grid point coordinate
systems. For most elements, each connection entry references a property definition entry. If many
elements have the same properties, this system of referencing eliminates a large number of duplicate
entries.
Details for each element type are described in Element Library (Ch. 11).
Modeling in MSC.Patran
In MSC.Patran, geometric models are the foundation on which most finite element models are built.
Geometric curves, surfaces, or solids provide the base for creating nodes, elements, and loads and
boundary conditions; the geometric model also serves as the structure to which material properties, as
well as element properties, may be assigned even before any mesh is actually generated.
Action
Names the operation that will be performed; for example Create, Edit, or
Delete.
Object
Identifies the geometric entity upon which the action is performed, for
example, Solid. In this case, if the Action is Create, then the command
requests that a solid be created.
Method
Specifies the procedure used to perform the action. Taking the above
example one step further, if the Method is Surface, a solid will be created
by one of the techniques that utilize surfaces.
There are hundreds of action, object, method combinations available for creating geometric entities in
MSC.Patran. For complete descriptions on creating geometry models, see the Patran Reference Manual,
Part 2: Geometry Modeling.
CHAPTER 6 167
Modeling
Mesh seeding tools to control specific mesh densities in specific areas of your geometry.
Several highly automated techniques for mesh generation.
Equivalencing capabilities for joining meshes in adjacent regions.
Tools to verify the quality and accuracy of your finite element model.
Capabilities for direct input and editing of finite element data.
CHAPTER 6 169
Modeling
TetMesh
Arbitrary solid mesher generates tetrahedral elements within MSC.Patran solids defined by an arbitrary
number of faces or volumes formed by collection of triangular element shells. This method is based on
MSC plastering technology.
2-1/2D Mesher
Transforms a planar 2D mesh to produce a 3D mesh of solid elements, using sweep and
extrude operations.
Accessing the Finite Element Application
All of MSC.Patrans finite element modeling capabilities are available by selecting the
Finite Element button on the main form.
Like the Geometry Application, the top portion of the Finite Element form contains three
keywords, Action, Object, and Method; these remain the same throughout all activities. Finite Element
(FE) Meshing, Node and Element Editing, Nodal Equivalencing, ID Optimization, Model Verification,
FE Show, Modify and Delete, and ID Renumber, are all accessible by setting the Action/Object/Method
combination on the Finite Elements form.
For complete descriptions on creating geometry models, see the Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite
Element Modeling.
Solution Type
Analysis Procedures
Translation Parameters
Solution Parameters
Subcases
Subcase Parameters
202
204
172
176
179
182
185
188
Solution Type
MSC.Nastran can simulate many different types of structural response. In general an analysis type can
be either static or dynamic. In a static analysis, loads and boundary conditions are applied to a model and
the response is assumed to remain the constant over time. In dynamic analysis the response changes over
time. In MSC.Nastran, both static and dynamic analysis may simulate linear response or nonlinear
response. SOL 600 incorporates the formulations and functionality to simulate nonlinear static and
dynamic structural responses. The specific procedure MSC.Nastran will run is specified on the Executive
Control Statement by the ID entry. SOL 600 represents multiple types of analysis procedures, any of
which can be specified by the ID value on the SOL 600 Executive Control Statements.
Description
SOL 600, ID
References
SOL 600,ID (p. 138 in the .
The user will enter his own DMAP to create whatever type of output that is
desired, such as op2, xdb, punch, f06. For all other options, DMAP is generated
as needed internally by MSC.Nastran.
beam
The beam option must be specified if op2,xdb,pch. or f06 options are specified
and beam internal loads are to be placed in any of these files. The beam and eig
options are mutually exclusive (you cannot specify both).
CONTINUE= is an option that specifies how MSC.Nastran will continue its analysis after MSC.Marc
finishes. To continue the analysis, do not enter any STOP or OUTR options. It is possible to perform more
than one of these operations if necessary.
CHAPTER 7 173
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
MSC.Nastran will continue the current solution sequence as normal. For example, if SOL
600,106 is entered, SOL 106 will continue as normal after MSC.Marc finishes. Only 3-D
contact or materials supported by SOL 106 may be used.
MSC.Nastran will continue the current solution sequence as normal. For example if SOL
600,106 is entered, SOL 106 will continue as normal after MSC.Marc finishes. Of course, no
3-D contact or materials not supported by SOL 106 may be used.
MSC.Nastran will switch to SOL 107 to compute complex eigenvalues. MSC.Marc will
generate DMIG matrices for friction stiffness (and possibly damping) on a file specified by
pram,marcfil1,name and time specified by param,marcstif,time. This is accomplished by
making a complete copy of the original MSC.Nastran input file and spawning off a new job
with the SOL entry changed and an include entry for the DMIG file.
(Option not presently available.) MSC.Nastran will switch to SOL 107 to compute complex
eigenvalues. MSC.Marc will generate OUTPUT4 matrices for friction stiffness (and possibly
damping) on a file specified by pram,marcfil2,name and time specified by
param,marcstif,time, This is accomplished by making a complete copy of the original
MSC.Nastran input file and spawning off a new job with the SOL entry changed and an
include entry for the DMIG file.
The original MSC.Nastran file should include CMETHOD=id in the Case Control command
and a matching CEIG entry in the Bulk Data.
MSC.Nastran will switch to SOL 111 to compute modal frequency response. MSC.Marc will
generate natural frequencies and mode shapes in (tbd) format which are read into
MSC.Nastran from a file specified by param,marcfil3,name.
(Option not presently available.) Same as option 3 except SOL 112 for linear transient
response will be used.
MSC.Nastran will switch to the solution sequence given in field 9 of the MDMIOUT entry.
In addition, the DMIG entries specified by MDMIOUT will be included in a separate
MSC.Nastran execution spawned from the original execution. Case Control and Bulk Data
will be added to the original input to properly handle these matrices in the spawned
MSC.Nastran execution.
Same as option 1 except SOL 110 is run. For this option, the original MSC.Nastran input file
must contain METHOD=ID1 and CMETHOD=ID2 in the Case Control as well as matching
EIGRL (or EIGR) and CEIG entries in the Bulk Data.
Same as option 1 except SOL 103 is run for real eigenvalues/eigenvectors. The database can
be saved to restart into SOL 110 if desired. This should be done on the command line or in a
rc file with scratch=no. For this situation, the original MSC.Nastran input file must include
METHOD=id in the Case Control command and a matching EIGRL or EIGR entry in the
Bulk Data. (CMETHOD and CEIG can also be included.) The actual restart from SOL 103
to 110 must be performed manually at the present time.
101+
Continue options 101 to 400 are used to convert MSC.Marcs initial contact tying constraints
to MPCs and then continue in SOL 101 to 112 as a standard MSC.Nastran execution. For
example, if CONTINUE=101, a SOL 101 run with all the geometry load cases, etc. from the
original run would be conducted with the addition of the initial contact MPC determined from
MSC.Marc. The continue=101+ options are frequency used to model dissimilar meshes as
well as glued contact which does not change throughout the analysis. This option can be used
for any standard MSC.Nastran sequence where the initial contact condition does not change.
In order for initial contact to work, the surfaces must be initially touching. If they are
separated by a gap, the MPCs will be zero until the gap closes and thus the initial MPCs are
zero. This option automatically sets BCPARA INITCON=1.
(rest of deck is the same as any other SOL 600 input file)
CQUAD4
CQUAD4
ENDDATA
239
240
2
2
271
272
272
273
293
294
292
293
YES
CHAPTER 7 175
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
The full input for this example can be obtained from MSC.Nastran development. The name of the input
file continu2.dat.
Analysis Application.
Analysis Procedures
The subcase is the MSC.Nastran mechanism for associating loads and boundary conditions, output
requests, and various other parameters to be used during part of a complete run. Each subcase can be
designated with one of the analysis types listed below. For each analysis type, you will define the Solution
Parameters and Output Requests; these collectively constitute the Analysis Procedures.
In MSC.Nastran, Case Control options provide the loads and constraints, and load incrementation
method, and controls the program after the initial elastic analysis. Case Control options also include
blocks which allow changes in the initial model specifications. Case Control options can also specify
print-out and postprocessing options.Each set of load sets must be begin with a SUBCASE command and
be terminated by another SUBCASE or a BEGIN BULK command. If there is only one load case, the
SUBCASE entry is not required. The SUBCASE option requests that the program perform another
increment or series of increments. The input format for these options is described in MD Nastran Quick
Reference Guide.
Analysis Types
Analysis Types for subcases in SOL 600 include the following:
Type
Description
Linear Static
Static stress analysis is used when inertia effects can be neglected. During a
linear static step, the models response is defined by the linear elastic stiffness at
the base state, the state of deformation and stress at the beginning of the step.
Contact conditions cannot change during the step - they remain as they are
defined in the base state.
Nonlinear Static
Normal Modes
This solution type uses eigenvalue techniques to extract the frequencies of the
current system, The stiffness determined at the end of the previous step is used
as the basis for the extraction, so that small vibrations of a preloaded structure
can be modeled.
Transient
Dynamic
This solution procedure integrates all of the equations of motion through time.
For linear systems, the dynamic method, using the Single-Step Houbolt operator,
is unconditionally stable, meaning there is no mathematical limit on the size of
the time increment that can be used to integrate a linear system. However, the
time step or the maximum allowable error parameter must be small enough to
ensure an accurate solution.
CHAPTER 7 177
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Type
Description
Nonlinear
Transient
Dynamic
This solution type is used when nonlinear dynamic response is being studied. For
most cases, the automatic incrementation provided is preferred, although direct
user control is also provided for those cases where the user has experience with
a particular problem.
Buckling
Creep
Viscoelastic
(Time Domain)
This is especially provided for the time domain analysis of materials which are
described by the VISCOELASTIC, TIME material forms. The dissipative part
of the material behavior is defined through a Prony series representation of the
normalized shear and bulk relaxation moduli, either specified directly on the
VISCOELASTIC, TIME material forms, determined from user input creep test
data, or determined from user input relaxation test data.
Body Approach
Body Approach enables you to position rigid bodies to just touch deformable
bodies before beginning a subsequent Load Step. No analysis is actually
performed during a Body Approach step.It is used commonly in multi-forming
simulations where bodies are brought just into contact before the analysis begins.
Description
SOL 600, ID
Solution Sequences
SOL Name
Description
101
SESTATIC
Statics
103
SEMODES
Normal Modes
105
SEBUCKL
Buckling
106
NLSTATIC
109
SEDTRAN
129
NLTRAN
There are two ways to set up SOL 600 analysis jobs in MSC.Patran. The first is to
select Implicit Nonlinear as the Solution Type. This option gives you access to most
of the various analysis capabilities and numerical controls available through
SOL 600. The second option uses the same menus as if you were setting up a nonSOL 600 analysis, such as a SOL 106 or 129, but simply changes the executive
command line. To use this second option, simply set up your analysis the same way
you would a non-SOL 600 job and click on the SOL 600 Run toggle on the Solution
Parameters form.
3. Click Subcases... and select an analysis type from the Analysis Type pull-down menu.
References
Solution Types (p. 216 in the MD Patran MD Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1: Structural
Analysis.
CHAPTER 7 179
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Translation Parameters
Translation parameters define file formats, numerical tolerances, processing options, numbering offsets,
and include files.
CHAPTER 7 181
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Data Output
XDB Buffer Size
Tolerances
Sorted Bulk Data Card Format Grid Precision Digits - Specifies where to round off a grid point
coordinate before its written out to the bdf file. For example if
this value is specified as 2 the number 1.3398 will be written
out as 1.34.
Node Coordinates
Number of Tasks
Numbering Options...
References
Translation Parameters (p. 210 in the MD Patran MD Nastran Preference Guide, Volume 1:
Structural Analysis.
Solution Parameters
Solution parameters control a range of functions in the SOL 600 analysis. Functions such as
selecting the solver type, establishing a restart, specifying domain decomposition are all part of the
solution parameters.
Description
INCLUDE
Inserts an external file into the input file. The INCLUDE statement may appear
anywhere within the input data file.
NLPARM
TSTEPNL
Selects integration and output time steps for a nonlinear dynamic analysis.
NLSTRAT
NLAUTO
Note:
*NLSTRAT and NLAUTO defaults are appropriate for most analyses and these entries are
not normally required.
References
Parameter Descriptions (p. 628 in the .
Format of Bulk Data Entries (p. 888 in the .
INCLUDE (p. 84 in the .
CHAPTER 7 183
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Solver Options
Contact Parameters
Restart Parameters
Sets alternate versions of the solver and alternate formats for the
results file.
Domain Decomposition
References
For more information on Solver Options, see Numerical Methods in Solving Equations (p. 60 in
the MSC.Nastran 2005 r3 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) Users Guide.
For more information on Contact parameters, see Contact Parameters Subform (p. 251 in the
CHAPTER 7 185
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Subcases
Creating multiple subcases allows you to efficiently analyze multiple load cases in one run. Each subcase
is a collection of loads and boundary conditions, output requests, and other parameters. For nonlinear
analysis runs the starting point of each subcase is the ending point of the previous subcase.
Specifying Subcases
Each subcase is designated with the following Case Control Command.
Entry
Description
SUBCASE
References
SUBCASE (p. 463 in the .
CHAPTER 7 187
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Subcase Name
Subcase Options
Subcase Parameters
Controls load increment and iteration parameters for the subcase. Also
defines the nonlinear effects for the subcase. See Subcase
Parameters, page 188.
Output Requests
Defines the nodal and element results quantities and also determines
the frequency of results reporting. See Output Requests (Ch. 8).
Select Superelements
Subcase Parameters
The subcase parameters represent the settings in MSC.Nastran Case Control and Bulk Data Section that
take effect within a subcase and do not affect the analysis in other subcases. Subcase parameters are
dependent on the type of analysis being performed. The set of subcase parameters applicable for each
analysis type are described in the following sections. For more information, see Solution Methods and
Strategies in Nonlinear Analysis (Ch. 3) in the MSC.Nastran 2005 r3 Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600)
Users Guide.
Description
NLPARM
NLPCI
NLAUTO
NLSTRAT
Defines strategy parameters for nonlinear structural analysis used in SOL 600.
References
CHAPTER 7 189
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Linearity
Iteration Parameters...
Sets forth the iterative procedures that are employed to solve the
equilibrium problem at each load increment.
Contact Table...
Active/Deactive Elements...
Description
EIGR
EIGRL
References
EIGR (p. 1462 in the .
EIGRL (p. 1466 in the .
Defining Normal Modes Subcase Parameters in MSC.Patran
1. Click the Analysis Application button to bring up Analysis Application form. Click on Solution
Type and check to see that Implicit Nonlinear is the selected Solution Type, then click OK.
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Normal Modes from the Analysis Type
pull-down menu.
CHAPTER 7 191
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Extraction Method
Lancozs Parameters
Number of Modes
Lowest/Highest Frequency
Sequence Checking
Description
METHOD
EIGB
EIGRL
MARCRBAL
References
eig (p. 142 in the .
METHOD (p. 353 in the .
EIGB (p. 1454 in the .
EIGRL (p. 1466 in the .
MARCRBAL (p. 705 in the .
CHAPTER 7 193
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Extraction Method
Lancozs Parameters
Max # of Modes
Max # of Modes
w/Pos. Eigenvalues
Description
TSTEPNL
NLAUTO
NLSTRAT
References
TSTEPNL (p. 489 in the .
NLAUTO (SOLs 400/600) (p. 1983 in the .
NLSTRAT (SOL 600) (p. 2005 in the .
Linearity
Follower Forces
CHAPTER 7 195
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Iteration Parameters...
Contact Table...
Active/Deactive Elements...
Description
NLPARM
MATVP
MARCAUTO
RESTART
References
MATVP (SOL 600) (p. 1613 in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
NLPARM (p. 1991 in the .
MARCAUTO (p. 686 in the .
RESTART (SOLs 600/700) (p. 2330 in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
CHAPTER 7 197
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Follower Forces
Increment Type
Adaptive Increment
Parameters...
Iteration Parameters
Contact Table...
Active/Deactive Elements...
Description
BCMOVE
References
BCMOVE in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Defining Body Approach Subcase Parameters in MSC.Patran
1. Click the Analysis Application button to bring up Analysis Application form. Click on Solution
Type and check to see that Implicit Nonlinear is the selected Solution Type, then click OK.
2. On the Analysis form select Subcases... and choose Body Approach from the Analysis Type
pull-down menu.
Synchronized
If ON, specifies that when the first rigid body comes into contact, the
rest stop moving.
Contact Table...
CHAPTER 7 199
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
When the Action is set to Analyze, the Method is set to Full Run, and the Apply button is selected from
the Analysis form, a jobname.bdf file is created which contains the analysis model, and the
P3TRANS.INI script is spawned by MSC.Patran. This script controls the analysis process outside and
independent of MSC.Patran.
When the analysis is successfully completed, one or more output file is produced. These output files can
be directly imported or attached into the MSC.Patran database for postprocessing by setting the Action
menu to Access Results.
CHAPTER 7 201
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
where input_data_file is the name of the file containing the input data and keywordi=valuei is one or more
optional keyword assignment arguments.
Use the keyword xmonast to monitor a MSC.Nastran job as described below.
xmonast
xmonast={yes|no|kill
Default: No
This example runs the XMONITOR utility while the MSC.Nastran job is running. Once
the job completes, the XMONITOR program is automatically terminated.
For more information, see The nastran Command (p. 2 in the .
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides a status file (jobname.marc.sts) that can be queried
periodically to see how the analysis is progressing and if the job is completed. The file will report the
information relating to the progress of the analysis, with warning and informative messages.
The file review is especially important when manual or automatic time stepping procedures are being
used to step through an analysis procedure. One line is written after each successful increment. An
example file output is shown below.
dip
Figure 7-1
The first column shows the procedural step, while the second column shows the increment number. Note
that not every increment size is equal, as can be seen in the TimeStep of the INC column. For this
example, the third increment size is larger than the first two increments, which means that the procedure
is satisfied that equilibrium is being satisfied and that it has increased the time step size to take advantage
CHAPTER 7 203
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
of the better convergence characteristics. The third column (cycle# of the Inc) indicates the number of
Newton Raphson iterations made during this increment. The next three columns show the increment
information, while the next six columns show the numbers for the total analysis.
Sepa means number of contact separations, cut refers to the number of time step size cutbacks, and split
refers to the number of increment splits due to contact penetration.
If the increment size becomes small, and there are a number of increments of this size, the analysis has
probably stalled, indicating that convergence is becoming very difficult to attain for the problem. A
review of the model is indicated.
The max disp column provides a valuable means to tell if a job is diverging or in some other way not
proceeding correctly.
CHAPTER 7 205
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
Submit job
no
Does .sts
file exist?
no
Do
.f06, .f04,
.log files
exist?
yes
Is
there a Fatal
Error Message
in .f06, .f04,
.log?
yes
yes
fix-it - typical
Nastran debug
ck .sts for
Exit #
Is
Exit
#=3004?
no
yes
Do you
get Nastran
requested
formatted output,
such
as .xdb?
yes
Successful completion
- go on to postprocess
no
no
look in
jobname.marc.out for
Exit # and message.
Is
Exit #=13?
no
Is
Exit #=3002?
yes
yes
Figure 7-2
no
Is
Exit #=2004?
Some convergence
increments exist,
postprocess them & look
for possible causes of
stability loss, such as
contact changes. Ck
m a x , you may be
encountering buckling
modes. Do a buckling
solution to see or try an
arc-length method.
yes
No converged
increments, likely
unconstrained rigid
body motion exists: a.)
do modal to ID them,
b.) Ck equivalencing of
modal integrity, c.) add
constraints or weak
springs, d.) see section
on convergence
problems.
examine the stresses and strains to see if some portion of the structure has failed (if MATF
failure criteria was not included in the modal).
If using Contact set the Contact Tolerance Bias to 0.9, particularly if doing shell contact (done by
For complex models involving multiple forms of nonlinear behavior the tried and true approach
(particularly if you are new to this type of problem) is to start with a linear model and add non-linearities
one at a time. Alternatively, remove the non-linearities one at a time until it runs. This approach helps
you determine which type of non-linearity is causing the convergence problem. If you have contact,
remove it and let the bodies pass through one another or replace the contact condition with an
equivalent displacement constraint. If you have nonlinear materials replace them with simple elastic
CHAPTER 7 207
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
ones. Add the non-linearities back one at a time, making sure the behavior is reasonable and correct.
Look at reaction forces and displacements of any converged increments to make sure they are of the
expected magnitude.
If you run the analysis and it doesnt run at all, or ends before completing, you will get an error message
in the .OUT or .LOG file that will give you an indication of what the problem is. Do a text search on the
word error in the .OUT file. The first thing to check is to make sure you were able to get a license to
run the job. Licensing problems are one of the most common reasons for a run to fail. If you are sure you
have a license and submit the job correctly you should get a .OUT file that will end with an Exit #
preceded by a description of why the run stopped. Common Exit #s are: Exit 3004 means success, i.e.
the job ran to completion and did everything you asked it to. Exit 13 means you have a syntax error in
the input file. You should check the input syntax of the line the error message points to, but it is likely
that the actual error was in the input block PRIOR to where the message points. Exit 2004 typically
means non-convergence due to rigid body motions. See recommendations for Equilibrium. Exit 3002
this means the analysis ran into convergence problems part way through and did not complete. Any Exit
Message of 3000 or higher means there are converged increments. Plot the converged increments to see
what is going on. See Technical Application Note 4575 or Appendix A of Volume C: Program Input for
a more complete list with suggested fixes.
Things to consider if your model doesnt converge:
1. Equilibrium - Make sure your model has LBCs and contact conditions that will ensure force
equilibrium at EVERY increment/iteration and for ALL rigid-body modes (typically there are 6).
When in doubt eliminate this as the source of non-convergence by intentionally over-constraining
the model (or adding soft springs) and then removing constraints one at a time until you figure
out the unconstrained rigid body mode. One area that is sometimes overlooked regarding
equilibrium is that of the rigid body control. If you dont specify adequate control information
(e.g. you forget to add the zero that fixes the rigid body rotation value) you may have
convergence problems.
2. LBCs - When LBCs are removed, the forces/pressures (and the reaction forces due to
displacement constraints) are removed gradually over the subsequent step. The forces and
pressures are always removed gradually, but the reaction forces of displacement constraints may
be are removed suddenly at the beginning of the subsequent step. This sudden change in loading
can cause convergence problems.
3. Stability and Collapse - Non-convergence will occur when a structural instability (i.e., buckling)
mode is encountered. Buckling can occur either locally (in highly stressed area where the stability
of individual elements is exceeded) or globally when the critical buckling load of any part of the
model is exceeded. You may want to do a linear buckling analysis to determine the load that
would buckle the least-stable part of the structure. If you suspect that you are approaching the
post-buckled region here are some other things to try: a) try using Quasi-static inertial damping
(turn this on under Analysis Step Create Solution Parameters) or one of the Arc-length
methods. This will help get through the unstable region if doing a snap-through buckling
problem, and may help get you past one or two elements of local buckling, but probably not more
than that.) try a finer mesh (smaller elements have shorter length and so higher Pcr);
4. Materials - Make sure that the material coefficient values are realistic and that the models will
support the stresses and loads developed in the model. For example if you hang a 1000 lb. weight
from a perfectly plastic wire with a 0.001 in**2 cross section and a 20 ksi yield stress, the
resulting 100 ksi stress cannot be supported by the (20 ksi yield stress) material and the run will
not converge. Comparable behavior in bending is referred to as a plastic hinge. Units mismatches will often result in this type of problem (note that this only occurs in non-linear analyses).
For example, lets say you are modeling a cantilever beam and using a perfectly plastic material
model and a follower force tip load, and you mistakenly add an extra zero to the tip load. A
plastic hinge will develop with the beam winding up like a spring and the analysis continuing
to run until it runs out of increments (which may take a long time). If you suspect this type of
problem first run the problem with a small fraction of the load to see if it will converge. If you are
using an orthotropic or hyperelastic material it is possible to select combinations of material
properties that will result in a non-positive definite material coefficient matrix. Normally the
analysis code will warn you if you violate this requirement.
5. Contact - If there is a problem with chattering (a condition where a particular node jumps into
and out of contact thus preventing the increment from converging), you can go to Translation
Parameters Contact Control Parameters Separation and set the Chattering toggle to
Suppress. The parameters which have the biggest effect on contact behavior are Contact
Distance Tolerance, D (see Fig. 1), Bias Factor, B (see Fig. 2) -) and Separation Force. The
default uses D = 1/20 the of the element edge length. You can find the specific value in the.OUT
file and try a larger or smaller value, whichever you feel is most appropriate. The default on the
bias value is 0, if having problems with contact one of the first things to try is to over-ride this
value on the Analysis Translation Parameters Contact Detection Contact Parameters form
with 0.9. Another option would be to increase the separation force (which defaults to 0) to prevent
chattering. When considering contact problems look for places (such as corners and other
discontinuities) where one contact surface may slip off.
Standard Steps to Resolving Convergence Problems:
If your model doesnt run, or stops pre-maturely: FIRST, READ THE MESSAGES IN The .sts, .f06, .log
and .out files. Common causes of the run to fail include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
After trying the obvious things, talk to other experienced users about possible reasons your run isnt
working. In one case, a user was using the standard element formulation with = 0.5 and hex/21
elements and his model would not converge even though there were no obvious problems. For this case,
using the constant volume formulation should provide a unique solution and allow convergence, unless
= 0.5 causes numerical problems. In that case you should use the Herrmann elements which should
take care of the numerical problems as well as the non-unique solution problem. If these options dont
work, you could try using reduced integration, which may solve both problems at once, but may
CHAPTER 7 209
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
have problems with energy-free or "spurious" deformation modes (also called "hour-glassing"),
although the analysis has built-in hour glass stabilization. Also, try quasi-static inertial damping or an
arc-length methods.
Here are some other things to try:
a. try a finer mesh;
b. modify the material model: if its simple elastic-perfectly plastic with large plastic strains try
using constant volume Herrmann elements, if using a hyper-elastic material model try
lowering Nu from 0.5 to maybe 0.49 or so (or lower if you have to); make sure its based on
test data that includes the type of behavior you are trying to model (i.e. if your test data is from
a uni-axial tensile test and you are modeling a pressurized cylinder, which is a bi-axial stress
state, try analyzing a simple bi-axial sheet to see if your hyper-elastic material model will
successfully handle bi-axial stress states; if not you may have to include some bi-axial test
data (hyper-elastic models based on test data should include at least 2 "modes," although the
program has a new Arruda-Boyce model which often yields better results with limited
experimental data);
c. simplify - if the model you are running is a 3D cylinder made of solid elements, run a 2D axisymmetric test case to check out the mesh refinement and material model. If not in the postbuckled region try: 1) look at deformed shape to see if it looks reasonable. Remember that
static equilibrium must be maintained at every step; 2) check reaction forces to see if the load
path is reasonable; 3) look for highly distorted elements, both visually and in the .out file - if
you find any you may need to go back and refine your mesh in that area to keep those elements
well-behaved, i.e. converging, or use adaptive re-meshing. Although distorted elements will
normally just give you bad results but not necessarily prevent convergence. Typically linear
elements (i.e. quad/4 instead of quad/8) do better in analyses where severe distortion is
expected. 4) if using contact elements you may be able to ease convergence problems by
simplifying the contact interaction: a) look at the .sts file for the # of increment splits and # of
separations to see if contact is the problem; b) set bias to 0.9, increase (or decrease) the contact
tolerance distance, suppress chattering; c) modify the contact table to eliminate suspected
trouble areas (at least as a diagnostic measure); d) look for areas where contact bodies may be
sliding off. 5) PAY ATTENTION TO THE MESSAGES IN THE .STS, .LOG, .f06 AND
.OUT FILES, they may tell you why the model was not translated or convergence was not
reached and the analysis terminated. 6) if non-convergence relates to inelastic behavior of the
material, such as in a plasticity analysis, make sure there are no "plastic hinges" formed,
where static equilibrium cannot be achieved because the material is not strong enough, in this
case all the iterations go to deforming the body around the plastic region and static
equilibrium may never be reached. 7) when doing a hyperelastic material analysis the material
model may be unpredictable since the coefficients are generally quite unintuitive. The run
may not converge simply because the material model, while it may look reasonable, may
actually be inherently unstable (things like negative energy behavior, etc.) 8) make sure you
aren't stuck at a stability bifurcation point, (i.e. at a buckling mode), what may be happening
is that there are 2 valid (post-buckling in this case) equilibrium paths and the code flips back
and forth between them preventing convergence; the way to get past this is to make the
problem dynamic and use the inertia of the body to "select" the appropriate equilibrium path.
Again, the tried and true method is to start with a linear model and add non-linearities one at a time, or
remove nonlinearities.
Consider changing the Contact Distance Tolerance. If you run into contact-related convergence problems
this is one of the first things to try.
CHAPTER 7 211
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
3. Exit 1005, Exit 1009: If this exit message (exit 1005) comes as soon as the job is submitted i.e.
at the first assembly of the first iteration, it indicates a meshing problem. Re-check mesh and remesh. In most cases, this error message(s) comes after an analysis has started. Both exit numbers
1005 & 1009 indicate excessive element deformation during a particular load increment, in a
particular iteration. The way to get around this error is to reduce step size. However SOL 600 does
that automatically and if the problem still persists it gives exit 3015/3009. See explanations
below on exit 3015/3009.
4. Exit 3002: This message indicates that SOL 600 has reached the user-specified upper limit on
the number of (Newton-Raphson) iterations within a load increment. The default is set to 25.
SOL 600 keeps iterating 25 times, and tries to converge to a solution for that increment. If that
does not happen, SOL 600 will cut back the load (by half) and re-solve that increment.
Sometimes this is not enough to get convergence, and it will exit with 3002. One way to get
around this exit message is to increase the # of iterations, but that may not be the best way, since
25 is a high number to begin with. Treat this exit message the same way you would treat exit
3015/3009 i.e. look at the model to see what is causing it to not converge (i.e. what is causing it
difficulty at that stage of the analysis) and make changes accordingly. If this exit message
shows up in the first increment of the run, it could happen if the residual loads are very
low in the model to begin with. Check the output file to confirm this. Switching from relative
to absolute criterion will help, as might switching from load to displacement-based criteria.
5. Exit 3015, Exit 3009:
Exit 3009: This exit number indicates that SOL 600 cuts back to a the time-step size too small
for the analysis to continue. The load stepping algorithm has a cut-back feature where the loadstep is automatically reduced (halved) if SOL 600 runs into certain problems (exit 3002, or exit
1005). When an increment runs into these exit numbers, it will automatically cut the load-step
and re-solve that increment. If the problem continues to persist, it will cut back the load-step
again. This happens until the limit of the number of cut-backs is reached. This can result in a very
small time-step. In such a case, SOL 600 stops the analysis with an exit 3009. To fix this situation,
the user has to look at the results up to the point of failure to understand why SOL 600 cuts back
repeatedly at this stage of the analysis. An understanding of the physics of the model and/or
run-time issues at this stage of the analysis is important here. The user has to make a
determination and modify the model.
Exit 3015: SOL 600s automatic load-stepping scheme is set up such that the applied load in an
increment scales up (or down) depending on how easy (or difficult) the solution was in the
previous increment. The degree of difficulty is determined based on the parameter: desired
number of recycles (default = 3). SOL 600 will scale down the step size until it reaches a lower
limit on the step size (default = 0.001% of total time step) and then exit with # 3015. This is an
indication to the user that the analysis encountered some difficulty at that stage. As before, the
user has to view the results of the run up to that point and make a determination, based on the
physics of the run, as to why the analysis has problems. For more information on SOL 600s
Automatic load-stepping procedure, please see Chapter 11 of Volume A: Considerations for
Non-linear Analysis, section: Automatic load-stepping.
CHAPTER 7 213
Setting Up, Monitoring, and Debugging the Analysis
6. Linear problems have a unique solution, but that is not always true of non-linear problems.
Solutions to non-linear problems can also be quite sensitive to initial and boundary conditions.
Small changes in BCs/Is can sometimes change the solution quite a bit. When tackling nonlinear
problems, the user should take these into consideration.
Description
The OUTPUT2 file was not found. Check the OUTPUT2 file
specification in the translation control file.
Needed file specification missing! The MSC.Patran control file must be specified as the first onThe full name of the job file must be line argument to the translator.
specified as the first command-line
argument to this program.
Unable to open the specified
database " ". Writing the
OUTPUT2 information to the PCL
command file " ".
Message
Description
The OUTPUT2 DMAP alter file, for this type of analysis, could
not be found. Correct the search path to include the necessary
directory if you want the alter files to be written to the input file.
Overview
Output Requests
216
218
226
231
Overview
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) produces stress and strain results that may differ from those
results available with SOL 106 and 129.
At present, new datablock definitions have not been created in MSC.Nastran to handle new types of
nonlinear output. Therefore, it is suggested that the MSC.Marc t16 or t19 file be used to evaluate results.
The result quantities included in the t16/t19 files are controlled using the MARCOUT Bulk Data entry.
For a complete description, see MARCOUT (SOL 600) (p. 1609) in the . MSC.Patran can be used to
postprocess nearly all types of output selected by the MARCOUT entry. In general, if the t16 file is saved
and brought into MSC.Patran, the types of stresses and strains will be labeled correctly and you can easily
choose which quantities to plot.
The more basic types of output (displacements, velocities, accelerations, Cauchy stress tensor and one
type of strain tensor) can be translated back to standard MSC.Nastran op2, xdb, punch and even f06 files
using the OUTR option on the SOL 600 Executive Control statement. For a complete description, see
SOL 600,ID (p. 138) in the . If the stresses and strains are brought back into the MSC.Nastran files (op2,
xdb, f06 or pch), only one type of stress and strain may be placed on the OP2 file. Generally the Cauchy
Stress tensor will be available along with a user selection of one of the following strains: plastic, total or
elastic in the strain measure selected for the analysis. The type of stress-strain pair brought back into the
Nastran results files is specified using PARAM, MARCEKND.
Input
SOL 600 Statement Default
If SOL 600 with nothing else on the line is entered, the statement will act the same as if the following
statement was used:
SOL 600,NLSTATIC OUTR=OP2
.OP2 Data
Outputs in the OP2 file (as well as f06, xdb and punch) have been enhanced in the following areas:
MPC forces are available
SPC forces are available
3-D contact results are available
Displacement, velocity, acceleration results are available
Cauchy Stress and one type of strain (total, plastic or elastic) are available
Beam loads are available
Output in the MSC.Nastran files is controlled the same way as in other MSC.Nastran
solution sequences
Set definitions may be used to limit output for any of the above items
Grid force
CHAPTER 8 217
Output from the Analysis
You must include Case Control requests such as DISP(PLOT)=ALL in order to obtain output in op2, xdb,
punch or f06 files. In addition, OUTR requests on the SOL 600 entry must be made (for example
OUTR=OP2,F06). The applicable Case Control requests for SOL 600 are DISP, STRESS, STRAIN,
SPCFORCE, MPCFORCE, and BOUTPUT. BOUTPUT maps 3D contact to the older 2D Slideline
Contact datablock (see item codes for contact in section 6 of the 2005 Quick Reference Guide).
The output interval for the t16 file (and thus the OP2 file) is controlled by either the NLPARAM Bulk
Data entry or the MARCOTIM entry.
Results Translation
The speed of the t16op2 results translator was increased in 2005 r3 by a factor of 4 or more for large
models. The speed increase is triggered using PARAM,MSPEEDOU,1, which is the default.
MSC.Nastran-to-MSC.Marc translation speed has increased for beam and shell type elements (in
addition to the previous speed enhancements for solid elements) by using PARAM,MSPEEDSE,1 (or 2).
The speed increase varies from model to model but can be as great as a factor of 4-10 for some models.
Output Requests
Output requests are made in the Case Control section of the MSC.Nastran Input file. Case Control
commands are organized into three categories:
1. Output Control - defines how and where the output is delivered.
2. Sets/Grouping of Output - prescribes the set of geometrical or FEM entities for which results are
to be returned.
3. Actual Result Quantities - identifies the individual result quantities to be returned.
CHAPTER 8 219
Output from the Analysis
Writing Results
Although printed output requests can be different from Subcase to Subcase, there are certain aspects of
these requests that can only be written once. For those aspects of output requests that must remain
constant regardless of the Load Step, that information is extracted from the first Subcase in the Subcase
Selection form.
Lists all of the available result types for the analysis. The numbers
in parentheses are the MSC.Marc POST code numbers.
Shows the set of result types that have been selected to be returned
in the analysis.
CHAPTER 8 221
Output from the Analysis
The following table shows the post codes that may be selected for a SOL 600 structural
nonlinear analysis.
Nodal Result
Postcode
Default(?)
DISPLACEMENT
YES
ROTATION
YES
EXTERNAL FORCE
no
EXTERNAL MOMENT
no
REACTION FORCE
YES
REACTION MOMENT
no
PORE PRESSURE
23
no
VELOCITY
28
no
ROTATIONAL VELOCITY
29
no
ACCELERATION
30
no
ROTATIONAL ACCELERATION
31
no
MODAL MASS
32
no
33
no
34
no
35
YES
FRICTION STRESS
36
no
FRICTION FORCE
37
YES
CONTACT STATUS
38
no
39
YES
HERRMANN VARIABLE
40
no
no
no
-31
no
-41
no
-51
no
Note:
The POST CODE (<0) are for user-defined quantities via user subroutine UPSTNO.
CHAPTER 8 223
Output from the Analysis
Lists all of the available result types for the analysis. The numbers
in parentheses are the MSC.Marc POST code numbers.
Shows the set of result types that have been selected to be returned
in the analysis.
Defines the number of layer points to use through the cross section
of homogeneous shells, plates and beams. This number must be odd
if not a composite.
Note:
If no elemental results are selected and no nodal results are selected, no POST option
is written.
The following table shows the post codes that may be selected for a SOL 600 structural
nonlinear analysis.
Elemental Result
Postcode
Solutions
Default(?)
301
nonlinear only
YES
461
nonlinear only
no
401
any
YES
421
any
no
127
any
no
321
nonlinear only
YES
431
nonlinear only
no
27
nonlinear only
YES
nonlinear only
YES
331
creep only
no
441
creep only
no
37
creep only
no
creep only
no
371
any
no
49
any
no
STRAIN, THERMAL
STRAIN, THICKNESS
Elemental Result
Postcode
Solutions
Default(?)
STRAIN, VELOCITY
451
nonlinear only
no
STRESS, COMPONENTS
311
any
no
STRESS, COMPONENTS
(defined system)
391
an
no
STRESS, COMPONENTS
(global system)
411
any
no
59
nonlinear only
no
17
any
YES
18
any
YES
108
any
no
109
any
no
501,511
any
no
341
nonlinear only
no
47
nonlinear only
YES
351 (real)
361(imag)
harmonic only
no
264-269
any
no
270
any
no
nonlinear only
no
175
any
no
29
any
no
39
any
no
any
no
TEMPERATURE, ELEMENT
INCREMENTAL
10
any
no
48
nonlinear only
YES
58
any
no
68
nonlinear only
no
THICKNESS, ELEMENT
20
any
no
VOLUME, ELEMENT
78
any
no
177
any
no
STRESS, INTERLAMINAR
COMPONENTS
STRESS, CAUCHY COMPONENTS
STRESS, CAUCHY EQUIVALENT
STRESS, HARMONIC
COMPONENTS
FORCES, ELEMENT
BIMOMENT
STRAIN RATE, PLASTIC
STRAIN RATE, EQUIVALENT
VISCOPLASTIC
28
CHAPTER 8 225
Output from the Analysis
Elemental Result
Postcode
Solutions
Default(?)
91-103
any
no
19
any
no
38
any
no
any
no
any
no
-31
any
no
-41
any
no
-51
any
no
Secondary
Label
Type
Postcodes
Description
Displacement
Translation
Vector
1 (nodal)
Displacement
Rotation
Vector
2 (nodal)
Velocity
Translation
Vector
28 (nodal)
Velocity
Rotation
Vector
29 (nodal)
Acceleration
Translation
Vector
30 (nodal)
Acceleration
Rotation
Vector
31 (nodal)
Force
Nodal External
Applied
Vector
3 (nodal)
Force
Nodal Reaction
Vector
5 (nodal)
Moment
Nodal External
Applied
Vector
4 (nodal)
Moment
Nodal Reaction
Vector
6 (nodal)
Modal Mass
Translation
Vector
32 (nodal)
Modal Mass
Rotation
Vector
33 (nodal)
Stress
Contact Normal
Vector
34 (nodal)
Force
Contact Normal
Vector
35 (nodal)
Stress
Friction
Vector
36 (nodal)
Friction Stress
CHAPTER 8 227
Output from the Analysis
Primary
Label
Secondary
Label
Type
Postcodes
Description
Force
Friction
Vector
37 (nodal)
Friction Force
Contact
Status
Scalar
38 (nodal)
Contact Status
Contact
Touched Body
Scalar
39 (nodal)
Variable
Herrmann
Scalar
40 (nodal)
Herrmann Variable
Post Code
Post Code
Post Code
No. -31
Scalar
-31, (nodal)
Post Code
No. -41
Scalar
-41, (nodal)
Post Code
No. -51
Scalar
-51, (nodal)
Strain
Creep
Tensor
31-36 or 331
Strain
Plastic
Equivalent Rate
Scalar
28
Strain
Thermal
Tensor
71-76 or 371
Strain
Thickness
Scalar
49
Strain
Total
Tensor
1-6 or 301
Temperature
Element
Scalar
Temperature
181-183
Temperature
Element
Incremental
Scalar
10
Tensor
11-16 or 311
Tensor
41-46 or 341
Stress
Stress
Cauchy
Stress
Cauchy
Scalar
Equivalent Mises
47
Stress
17
Primary
Label
Secondary
Label
Type
Postcodes
Description
Stress
Hydrostatic
Scalar
18
Stress
Interlaminar
Shear No. 1
Scalar
108
Stress
Interlaminar
Shear No. 2
Scalar
109
Energy
Density
Elastic
Scalar
48
Energy
Density
Plastic
Scalar
58
Energy
Density
Total
Scalar
68
Flux
Element
Vector
184-186
State Variable
Second
Scalar
29
State Variable
Third
Scalar
39
Failure
Index No. 1
Scalar
91
Failure
Index No. 2
Scalar
92
Failure
Index No. 3
Scalar
93
Failure
Index No. 4
Scalar
94
Failure
Index No. 5
Scalar
95
Failure
Index No. 6
Scalar
96
Failure
Index No. 7
Scalar
97
Thickness
Scalar
20
Volume
Scalar
78
CHAPTER 8 229
Output from the Analysis
In addition to these standard results quantities, several Global Variable results can be created. Global
Variables are results quantities where one value is representative of the entire model. The following
table defines the Global Variables which may be created.
Global Variable Label
Type
Description
Increment
Scalar
Time
Scalar
Buckling Mode
Scalar
Scalar
Dynamic Mode
Scalar
Frequency (radians/time)
Scalar
After selecting a t16 or t19 file, you will need to specify the translation parameters.
CHAPTER 8 231
Output from the Analysis
Description
OUTR
References
SOL 600,ID (p. 138) in the .
After selecting an XDB or op2 file, you will need to specify the translation parameters.
CHAPTER 8 233
Output from the Analysis
Tolerances
Division
Numerical
Stress/Strain Invariants
Principal Directions
Assigned Conditions
Constraints
Initial Conditions
236
265
248
Constraints
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allows you to input kinematic constraints through various options that
include:
Boundary Conditions (prescribed nodal values)
Multi-Point Constraints (Rigid elements such as RBE1, RBE2, RBE3, RBAR, etc.)
Support Conditions
Boundary Conditions
Boundary conditions, in terms of fixed displacements at nodes, define one type of kinematic constraint
for a structural analysis. Loads and boundary conditions are addressed in the following section of this
chapter, please see (p. 248).
Multi-Point Constraints
MPCs are special element types which define a rigorous behavior between several specified nodes. The
following table lists the MPC types which are supported for MSC. Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
MPC Types
Explicit
Rigid (Fixed)
Cyclic Symmetry
Sliding Surface
RBAR
RBE1
RBE2
RBE3
RROD
RTRPLT
Description
MPC
References
MPC (p. 1963) in the .
Defining Explicit MPCs in MSC.Patran
To define an Explicit MPC:
1. Click on the FE Application icon located on the Main form to bring up the Finite Elements
Application form.
CHAPTER 9 237
Assigned Conditions
Entry
Description
Dependent Terms
Dependent terms define the fields for G1 and C1 on the MPC entry. Only one
node and DOF combination may be defined for any given explicit MPC. The
A1 field on the MPC entry is automatically set to -1.0.
Independent Terms
Independent terms define the Gi, Ci, and Ai fields on the MPC entry, where i
is greater than one. As many coefficient, node, and DOF combinations as
desired may be defined.
Description
RBE2
References
RBE2 (p. 2286) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
CHAPTER 9 239
Assigned Conditions
Entry
Description
Dependent Terms
Dependent terms define the GMi fields on the RBE2 entry. As many nodes as
desired may be selected as dependent terms.
Independent Terms
Independent terms define the GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may
be selected.
Entry
Description
Shell Nodes
Dependent terms define the ESi fields on the RSSCON entry. One dependent
node must be selected for every two independent terms.
Solid Nodes
ndependent terms define the EA and EB field on the RSSCON entry. Two
independent terms are required.
Description
MPC
References
MPC (p. 1963) in the .
Defining Sliding Surface MPCs in MSC.Patran
To define a Sliding Surface MPC:
1. Click on the FE Application icon located on the Main form to bring up the Finite Elements
Application form.
2. Set the Action>Object>Method combination to Create> MPC>Sliding Surface.
Entry
Description
Dependent Region
Specifies the dependent nodes on the sliding surface. The same number of
unique nodes must be specified in both regions.
Independent Region
Specifies the independent nodes on the sliding surface. The same number of
unique nodes must be specified in both regions.
Description
RBAR
References
RBAR (p. 2280) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
CHAPTER 9 241
Assigned Conditions
Entry
Description
Dependent Terms
Either one or two nodes may be defined as having dependent terms. The Nodes
define the GA and GB fields on the RBAR entry. The DOFs define the CMA
and CMB fields.
Independent Terms
Description
RBE2
Defines a rigid body with independent degrees of freedom that are specified at
a single grid point and with dependent degrees of freedom that are specified at
an arbitrary number of grid points.
References
RBE2 (p. 2286) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
CHAPTER 9 243
Assigned Conditions
Entry
Description
Dependent Terms
Dependent terms define the GMi and CM fields on the RBE2 entry. As many
nodes as desired may be selected as dependent terms.
Independent Terms
Independent terms define the GN field on the RBE2 entry. Only one node may
be selected.
Description
RBE3
Defines the motion at a reference grid point as the weighted average of the
motions at a set of other grid points.
References
RBE3 (p. 2299) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Entry
Description
Dependent Terms
Dependent terms define the GMi and CMi fields on the RBE3 entry. The first
dependent term will be treated as the reference node, REFGRID and REFC.
The rest of the dependent terms become the GMi and CMi components.
Independent Terms
Independent terms define the Gi, j, Ci, and WTi fields on the RBE3 entry.
Description
RROD
CHAPTER 9 245
Assigned Conditions
References
RROD (p. 2352) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Entry
Description
Dependent Terms
Dependent terms define the GB and CMB on the RROD entry. Only one
translational degree of freedom may be referenced for this entry.
Independent Terms
Independent terms define the GA field on the RROD entry. The CMA field is
left blank.
can be specified as independent as long as the total number of independent degrees of freedom adds up
to six. There is no constant term for this MPC type.
Entry
Description
RTRPLT
References
RTRPLT (p. 2366) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
CHAPTER 9 247
Assigned Conditions
Entry
Description
Dependent Terms
Dependent terms define the GA, GB, GC, CMA, CMB, and CMC fields of the
RTRPLT entry.
Independent Terms
The total number of nodes referenced in both the dependent terms and the
independent terms must equal three. There must be exactly six independent
degrees of freedom, and they must be capable of describing rigid body motion.
Defines the GA, GB, GC, CNA, CNB, and CNC fields of the RTRPLT entry.
Support Conditions
In static analysis by the displacement method, the rigid body modes must be restrained in order to
remove the singularity of the stiffness matrix. The required constraints may be supplied with single point
constraints, multipoint constraints, or free body supports. If free body supports are used, the rigid body
characteristics will be calculated and a check will be made on the sufficiency of the supports.
Free-body supports are defined with a SUPORT6 or SUPORT1 entry. Free-body supports must be
defined in the global coordinate system. The SUPORT6 entry must be selected by the SUPORT1 Case
Control command.
For more information on Support Conditions, see Rigid Body Supports (p. 357) in the .
CHAPTER 9 249
Assigned Conditions
The following types of loads are available for MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Table 9-1
FORCEi
LSEQ
MOMENTi
NOLINi
PLOAD
PLOAD2
Defines pressure loads on shell elements, CQUAD4 and CTRIA3. Not available for
hyperelastic elements.
PLOAD4
PLOADX1
RFORCE
TIC
TLOADi
References
FORCE (p. 1494) in the .
LSEQ (p. 1603) in the .
MOMENT (p. 1949) in the .
NOLIN1 (p. 2014) in the .
PLOAD (p. 2186) in the .
RFORCE (p. 2336) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
TIC (p. 2519) in the .
TLOAD1 (p. 2532) in the .
The Loads and Boundary Conditions application in MSC.Patran provides the ability to apply a variety of
static and dynamic loads and boundary conditions including contact surfaces to finite element models.
Loads/BCs may be associated with geometric entities as well as FEM entities. When associated with
geometric entities, they can be transferred to finite elements created on the geometry. Loads and
boundary conditions are intended to be created in multiple single purpose groups referred to as load sets.
These sets are grouped into load cases in the Load Cases application.
One of the most elegant features in MSC.Patran is its ability to create fields that describes the variation
of loads and boundary conditions. The way in which Loads and BCs vary may be defined spatially, by
previous analysis results, based on time, or associated with material properties.
Sets can be visually displayed on the screen by markers which show the location, type, magnitude, and
direction of the applied loads or boundary condition. Only the static portion of a dynamic Loads/BCs set
is reflected in the marker display. Sets can also be displayed as tables.
A powerful capability is the display of any set scalar data directly on the model as a fringe plot. For
display purposes, data are treated as results, with full user control over the spectrum, method, shading,
etc. Data display is scalar, but the data can be pressures, vector component magnitudes, and vector
resultant magnitudes. Fringe plots can only be displayed on finite elements. Fringes of a dynamic
Loads/BCs set may be displayed at user-specified times.
Creating Load Cases
The Load Cases application enables you to combine a large number of individual loads and boundary
condition (LBCs) sets into a single coherent case for application to the model. Each load case you create
has a unique user-selected descriptive name as well as an associated descriptive statement. Load case
information is permanently stored in the database (unless deleted). You can modify it at any time
.
Even if you do not create any load cases, your load and boundary conditions will still be placed into a
default current load case, named default. If you create a special load case and make it the current load
case, then all subsequent LBCs will be placed in that load case as long as it is current.
Static Load Cases
Load cases in which none of the constituent loads or boundary conditions sets has a time varying
component are called static load cases. Loads and boundary conditions that will make up a static load
CHAPTER 9 251
Assigned Conditions
case are generated using the Input Data subform. For static load cases, this subform will vary according
to the type of load being created, but its general format remains constant.
For more information, see Overview of the Loads and Boundary Conditions Application (p. 6) in the MSC
Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional Assignments.
CHAPTER 9 253
Assigned Conditions
Displacement LBCs
Boundary conditions can be used to specify the value of the displacements at nodes. To create a boundary
condition for displacement, you need to specify the node number, the degree of freedom(s), and the
magnitude of the displacement.
Displacements can be imposed directly on nodes using SPC1 and SPCD Bulk Data entries. All non blank
entries will cause an SPC1 entry to be created. If the specified value is not 0.0, an SCPD entry will also
be created to define the non zero enforced displacement or rotation.
References
SPC1 (p. 2429) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
SPCD (p. 2432) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Zero or nonzero displacements can also be applied across elements in a uniform or variable fashion. The
primary use of this boundary condition is to apply constraints to solid elements.
MSC.Patran LBC Application Input Data
Displacement boundary conditions are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type
combinations on the LBC Application form.
Object
Type
Displacement
Nodal
Element Uniform
Dimension
2-D/3-D
SPC1, SPCD
Element Variable
Entry
Description
Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the enforced translational displacement values. These are in model
length units.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3)
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
Force LBCs
Concentrated forces and moments can be applied directly to nodes with the ability to define the direction
as well as the magnitude.
Forces and moments are specified with FORCEi and MOMENTi Bulk Data entries, where:
Entry
Description
FORCE
MOMENT
FORCE1
MOMENT1
FORCE2
MOMENT2
References
Type
Force
Nodal
Dimension
Entry
Description
Force (F1,F2,F3)
Moment (M1,M2,M3)
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
CHAPTER 9 255
Assigned Conditions
Pressure LBCs
Pressure loads can be applied to edges or surfaces of 2-D and 3-D elements. Several Bulk Data entries
are used to apply pressure loading depending on the element topology.
Entry
Description
PLOAD
PLOAD2
PLOAD4
PLOADX1
These pressures are applied to 2-D and 3-D elements only. Pressures for 1-D elements are applied using
the Total Load LBCs, 263 object.
References
Type
Dimension
Pressure
Element Uniform
2-D
Entry
Description
Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry.
The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. These values
are all equal for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across
that face.
Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4
entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values.These values are all equal
for a given element, producing a uniform pressure field across that face.
Entry
Description
Edge Pressure
Type
Dimension
Pressure
Element Uniform
3-D
PLOAD4
Entry
Description
Pressure
Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This
defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be
evaluated once at the center of the applied region.
Type
Dimension
Pressure
Element Variable
2-D
Entry
Description
Defines the top surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4 entry.
The negative of this value defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field
is referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values.
Defines the bottom surface pressure load on shell elements using a PLOAD4
entry. This value defines the P1 through P4 values. If a scalar field is
referenced, it will be evaluated separately for the P1 through P4 values.
Edge Pressure
CHAPTER 9 257
Assigned Conditions
Type
Dimension
Pressure
Element Variable
3-D
PLOAD4
Entry
Description
Pressure
Defines the face pressure value on solid elements using a PLOAD4 entry. This
defines the P1, P2, P3, and P4 values. If a scalar field is referenced, it will be
evaluated separately for each of the P1 through P4 values.
Note:
In the current version of SOL 600, a constant pressure is applied on the element face based
on the average of P1, P2, P3, and P4.
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
Temperature LBCs
Temperatures can be defined directly at nodes or temperature fields can be defined across
element surfaces.
Temperatures are specified with TEMP, TEMPPi, or TEMPRB Bulk Data entries, where:
Entry
Description
TEMP
TEMPPi
TEMPRB
References
TEMP (p. 2500) in the .
TEMPP1 (p. 2510) in the .
TEMPRB (p. 2513) in the .
Type
Dimension
Temperature
Nodal
0D
TEMP
Entry
Description
Temperature
Type
Dimension
Temperature
Element Uniform
1-D
TEMPRB
Entry
Description
Temperature
Type
Dimension
Temperature
Element Uniform
2-D
TEMPP1
Entry
Description
Temperature
Type
Dimension
Temperature
Element Variable
1-D
TEMPRB
Entry
Description
Centroid Temp
Axis-1 Gradient
Axis-2 Gradient
Type
Dimension
Temperature
Element Variable
2-D
TEMPP1
CHAPTER 9 259
Assigned Conditions
Entry
Description
Defines the temperature on the top surface of a shell element. The top and
bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the
TEMPP1 entry.
Defines the temperature on the bottom surface of a shell element. The top and
bottom values are used to compute the average and gradient values on the
TEMPP1 entry.
Type
Dimension
Temperature
Element Uniform
3-D
TEMP
Element Variable
Entry
Description
Temperature
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments
Description
GRAV
RFORCE
References
GRAV (p. 1561) in the .
RFORCE (p. 2336) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Type
Dimension
Inertial Load
Element Uniform
Entire Model
GRAV or RFORCE
Entry
Description
Defines the N vector and the G magnitude value on the GRAV entry.
Rot Velocity (w1,w2,w3) Defines the R vector and the A magnitude value on the RFORCE entry.
The acceleration and velocity vectors are defined with respect to the input analysis coordinate frame. The
origin of the rotational vectors is the origin of the analysis coordinate frame. In generating the GRAV and
RFORCE entries, the interface produces one GRAV and/or RFORCE entry image for each MSC.Patran
load set.
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
Velocity LBCs
Velocities can be defined for transient analysis using the TLOAD entry.
:
Entry
Description
TLOAD
References
TLOAD1 (p. 2532) in the .
Type
Velocity
Nodal
Dimension
Entry
Description
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
CHAPTER 9 261
Assigned Conditions
Acceleration LBCs
Accelerations can be defined for transient response analysis using the TLOAD entry.
:
Entry
Description
TLOAD
References
TLOAD1 (p. 2532) in the .
Type
Acceleration
Nodal
Dimension
Entry
Description
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
Description
PLOAD
PLOAD1
Entry
Description
PLOAD2
PLOAD4
PLOADX1
References
Type
Dimension
Distributed Load
Element Uniform
1-D
PLOAD1
Element Variable
Entry
Description
Distributed Moment (m1,m2,m3) Defines the MXE, MYE, and MZE fields on three
PLOAD1 entries.
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a
linear load variation.
2. Uniform and Variable Loads on 2-D Elements
CHAPTER 9 263
Assigned Conditions
Defines a distributed force or moment load along the edges of 2-D elements. The coordinate
system for the load is defined by the surface or element edge and normal. The x direction is along
the edge. Positive x is determined by the element corner node connectivity. See The Patran
Element Library (p. 343) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 3: Finite Element Modeling.
For example, if the element is a CQUAD4, with node connectivity of 1, 2, 3, 4. The positive x
directions for each edge would be from nodes 1 to 2, 2 to 3, 3 to 4, and 4 to 1. The z direction
is normal to the surface or element. Positive z is in the direction of the element normal. The y
direction is normal to x and z. Positive y is determined by the cross product of the z and x axes and
always points into the element. The MSC.Nastran entries generated, depend on the element type.
Object
Type
Dimension
Distributed Load
Element Uniform
2-D
Element Variable
Entry
Description
For the element variable type, a field reference is evaluated at each end of the beam to define a
linear load variation.
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
Entry
Description
PLOAD4
PLOADX1
References
PLOAD4 (p. 2193) in the .
PLOADX1 (p. 2197) in the .
Currently only 1D element types are supported with this Object even though the form
allows for other types.
Object
Type
Dimension
Total Load
Element Uniform
1-D
PLOAD4
Entry
Description
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
Contact LBCs
A complete description of Contact loads and boundary conditions is given in Specifying Contact Body
Entries (Ch. 12).
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments.
CHAPTER 9 265
Assigned Conditions
Initial Conditions
Initial conditions provides various ways of initializing the state variables throughout the model.
Entry
Description
TIC
Defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural transient
analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be specified at
independent degrees-of-freedom.
References
TIC (p. 2519) in the .
MSC.Patran LBC Application Input Data
Initial Displacements are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the
LBC Application form.
Object
Type
Initial Displacement
Nodal
TIC
Entry
Description
Translations (T1,T2,T3) Defines the initial translational displacement values. These are in model
length units.
Rotations (R1,R2,R3)
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional
Assignments.
Entry
Description
TIC
Defines values for the initial conditions of variables used in structural transient
analysis. Both displacement and velocity values may be specified at
independent degrees-of-freedom.
References
TIC (p. 2519) in the .
MSC.Patran LBC Application Input Data
Initial velocities are generated in MSC.Patran using the following Object/Type combination on the LBC
Application form.
Object
Type
Initial Velocity
Nodal
TIC
Entry
Description
Defines the V0 fields for translational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry.
A unique TIC entry will be created for each nonblank entry.
Defines the V0 fields for rotational degrees of freedom on the TIC entry. A
unique TIC entry will be created for each nonblank entry.
References
Loads and Boundary Conditions Form (p. 18) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5: Functional
Assignments.
10
Materials
Overview
Linear Elastic
Nonlinear Elastic
Inelastic
Creep
Composite
Gasket
Material Damping
268
272
278
317
349
365
372
374
380
382
Overview
A wide variety of materials are encountered in stress analysis problems, and for any one of these
materials a range of constitutive models is available to describe the materials behavior. We can broadly
classify the materials of interest as those which exhibit almost purely elastic response, possibly with some
energy dissipation during rapid loading by viscoelastic response (the elastomers, such as rubber or solid
propellant); materials that yield, and exhibit considerable ductility beyond yield (such as mild steel and
other commonly used metals, ice at low strain rates, and clay); materials that flow by rearrangement of
particles which interact generally through some dominantly frictional mechanism (such as sand); and
brittle materials (rock, concrete, ceramics).
Table 10-1
Material
Composites
Anisotropic:
(MATi,
MATORT,
PCOMP)
1) Layered, ds i j Z C i jk l d k l
21 Constants
Examples
Aircraft panels
Models
Composite
continuum
elements
Tires, glass/epoxy
2)Fiber Reinforced,
E t
S Z JJJ ( T CT 1 )
2
One dimensional strain in fibers
Creep
(MATVP)
Elastic
(MATi,
MATORT)
Elastoplasticity
(MATEP)
ORNL
Small deformation
(below yield) for most
materials: metals, glass,
wood
Hookes Law
Metals
von Mises
Isotropic
Norton
Maxwell
Soils
Cam -Clay
Hills Anisotropic
CHAPTER 10 269
Materials
Table 10-1
Material
Hyperelastic
(MATHE)
Examples
Rubber
Models
Mooney
Ogden
Arruda-Boyce
Gent
Hypoelastic
Concrete
Buyukozturk
Viscoelastic
Rubber,
Simo Model
Glass, industrial
Narayanaswamy
(MATVE)
plastics
Viscoplastic
(MATVP)
Metals
Power law
Powder
Shima Model
Constitutive Models
A single material may contain multiple constitutive models. Each constitutive model characterizes
distinct ranges of the materials response. The constitutive models in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear contain a range of linear and nonlinear material models that can address or approximate the
material response of most commonly encountered materials. The constitutive models in MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear can be accessed by any of the solid or structural elements. The models are assessed
independently at each constitutive calculation point (i.e., the numerical integration points in the
elements). Thus, the constitutive models are concerned only with a single calculation point. The element
then provides an estimate of the kinematic solution to the problem at the point under consideration.
Constitutive Models in MSC.Patran
In MSC.Patran, the constitutive model to be used is defined by the Constitutive Model Status.
MSC.Patran uses all active constitutive models when the analysis is submitted. Redundant or unneeded
constitutive models should be rendered inactive.
Existing constitutive models of an existing material appear in either the active or inactive listbox
depending on their active/inactive status. Selection of a model from one listbox will add it to the other
one. If you do not wish for a constitutive model to be translated into the MSC.Nastran input file, place it
in the inactive list box
To view or change the constitutive model status:
1. Click on the Materials Application icon located on the Main form to bring up the Materials
Application form.
2. Select Change Material Status...
Description
Specifies elasto-plastic material properties.
Specifies temperature-dependent elasto-plastic material properties.
Specifies failure model properties for linear elastic materials.
Specifies gasket material properties to be used in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
Specifies gasket material property temperature variation to be used in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
CHAPTER 10 271
Materials
Linear Elastic
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is capable of handling problems with any combination of isotropic,
orthrotropic, or anisotropic linear elastic material behavior.
The linear elastic model is the model most commonly used to represent engineering materials. This
model, which has a linear relationship between stresses and strains, is represented by Hookes Law.
Figure 10-1 shows that stress is proportional to strain in a uniaxial tension test. The ratio of stress to strain
is the familiar definition of modulus of elasticity (Youngs modulus) of the material.
(10-1)
Stress
E
1
Strain
Figure 10-1
Experiments show that axial elongation is always accompanied by lateral contraction of the bar. The ratio
for a linear elastic material is:
v = (lateral contraction)/(axial elongation)
(10-2)
This is known as Poissons ratio. Similarly, the shear modulus (modulus of rigidity) is defined as:
G (shear modulus) = (shear stress)/(shear strain)
(10-3)
A Poissons ratio of 0.5, which would be appropriate for an incompressible material, can be used for the
following elements: Herrmann, plane stress, shell, truss, or beam. A Poissons ratio which is close (but
not equal) to 0.5 can be used for constant dilation elements and reduced integration elements in situations
which do not include other severe kinematic constraints. Using a Poissons ratio close to 0.5 for all other
elements usually leads to behavior that is too stiff. A Poissons ratio of 0.5 can also be used with the
updated Lagrangian formulation in the multiplicative decomposition framework using the standard
displacement elements. In these elements, the treatment for incompressibility is transparent.
CHAPTER 10 273
Materials
Isotropic Materials
Most linear elastic materials are assumed to be isotropic (their elastic properties are the same in all
directions). For an isotropic material, every plane is a plane of symmetry and every direction is an axis
of symmetry. It can be shown that for an isotropic material:
G Z E ( 2( 1 H v ) )
(10-4)
The shear modulus G can be easily calculated if the modulus of elasticity E and Poissons ratio v
are known.
Specifying Isotropic Material Entries
Isotropic material models are designated with the MAT1 Bulk Data entry in the MSC.Nastran Input File.
Entry
Description
MAT1
References
MAT1, 1613 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Description
Elastic Modulus
Defines the elastic modulus. This property is generally required. May vary
with temperature via a defined material field.
Poissons Ratio
Defines the Poissons ratio. This property is generally required. May vary
with temperature via a defined material field.
Density
Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion
Reference Temperature
The material density, used to define the mass of the structure, and the damping value are used in dynamic
loadings, while the expansion coefficient is used to identify the thermal strains.
Orthotropic Materials
An orthotropic material has three mutually orthogonal planes of symmetry. With respect to a coordinate
system parallel to these planes, the constitutive law for this material is given by the following more
general form of Hookes Law:
11
1 ( E1 )
22
( 12 ) ( E 1 )
33
12
( 12 ) ( E 1 ) ( 13 ) ( E 1 )
1 ( E2 )
11
( 23 ) ( E 2 )
22
1 ( E3 )
33
( 13 ) ( E 1 ) ( 23 ) ( E 2 )
0
1 ( G 12 )
12
23
1 ( G 23 )
23
13
1 ( G 13 )
13
3-D Orthotropic
Due to symmetry of the compliance matrix, E11 21 = E22 12 , E22 32 = E33 23 , and E33 13 =
E11 31 . Using these relations, a general orthotropic material has nine independent constants:
E11, E22, E33, 12 , 23 , 31 , G12, G23, G31
These nine constants must be specified in constructing the material model.
Note:
The inequalities E22 > 23 E33, E11 > 12 E22, and E33 > 31 E11 must be satisfied in
order for the orthotropic material to be stable. This is checked by MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear.
2-D Orthotropic
Orthotropic material models can be used with 2-D elements, such as plane stress, plane strain, and
axisymmetric elements. For example, the orthotropic stress-strain relationship for a plane stress
element is:
1
C Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
( 1 12 21 )
E1
21 E 1
12 E 2
E2
( 1 12 21 )G
(10-5)
CHAPTER 10 275
Materials
Description
MAT3
Defines the material properties for linear orthotropic materials used by the
CTRIAX6 element entry.
MAT2
Defines the material property for an orthotropic material for solids and
isoparametric shell elements.
MAT8
MATORT
References
MAT3, 1619 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
MAT8, 1624of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
MATORT (SOL 600), 1572 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Reference Temperature
Density
Anisotropic Materials
Anisotropic material exhibits different elastic properties in different directions. The significant directions
of the material are labeled as preferred directions, and it is easiest to express the material behavior with
respect to these directions.
The stress-strain relationship for an anisotropic linear elastic material can be expressed as
i j Z C i jk l k l
(10-6)
The values of C i jk l (the stress-strain relation) and the preferred directions (if necessary) must be defined
for an anisotropic material.
Specifying Anisotropic Material Entries
Anisotropic materials are characterized in MSC.Nastran using the following bulk data entries.
Entry
Description
MAT2
Defines the material properties for linear anisotropic materials for twodimensional elements.
References
MAT2, 1617 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
CHAPTER 10 277
Materials
Anisotropic linear elastic material models require the following material data via the Input Properties
subform on the Materials Application form.
Anisotropic-Linear Elastic Description
Stress-Strain Matrix, Cij
Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion
Reference Temperature
Density
Nonlinear Elastic
Hypoelastic - Isotropic
The hypoelastic model is able to represent a nonlinear elastic (reversible) material behavior. For this
constitutive theory, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear assumes that
i j Z L i jk l k l H g i j
(10-7)
S i j Z L i jk l E
kl
H gi j
(10-8)
where E, S are the Green-Lagrangian strain and second Piola-Kirchhoff stress, respectively.
This model can be used with any stress element, including Herrmann formulation elements.
The tensors L and g may be defined by user subroutine HYPELA. In order to provide an accurate
solution, L should be a tangent stiffness evaluated at the beginning of the iteration. In addition, the total
stress should be defined as its exact value at the end of the increment. This allows the residual load
correction to work effectively.
In user subroutine HYPELA2, besides the functionality of HYPELA, additional information is available
regarding the kinematics of deformation. In particular, the deformation gradient ( F ), rotation tensor ( R ),
and the eigenvalues ( ) and eigenvectors ( N ) to form the stretch tensor ( U ) are also provided. This
information is available only for the continuum elements namely: plane strain, generalized plane strain,
plane stress, axisymmetric, axisymmetric with twist, and three-dimensional cases.
Hyperelastic - Isotropic
Hyperelastic models are specified using either the MATHP or MATHE bulk data entries and are used to
describe the behavior of materials that exhibit elastic response up to large strains, such as rubber, solid
propellant, and other elastomeric materials. These materials are described in terms of a strain energy
potential, U, which defines the strain energy stored in the material per unit of volume in the initial
configuration as a function of the strain at that point in the material.
Elastomeric materials are elastic in the classical sense. Upon unloading, the stress-strain curve is retraced
and there is no permanent deformation. Elastomeric materials are initially isotropic. Figure 10-2 shows a
typical stress-strain curve for an elastomeric material.
, Stress
CHAPTER 10 279
Materials
100%
, Strain
Figure 10-2
Calculations of stresses in an elastomeric material requires an existence of a strain energy function which
is usually defined in terms of invariants or stretch ratios. Significance and calculation of these kinematic
quantities is discussed next.
Characteristics of Elastomeric Materials
Most solid rubberlike materials are nearly incompressible: their bulk modulus is several orders of
magnitude larger than their shear modulus. For applications where the material is not highly confined,
the assumption that the material is fully incompressible is usually a good approximation. In cases where
the material is highly confined (such as in an O-ring), modeling the compressibility can be important for
obtaining accurate results. In either case, the use of hybrid (mixed formulation) elements is
recommended for this type of material in all but plane stress cases.
Elastomeric foams on the other hand are elastic but very compressible.
Elastomeric materials are considered to be isotropic in nature with random orientation of the long
chain molecules.
Strain Energy Potential and Representative Models
Calculations of stresses in an elastomeric material requires an existence of a strain energy function which
is usually defined in terms of invariants or stretch ratios.
In the rectangular block in Figure 10-3, 1 , 2 , and 3 are the principal stretch ratios along the edges
of the block defined by
i Z ( Li H ui ) Li
(10-9)
L3
3L3
2L2
1L1
L2
Undeformed
Deformed
L1
Figure 10-3
In practice, the material behavior is (approximately) incompressible, leading to the constraint equation
1 2 3 Z 1
the strain invariants are defined as
2
1
I 1 Z H 2 H 3
2 2
2
2 2
2 3
2 2
3 1
I2 Z 1 H H
(10-10)
2 2 2
I3 Z 1 2 3
(10-11)
(10-12)
(10-13)
CHAPTER 10 281
Materials
1
JJJ
2
(10-14)
(implied sum on i)
2
I2
( Ci j Ci j ( Ci i ) )
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
2
(10-15)
1
I 3 Z JJJ e i jk e p q r C i p C jq C k r Z det ( C i j )
6
in which e i j k is the permutation tensor. Also, using spectral decomposition theorem,
2
Ci j Z A Ni Nj
(10-16)
2
in which the stretches A are the eigenvalues of the right Cauchy-Green deformation tensor, C i j and
A
(10-17)
(10-18)
Thus, using the spectral decomposition theorem, the true strains are written as:
1
A A
i j Z JJJ ( ln A )n i n j
2
(10-19)
where n i is the eigenvectors in the current configuration. It is noted that the true strains can also be
approximated using first Pad approximation, which is a rational expansion of the tensor, as:
i j Z 2 ( V i j i j ) ( V i j H i j )
(10-20)
where a polar decomposition of the deformation gradient F i j is done into the left stretch tensor V i j and
rotation tensor R i j as:
Fi j Z Vi k Rk j
The Jacobian J is defined as:
J Z 1 2 3 Z ( det b i j )
1
JJJ
2
(10-21)
(10-22)
1
I 3 Z JJJ e i jk e p q r b i p b jq b k r Z det ( b i j )
6
It is noted that either Equation (10-15) or Equation (10-22) gives the same strain energy since it is scalar
and invariant. Also, to account for the incompressibility condition, in both formulations, the strain energy
is split into deviatoric and volumertic parts as:
W Z W deviatoric H W volumetric
(10-23)
Mooney-Rivlin Model
The generalized Mooney-Rivlin model for nearly-incompressible elastomeric materials is written as:
gmr
Wd e v i a t o r i c
Cm n ( I1 3 ) ( I2 3 )
(10-24)
m Z 1 n Z 1
W devratoric Z C 10 ( I 1 3 ) H C 01 ( I 2 3 ) H C 11 ( I 1 3 ) ( I 2 3 ) H C 20 ( I 1 3 ) 2 H C 30 ( I 1 3 )
(10-25)
CHAPTER 10 283
Materials
tod
where W deviatoric is the deviatoric third order deformation form strain energy function,
C 10, C 01, C 11, C 20, C 30 are material constants obtained from experimental data.
Simpler and popular forms of the above strain energy function are obtained as:
nh
W deviatoric Z C 10 ( I 1 3 )
mr
W deviatoric Z C 10 ( I 1 3 ) H C 01 ( I 2 3 )
Neo-Hookean
Mooney-Rivlin
(10-26)
Ogden Model
The form of strain energy for the Ogden model in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is,
N
ogden
Wd e v i a t o r i c
k Z 1
k
where i
k
k
k
JJJJJkJ 1 H 2 H 3 3
k
JJJJJJJ
k
3
J
i
(10-27)
2 0
C1
i
3 0
1 0
Figure 10-4
Nl , where the fully extended chain has an approximate length of Nl. A chain vector from the
(10-28)
Using geometrical considerations, the chain vector length can be written as:
12
1
r chain Z JJJJJJJ Nl ( 12 H 22 H 32 )
3
(10-29)
and
r chain
12
1
chain Z JJJJJJJJJJJ
J Z JJJJJJJ ( I 1 )
r0
3
(10-30)
Using statistical mechanics considerations, the work of deformation is proportional to the entropy change
on stretching the chains from the unstretched state and may be written in terms of the chain length as:
r chain
(10-31)
where n is the chain density and C is a constant. is an inverse Langevin function correctly accounts
for the limiting chain extensibility and is defined as:
r chain
Z L 1 JJJJJJJJJJJJ
Nl
(10-32)
CHAPTER 10 285
Materials
(10-33)
With Equation (10-30) through Equation (10-33), the Arruda-Boyce model can be written
Arruda-Boyce
W dev
1
1
11
Z nk JJJ ( I 1 3 ) H JJJJJJJJJJ ( I 12 9 ) H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ( I 13 27 )
2
2
20N
1050N
(10-34)
519
19
H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ( I 14 81 ) H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ( I 15 243 ) ]
3
4
673750N
7000N
Gent Model
Also, using the notion of limiting chain extensibility, Gent proposed the following constitutive relation:
Gent
W dev
EI m
Im
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJ log JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
6
I m I 1*
(10-35)
where
I 1* Z I 1 3
(10-36)
The constant EI m is independent of molecular length and, hence, of degree of crosslinking. The model
is attractive due to its simplicity, but yet captures the main behavior of a network of extensible molecules
over the entire range of possible strains.
The volumetric part of the strain energy is for all the rubber models in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear is:
1
W volumetric
JJJ
9K 3
Z JJJJJJJ J 1
2
(10-37)
when K is the bulk modulus. It can be noted that the particular form of volumetric strain energy is chosen
such that:
1. The constraint condition is satisfied for incompressible deformations only; for example:
> 0 if I 3 > 0
f ( I 3 ) Z 0 if I 3 Z 1
< 0 if I 3 < 0
(10-38)
JJ6J
f ( I 3 ) Z 3 I 1
3
(10-39)
upon substitution of Equation (10-39) in Equation (10-35) and taking the first variation of the variational
principle, you obtain the pressure variable as:
1
JJ3J
p Z 3K J 1
(10-40)
The equation has a physical significance in that for small deformations, the pressure is linearly related to
the volumetric strains by the bulk modulus K .
The discontinuous or continuous damage models discussed in the models section on damage can be
included with the generalized Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, and Gent models to simulate
Mullins effect or fatigue of elastomers when using the updated Lagrangian approach. In the total
Lagrangian framework however, this is available for the Ogden model only.
Foam Model
Sometimes elastomeric materials show large volumetric deformations. For this type of behavior, the
models discussed above are not appropriate. Instead, the foam model expressed by:
N
W Z
n Z 1
n
n
n
JJJJJnJ 1 H 2 H 3 3 H
n Z 1
n
n
JJJJJJ 1 J
(10-41)
should be used. In contrast to the Ogden model, the first part of the foam strain energy function is not
purely deviatoric. The material constants n provide additional flexibility to describe the material
behavior also for a large amount of compressibility.
Updated Lagrange Formulation for Nonlinear Elasticity
The Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce, Gent and Foam models may be used either in the total
Lagrange or updated Lagrange framework. This is selected using the PARAM,MARUPDAT. For plane
stress analysis the total Lagrange procedure will always be used.
The updated Lagrangian rubber elasticity capability can be used in conjunction with both continuous as
well as discontinuous damage models. Thermal, as well as viscoelastic, effects can be modeled with the
current formulation. While the Mooney model can account for the temperature dependent material
properties, the Ogden model does not support the temperature dependence at this time. The singularity
ratio of the system is inversely proportional to the order of bulk modulus of the material due to the
condensation procedure.
CHAPTER 10 287
Materials
A consistent linearization has been carried out to obtain the tangent modulus. The singularity for the case
of two- or three-equal stretch ratios is analytically removed by application of LHospitals rule. The
current framework with an exact implementation of the finite strain kinematics along with the split of
strain energy to handle compressible and nearly incompressible response is eminently suitable for
implementation of any nonlinear elastic as well as inelastic material models. In fact, the finite
e p
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
Figure 10-5
Test Data
Uniaxial Test
Probably the most popular test is the uniaxial test (see Figure 10-6). This test can be used in tension as
well as in compression, both for incompressible and (slightly) compressible elastomeric materials. The
CHAPTER 10 289
Materials
shape of the specimen used in compression will usually be less slender than the shape used in tension.
Within the region indicated by the dashed line, the state of deformation will be homogeneous, where the
deformation can be described by:
1 Z Z 1 H e 11 , 2 Z 3 Z
(10-42)
(10-43)
in which F is the applied force and A 0 is the cross sectional area of the undeformed specimen in the
E 2 - E 3 -plane, within the region indicated by the dashed line.
F
E2
E3
Figure 10-6
E1
Necessary input for the curve fitting program in MSC.Patran consists of at least engineering strain ( e 11 )
versus engineering stress ( 11 ) data points. In case of (slightly) compressible materials, information
about the volume changes is also needed. This data can be given either in terms of the area ratio or the
volume ratio. The area ratio is defined by the current cross sectional area A over the original cross
sectional area A 0 . Similarly, the volume ratio is defined by the current volume V over the undeformed
volume V 0 . Notice that the volume ratio and the area ratio are related by:
A
V
JJJJJJJ Z J Z JJJJJJJ ( 1 H e 11 )
A0
V0
If, for a particular elastomeric material, both a tensile and a compression test have been performed, all
the data points should be collected into one data file. The layout of a data file containing uniaxial test
data is given in the figure below. The columns may be separated by either spaces or commas. For (nearly)
incompressible material behavior, the third column can be omitted.
11
e 11
A A0
e 11
11
V V0
or
Figure 10-7
Equi-Biaxial Test
The equi-biaxial tensile test outlined in Figure 10-8 can be used to obtain, within the region indicated by
the dashed line, a homogeneous state of deformation defined by:
F
E2
E3
Figure 10-8
E1
1 Z 2 Z Z 1 H e 11 Z 1 H e 22 , 3 Z J
(10-44)
(10-45)
CHAPTER 10 291
Materials
with A 0 being the original cross sectional area of the elastomeric sheet in the direction perpendicular to
the applied forces, which is assumed to be the same in the E 1 - E 3 -plane and the E 2 - E 3 -plane.
For compressible elastomers, volumetric information is needed. For the equi-biaxial test, this can be
given in terms of a thickness ratio or, similar to the uniaxial test, a volume ratio. The thickness ratio is
defined as the current sheet thickness t over the original sheet thickness t 0 . The relation between the
thickness ratio and the volume ratio is:
2
t
V
JJJJJJJ Z J Z JJJJ ( 1 H e 11 )
t0
V0
(10-46)
The layout of a data file for an equi-biaxial tensile test is given in Figure 10-8.
Planar Shear Test
A state of planar shear, also sometimes called pure shear, can be obtained by clamping and stretching an
elastomeric rectangular sheet of material, as indicated in Figure 10-9.
E2
E3
Figure 10-9
E1
Planar Shear Test
Except for the vicinity of the free edges and the clamps, the state of strain can be found to be substantially
uniform, according to:
J
1 Z Z 1 H e 11 , 2 Z 1 , 3 Z JJJ
(10-47)
(10-48)
in which A 0 is the cross sectional area of the undeformed specimen in the E 1 - E 3 -plane. Notice that the
engineering strain e 22 is zero, but that the corresponding engineering stress 22 depends on the material
behavior.
U Z T S S
TS Z
(10-49)
3 U U
H
U Z 2 S S
I
S
I
1
2
(10-50)
(10-51)
F Z
1 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
(10-52)
2F
E2
E3
Figure 10-10
atan
E1
Simple Shear Test
Notice that det ( F ) Z 1 , irrespective of the value of , from which it can be concluded that a simple
shear test is a constant volume test.
CHAPTER 10 293
Materials
Based on Equation (10-51), Equation (10-52) and Figure 10-10, the engineering strain tensor and the right
Cauchy-Green strain tensor can be evaluated as:
e Z
0 2 0
2 0 0
0
0 0
1
C Z
(10-53)
0
(10-54)
1H 0
0
0
1
According to Equation (10-54), the principal stretch ratios follow from the principal values of C
and read:
2
1, 2 Z
1 H JJJJJ 1 H JJJJJ , 3 Z 1
2
4
(10-55)
It can easily be verified that 1 2 3 Z 1 , which again shows that the simple shear test is a constant
volume test. The relevant engineering stress is given by:
FJ
12 Z JJJJJJ
A0
(10-56)
with A 0 being the cross sectional area of the undeformed specimen in the E 1 - E 3 -plane.
The layout of a data file containing measurements of a simple shear test is given in Figure 10-11.
2e 12 Z
Figure 10-11
12
Volumetric Test
Although a uniaxial, equi-biaxial and planar shear test can be used to obtain information about the
volumetric behavior, for compressible materials an additional volumetric test may be preferable. This is
especially true for slightly compressible materials, since volumetric data from other tests other than a
volumetric one may easily be inaccurate (because most of the deformation is deviatoric). Two commonly
used volumetric tests are outlined in Figure 10-12. In Figure 10-12a, a cylindrical specimen is
compressed in a cylindrical hole. This test can be successfully applied for slightly compressible
materials. In Figure 10-12b, a specimen is deformed by compressing the surrounding fluid. This
volumetric test can also be used for highly compressible materials.
F
E1
(a)
E3
(b)
E2
Figure 10-12
Volumetric Tests
For a volumetric test, the direct true stress components are assumed to be equal to the hydrostatic pressure
p and given by:
F
T 11 Z T 22 Z T 33 Z JJJJJJ
J
p
A
(10-57)
in which A denotes the area of the piston in the E 2 - E 3 -plane. The deformation can be expressed in
terms of an engineering strain e and corresponding stretch ratio , which can be determined from the
measured volume change according to:
e Z 1 Z
V
JJJJJJJ 1 Z
V0
J1
(10-58)
(10-59)
Notice that only in the case of Figure 10-12b the engineering strain e and the engineering stress are
equal to the direct components of the engineering strain and the engineering stress tensor.
The layout of the data file corresponding to a volumetric test is given in Figure 10-13. Notice that because
of Figure 10-12b, the entries of the first and the third column are not independent.
CHAPTER 10 295
Materials
Figure 10-13
V V0
Relaxation Test
The basic feature of a relaxation test is that the force or stress response to a prescribed fixed displacement
or deformation is measured as a function of time. A relaxation test for a large strain elastomeric material
is indicated in Figure 10-14. By measuring the force needed for a displacement u at different time
intervals, the decay of the strain energy as a function of time can be determined. For linear elastic
isotropic material, similar tests can be performed to get information about the shear modulus and/or the
bulk modulus as a function of time. In order to properly measure the instantaneous values, application
of the prescribed displacement should occur sufficiently fast. It should be noted, due to the assumption
introduced in equation Equation (10-94), that for large strain visco-elastic materials the magnitude of (the
instantaneous value of) the strain energy is not important, since every energy term in the Prony series
expansion is related to the instantaneous strain energy using a scalar multiplier. The data does not need
to be equispaced in time. Usually, at the beginning of the relaxation experiment the measurements are
done at smaller time intervals than at the end of the experiment.
u
Figure 10-14
Relaxation Test
If, for linear visco-elastic materials, instead of a relaxation test only a creep test can be performed, the
creep data must be transformed into relaxation data. Converting creep data into relaxation data can be
done using a numerical integration scheme, but is not part of MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
edges and faces of cells. Foams are made up of polyhedral cells that pack in three dimensions.
The foam cells can either be open (e.g., sponge) or closed (e.g., flotation foam). Common
examples of elastomeric foam materials are cellular polymers such as cushions, padding, and
packaging materials which utilize the excellent energy absorption properties of foams - for a
certain stress level, the energy absorbed by foams is substantially greater than by ordinary stiff
elastic materials.
The figure below shows a typical compressive stress-strain curve for elastomeric foam.
STRESS
Densification
Figure 10-15
STRESS
CHAPTER 10 297
Materials
Figure 10-16
i Z 1
i i
i i
JJJJJ J
i L
(10-60)
where TL is the nominal stress and LL is the stretch in the direction of loading. Because of the
compressible behavior, the planar mode does not result in a state of pure shear. In fact, if the effective
Poissons ratio is zero, planar deformation is identical to uniaxial deformation.
Simple Shear Deformation
Simple shear is described by the deformation gradient
F Z
0
0 1 0
0 0 1
(10-61)
where is the shear strain. For this deformation, J=det F =1. A schematic illustration of simple shear
deformation is shown in Figure 10-17.
The nominal shear stress TS is:
U
TS Z
Z
N
2
i i
2
1
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
JJJJ
J
2
j
2 1 2
i
i Z 1
j Z 1 j
(10-62)
where j= are the principal stretches in the plane of shearing, related to the shear strain, , by:
1, 2 Z
2
2
1 H JJJJJ 1 H JJJJJ
2
4
(10-63)
CHAPTER 10 299
Materials
2F
E2
atan
E3
E1
Figure 10-17
The stretch in the direction perpendicular to the shear plane is L3=1. The transverse (tensile) stress, TT,
developed during simple shear deformation due to the Poynting effect, is
U
TT Z
Z
2
2
N
2 j 1
i i
1
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
JJJJ
J
4 2 2
j
2 ( H 2 )
i
j Z 1 j
i Z 1
j
(10-64)
Volumetric Deformation
The volumetric deformation mode consists of all principal stretches being equal,
1=2=3=V, J=V3.
The pressure-volumetric ratio relation is
p Z
2
U
Z JJJ
J
J
Ji
i i
i JJJJ
3
JJ J
JJJJ
i
Z 1
(10-65)
E1
(a)
E3
E2
Figure 10-18
(b)
Lateral strain data can also be used to define the compressibility of the foam. Measurement of the lateral
strains may make other tests redundant, e.g., providing lateral strains for a uniaxial test eliminates the
need for a volumetric test. The foam model may not accurately fit Poisson's ratio if it varies significantly
between compression and tension.
CHAPTER 10 301
Materials
p=-(2 / D1)V,
so that, at small nominal strains, the bulk modulus is defined as:
K=(2 / D1)
Hyperelastic Models in MSC.Nastran
Various options are provided for defining the material properties. The first (available in both MSC.Patran
and MSC.Nastran) is to give the parameters of the polynomial form N, A i j and D i , or the parameters of
the Ogden form N, i, i and D i as functions of the temperature. The second is to give the value of N,
and give experimental stress-data for up to four simple tests: uniaxial, equilibrium, planar and, if the
material is compressible for volumetric compression test. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear will then
compute the A i j or [ i, i ] and the D i . This method is available for N = 1 and N=2 for the polynomial
form and up to N = 6 for the Ogden form, and does not allow the properties to be temperature dependent.
In either case, you should be careful about defining the A i j or [ i, i ] : especially when N > 1, the
behavior at higher strains is strongly sensitive to the values of the A i j or [ i, i ] , and unstable material
behavior may result if these values are not correctly defined. When some of the coefficients are strongly
negative, instability at higher strain levels is likely to occur.
Because the properties of rubber-like materials can vary significantly from one sample to another, it is
important that test data are taken from experiments on the same sample (or samples cut from the same
sheet), regardless whether the A i j or [ i, i ] are computed by the user or by the built-in method.
This material option can be used by itself, or can be combined with viscoelasticity to define time
dependent hyperelastic behavior. It cannot be combined with other material options such as plasticity or
creep. It may be used with the pure displacement formulation elements or with the hybrid (mixed
formulation) elements. Because elastomeric materials are usually almost completely incompressible,
fully integrated pure displacement method elements are not recommended for use with this material,
except for plane stress cases. If fully or selectively reduced integration displacement method elements
are used with the almost incompressible form of this material model in anything except plane stress
analysis, a penalty method is used to impose the incompressibility constraint. This can sometimes lead
to numerical difficulties, and the fully or selectively reduced integrated hybrid formulation elements
are therefore recommended.
Specifying Hyperelastic Material Entries
Nonlinear hyperelastic materials are characterized in MSC.Nastran with the following Bulk Data entries:
.
Entry
MATHP
MATHE
Description
Specifies material properties for use in fully nonlinear (i.e., large strain and
large rotation) hyperelastic analysis of rubber-like materials (elastomers).
Specifies hyperelastic (rubber-like) material properties for nonlinear (large
strain and large rotation) analysis in (SOL 600) only.
CHAPTER 10 303
Materials
References
MATHP, 1569 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
MATHE (SOL 600) (p. 1559) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Description
Density
Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion
Bulk Modulus
Reference Temperature
Ogden
Hyperelastic-Ogden
Description
Bulk Modulus K
Density
Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion
Hyperelastic-Ogden
Description
Reference Temperature
Modulus k
Exponent k
Foam
Hyperelastic-Foam
Description
Density
Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion
Reference Temperature
Modulus n
Deviatoric Exponent n
Volumetric Exponent n
Arruda-Boyce
Hyperelastic-Arruda- Boyce
Description
NKT
Chain Length
Bulk Modulus
Density
Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion
Reference Temperature
CHAPTER 10 305
Materials
Gent
Hyperelastic-Gent
Description
Tensile Modulus
Defines I 1 Z I 1 3 .
Bulk Modulus
Density
Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion
Reference Temperature
Viscoelastic
The material models discussed in previous sections are considered to be time independent. However,
rubber materials often show a rate-dependent behavior and can be modeled as viscoelastic materials.
Viscoelasticity can be applied:
To determine the current state of deformation based on the entire time history of loading.
To characterize small strain and large strain problems.
With other material options for linear elastic response (small strain) and hyperelastic response
(large strain).
To include temperature dependencies.
For isotropic, anisotropic, and incompressible materials.
d kl ( )
J d H G
G ijkl ( t ) JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
ijkl ( t ) kl ( 0 )
d
(10-66)
0
The functions G i jk l are called stress relaxation functions. They represent the response to a unit applied
strain and have characteristic relaxation times associated with them. The relaxation functions for
materials with a fading memory can be expressed in terms of Prony or exponential series.
G ijkl ( t ) Z G ijkl H
n Z 1
n
n
G ijkl exp ( t )
(10-67)
in which G i jk l is a tensor of amplitudes and is a positive time constant (relaxation time). In the
current implementation, it is assumed that the time constant is isotropic. In Equation (10-67), G i jk l
represents the long term modulus of the material.
The short term moduli (describing the instantaneous elastic effect) are then given by
N
0
G ijkl Z G ijkl ( 0 ) Z G ijkl H
n
G ijkl
(10-68)
n Z 1
The stress can now be considered as the summation of the stresses in a generalized Maxwell model
(Figure 10-19)
N
ij ( t ) Z ij ( t ) H
n
ij ( t )
(10-69)
n Z 1
where
ij Z G ijkl kl ( t )
n
ij Z
(10-70)
G ijkl exp [ ( t )
n d kl ( )
] JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ d
d
(10-71)
E1
q1
q2
E2
qi
Ei
E0
i = i/Ei
Figure 10-19
For integration of the constitutive equation, the total time interval is subdivided into a number of
subintervals ( t m 1, t m ) with time-step h Z t m t m 1 . A recursive relation can now be derived
expressing the stress increment in terms of the values of the internal stresses inj at the start of the
interval. With the assumption that the strain varies linearly during the time interval h, we obtain the
increment stress-strain relation as
CHAPTER 10 307
Materials
G ijkl H
ij ( t m ) Z
n
n
( h )G ijkl kl
n Z 1
n
n
( h ) ij ( t m h )
(10-72)
n Z 1
where
n
n ( h ) Z 1 exp ( h )
(10-73)
and
n
n
n
( h ) Z ( h ) h
(10-74)
In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the incremental equation for the total stress is expressed in terms of
the short term moduli (See Equation (10-68)).
N
0
ij ( t m ) Z G ijkl
n
{ 1 ( h ) }G ijkl kl ( t m )
n Z 1
n
n
( h ) ij ( t m h )
(10-75)
n Z 1
Note that the set of equations given by Equation (10-75) can directly be used for both anisotropic and
isotropic materials.
Isotropic Viscoelastic Material
For an isotropic viscoelastic material, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear assumes that the deviatoric and
volumetric behavior are fully uncoupled and that the behavior can be described by a time dependent
shear and bulk modules. The bulk moduli is generally assumed to be time independent; however, this is
an unnecessary restriction of the general theory.
Both the shear and bulk moduli can be expressed in a series
G( t) Z G
N
H
n Z 1
K( t) Z K
N
H
n Z 1
n
n
G exp t d
(10-76)
n
n
K exp t v
(10-77)
n Z 1
Gn
(10-78)
N
K0 Z K H
Kn
(10-79)
n Z 1
Let the deviatoric and volumetric component matrices d and v be given by
d Z
4 3 2 3 2 3
2 3 4 3 2 3
2 3 2 3 4 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
v Z
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
n
n
0
( t m ) Z G [ 1 d ( h ) ]G d ( t m )
n Z 1
Nv
n
n
0
K
[
1
(
h
)
]K
v ( t m )
n Z 1
Nv
Nd
n
n
n
n
d ( h ) d ( t m h ) v ( h ) v ( t m h )
n Z 1
n Z 1
(10-80)
and
n
n
n
n
n
d ( t m ) Z d ( h )G d ( t m ) d ( h ) d ( t m h )
n
n
n
n
n
v ( t m ) Z v ( h )K v ( t m ) v ( h ) v ( t m h )
Note that the deviatoric and volumetric response are fully decoupled.
(10-81)
CHAPTER 10 309
Materials
Note that the algorithm is exact for linear variations of the strain during the increment. The algorithm is
implicit; hence, for each change in time-step, a new assembly of the stiffness matrix is required.
Anisotropic Viscoelastic Material
Equation (10-75) can be used for the analysis of anisotropic viscoelastic materials.
Also, a complete set of moduli (21 components) can be specified in the HOOKVI user subroutine.
Referencing a local coordinate system or use of the ORIENT user subroutine can be used to define a
0
preferred orientation both for the short time moduli G i jk l and the amplitude functions G i jk l .
Incompressible Isotropic Viscoelastic Materials
Incompressible elements in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear allow the analysis of incompressible and
nearly incompressible materials in plane strain, axisymmetric and three-dimensional problems. The
incompressibility of the element is simulated through the use of an perturbed Lagrangian variational
principle based on the Herrmann formulation.
The constitutive equation for a material with no time dependence in the volumetric behavior can be
expressed as
N
n
n
0
1
ij ( t m ) Z 2 G ijkl [ 1 ( h ) ]G ijkl kl ( t m ) JJJ pp ( t m ) kl
3
n Z 1
N
n
n
1
( h ) ( ij ) ( t m ) H JJJ kk ij
3
n Z 1
(10-82)
0
pp ( t m ) Z 3K pp ( t m )
(10-83)
The hydrostatic pressure term is used as an independent variable in the variational principle. The
Herrmann pressure variable is now defined in the same way as in the formulation for time independent
elastic materials.
pp
H Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
2G 0 ( 1 H 0 )
(10-84)
The constitutive Equation (10-82) and Equation (10-83) can then be rewritten
e
ij ( t m ) Z 2G ( ij H H ij )
n Z 1
n
n ( h ) ( ij ) ( t m h )
(10-85)
where
Ge Z G0
[ 1 n ( h )G n ]
(10-86)
n Z 1
0
G ( 1 H ) G ( 1 2 )
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
e
3G
(10-87)
( Ei j Qi j ) Z ( Ei j )
Qi j Ei j H
n Z 1
I ( Qi j )
(10-88)
n Z 1
n
where E i j are the components of the Green-Lagrange strain tensor, Q i j internal variables and the
elastic strain energy density for instantaneous deformations. In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, it is
0
assumed that Z W , meaning that the energy density for instantaneous deformations is given by the
third order James Green and Simpson form or the Ogden form.
The components of the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress then follow from
Si j
Z 0
Z JJJJJJJJJ
J
JJJJJJJJJJ
E i j
E i j
Qi j
(10-89)
n Z 1
The energy function can also be written in terms of the long term moduli resulting in a different set of
n
internal variables T i j
N
n
( E i j, T i j ) Z ( E i j ) H
Ti j E i j
(10-90)
n Z 1
where is the elastic strain energy for long term deformations. Using this energy definition, the
stresses are obtained from
Si j
( E)
Z
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ H
E i j
n Z 1
Ti j
(10-91)
CHAPTER 10 311
Materials
Observing the similarity with the equations for small strain viscoelasticity the internal variables can be
obtained from a convolution expression
n
Ti j Z
0 S i j ( )exp [ ( t )
t
]d
(10-92)
(10-93)
Z H
n exp ( t n )
(10-94)
n Z 1
If, in the energy function, each term in the series expansion has a similar form, Equation (10-94) can
be rewritten
N
Z H
n 0 exp ( t n )
(10-95)
n Z 1
n
where is a scalar multiplier for the energy function based on the short term values.
The stress-strain relation is now given by
Si j ( t ) Z
Si j ( t )
Ti j ( t )
(10-96)
n Z 1
S i j Z JJJJJJJJJJJ Z 1
E i j
Ti j Z
0
n JJJJJJJJJ
E iJj
n Z 1
N
n 0
S i j ( t )exp [ ( t
) ]d
(10-97)
(10-98)
Analogue to the derivation for small strain viscoelasticity, a recursive relation can be derived expressing
the stress increment in terms of values of the internal stresses at the start of the increment.
The equations are reformulated in terms of the short time values of the energy function
N
0
0
S i j ( t m ) Z 1 1 n ( h ) n { S i j ( t m ) S i j ( t m h ) }
nZ1
(10-99)
n
n Si j ( tm
h)
n Z 1
0
S i j ( t m ) Z n ( h ) n [ S i j ( t m ) S i j ( t m h ) ] n ( h )S i j ( t m h )
(10-100)
It is assumed that the viscoelastic behavior in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear acts only on the
deviatoric behavior.
Viscoelastic Models in MSC.Nastran
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has two models that represent viscoelastic materials. The first can be
defined as a Kelvin-Voigt model. The latter is a general hereditary integral approach.
Kelvin-Voigt Model
The Kelvin model allows the rate of change of the inelastic strain to be a function of the total stress and
previous strain.
k
ij
The Kelvin material behavior (viscoelasticity) is modeled by assuming an additional creep strain ,
governed by
d
JJJJJ k Z A i j k l B i jk l k
kl
kl
dt i j
(10-101)
where A and B may be defined in the user subroutine CRPVIS and the total strain is
i j Z iej H ipj H icj H ikj H ti hj
(10-102)
(10-103)
(10-104)
(10-105)
icj Z creep strains defined via the CRPLAW and VSWELL user subroutines
(10-106)
(10-107)
CHAPTER 10 313
Materials
The CRPVIS user subroutine is called at each integration point of each element when the Kelvin model
is used.
Use the NLPARM option and set a nonzero time increment to define the time step and to set the tolerance
control for the maximum strain in any increment.
This option allows Maxwell models to be included in series with the Kelvin model.
Hereditary Integral Model
The stress-strain equations in viscoelasticity are not only dependent on the current stress and strain state
(as represented in the Kelvin model), but also on the entire history of development of these states. This
constitutive behavior is most readily expressed in terms of hereditary or Duhamel integrals. These
integrals are formed by considering the stress or strain build-up at successive times. Two equivalent
integral forms exist: the stress relaxation form and the creep function form. In MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear, the stress relaxation form is used.
The viscoelasticity option in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear can be used for both the small strain and
large strain Mooney, Ogden, Arruda Boyce, and Gent material stress-relaxation problems. A description
of these models is as follows:
Experimental Determination of Viscoelastic Material Parameters
The free energy function versus time data being used for large strain viscoelasticity can be generated by
fitting experimental data provided the following two tests are done:
1. Standard quasi-static tests (tensile, planar-shear, simple-shear, equi-biaxial tension, volumertic)
0
temperature history. In other words, the functionals are linear in the strains but nonlinear in
the temperature.
The time scale of experimental data is extended for Thermo-Rheologically Simple materials. All
characteristic functions of the material must obey the same property. The shift function is a basic property
of the material and must be determined experimentally. As a consequence of the shifting of the
mechanical properties data parallel to the time axis, the values of the zero and infinite frequency complex
moduli do not change due to shifting. Hence, elastic materials with temperature-dependent
characteristics neither belong to nor are consistent with the above hypothesis for the class of
Thermo-Rheologically Simple viscoelastic solids.
In addition to the Thermo-Rheologically Simple material behavior variations of initial stress-strain
0
moduli G i jk l , the temperature of the other mechanical properties (coefficient of thermal expansion, etc.)
due to changes in temperature can be specified.
Note, however, that only the instantaneous moduli are effected. Hence, the long term moduli given by
G i jk l
N
0
G i jk l ( t )
G i jk l
(10-108)
n Z 1
can easily become negative if the temperature effects are not defined properly.
The effect of temperature, , on the material behavior is introduced through the dependence of the elastic
modulus, G, on temperature, and through a reduced time concept:
Z G H g ( ( t ) ( s ) ) ( s ) ds
(10-109)
(t) Z
ds
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
A( ( s) )
(10-110)
where A((t)) is the shift function at time t. Often the shift function is approximated by the Williams
Landell Ferry (WLF) form:
C1 ( 0 )
log ( A ) Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
C2 H ( 0 )
where C1, C2 and 0 are constants (0 is the glassy transition temperature).
(10-111)
CHAPTER 10 315
Materials
Narayanaswamy Model
The annealing of flat glass requires that the residual stresses be of an acceptable magnitude, while the
specification for optical glass components usually includes a homogenous refractive index. The design
of heat treated processes can be accomplished using the Narayanaswamy model. This allows you to
study the time dependence of physical properties (for example, volumes) of glass subjected to a change
in temperature.
For more information pertaining to the Narayanaswamy Model, see MSC.Marc Volume A: Theory and
User Information, Chapter 7 Material Library.
Specifying Viscoelastic Material Entries
The viscoelastic MATVE and MATTVE material options are provided for cases where dissipative losses
caused by viscous (internal friction) effects in materials must be modeled. For time domain analysis,
this option is used with an elastic model to define classical linear, small strain, viscoelastic behavior, or
with hyperelastic or foam models to define finite linear, large deformation, viscoelastic behavior. As
described in the previous section, viscoelastic relaxation data can be fit using the experimental data
fitting (EDF) capability available in MSC.Patran. See Experimental Data Fitting, 382.
Entry
Description
MATVE
MATTVE
References
MATVE (SOL 600), 1608 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
MATTVE (SOL 600), 1604 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Viscoelastic material models require the following material data via the Input Properties subform on the
Materials Application form.
Isotropic
Description
Shear Constant
Deviatoric Multiplier
Dilatational Multiplier
Exp
Liquid Coeff of Thermal Exp
Orthotropic
Description
Exp
Liquid Coeff of Thermal Exp
CHAPTER 10 317
Materials
Inelastic
Most materials of engineering interest initially respond elastically. Elastic behavior means that the
deformation is fully recoverable, so that, when the load is removed, the specimen returns to its original
shape. If the load exceeds some limit (the yield load), the deformation is no longer fully recoverable.
Some parts of the deformation will remain when the load is removed as, for example, when a paper clip
is bent too much, or when a billet of metal is rolled or forged in a manufacturing process. Plasticity
theories model the materials mechanical response as it undergoes such nonrecoverable deformation in
a ductile fashion. The theories have been developed most intensively for metals, but they are applied to
soils, concrete, rock, ice, and so on. These materials behave in very different ways (for example, even
large values of pure hydrostatic pressure cause very little inelastic deformation in metals, but quite small
hydrostatic pressure may cause a significant, non-recoverable volume change in a soil sample), but the
fundamental concepts of plasticity theories are sufficiently general that models based on these concepts
have been successfully developed for a wide range of materials. A number of these plasticity modes are
available in the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear material library.
In nonlinear material behavior, the material parameters depend on the state of stress. Up to the
proportional limit, i.e., the point at which linearity in material behavior ceases, the linear elastic
formulation for the behavior can be used. Beyond that point, and especially after the onset of
yield, nonlinear formulations are required. In general, two ingredients are required to ascertain
material behavior:
1. an initial yield criterion to determine the state of stress at which yielding is considered to begin
2. mathematical rules to explain the post-yielding behavior.
There are two major theories of plastic behavior that address these criterion differently. In the first, called
deformation theory, the plastic strains are uniquely defined by the state of stress. The second theory,
called flow or incremental theory, expresses the increments of plastic strain (irrecoverable strains) as
functions of the current stress, the strain increments, and the stress increments. Incremental theory is
more general and can be adapted in its particulars to fit a variety of material behaviors. The plasticity
models in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are incremental theories, in which the mechanical strain
rate is decomposed into an elastic part and a plastic (inelastic) part through various assumed flow rules.
The incremental plasticity models are formulated in terms of:
A yield surface, which generalizes the concept of yield load into a test function which can be
used to determine if the material will respond purely elastically at a particular state of stress,
temperature, etc.;
A flow rule that defines the inelastic deformation that must occur if the material point is no
in ductile materials.
Pressure-Dependent models - models the behavior of granular (soil and rock) materials or
polymers, in which the yield behavior depends on the equivalent pressure stress.
Linear Mohr-Coulomb
Parabolic Morh-Coulomb
Buyukozturk Concrete
Yield Conditions
The yield stress of a material is a measured stress level that separates the elastic and inelastic behavior of
the material. The magnitude of the yield stress is generally obtained from a uniaxial test. However, the
stresses in a structure are usually multiaxial. A measurement of yielding for the multiaxial state of stress
is called the yield condition. Depending on how the multiaxial state of stress is represented, there can be
many forms of yield conditions. For example, the yield condition can be dependent on all stress
components, on shear components only, or on hydrostatic stress. A number of yield conditions are
available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, and are discussed in this section.
Metal Plasticity
The von Mises yield surface is widely used for plasticity in isotropic metals. It is assumed that the yield
and plastic flow describe isotropic metals at low temperatures where creep effects can be ignored.
Anisotropic metals and composite materials, can be treated by extensions of von Mises yield function, as
described in Hills yield function.
von Mises
The success of the von Mises criterion is due to the continuous nature of the function that defines this
criterion and its agreement with observed behavior for the commonly encountered ductile materials.
The von Mises criterion states that yield occurs when the effective (or equivalent) stress () equals
the yield stress (y) as measured in a uniaxial test. Figure 10-20 shows the von Mises yield surface in
two-dimensional and three-dimensional stress space.
CHAPTER 10 319
Materials
2
Yield
Surface
Yield
Surface
Elastic
Region
1
Elastic
Region
1
(b) -Plane
Figure 10-20
(10-112)
(10-113)
The yield condition can also be expressed in terms of the deviatoric stresses as:
Z
3
JJJ
2 ij ij
where
ij
ij
(10-114)
1
Z i j JJJ k k i j
3
For isotropic material, the von Mises yield condition is the default condition in MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear.
(10-115)
1
1J JJJJJ
1J
JJJJJ
J H JJJJJ
xx yy
2
2
2
F
Fy Fz
x
1
1
1
JJJJJJ JJJJJJ H JJJJJJ x x z z
F 2 F 2 F 2
x
y
z
(10-116)
1
1
1
JJJJJJ H JJJJJJ H JJJJJJ y y z z
F 2 F 2 F 2
x
y
z
y z 2
zx 2
xy 2
+ JJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJ Z 1
F x y
F y z
F z x
Note the following points about Hills surface:
1. It degenerates into von Mises surface when all three direct yield stresses are equal
(Fx = Fy = Fz) and all three shear yield stresses are equal.
2. It is invariant with respect to hydrostatic stress, as is von Mises.
3. Hill's surface, unlike von Mises, is not always an ellipsoid in stress space. When it is not an
ellipsoid, it is not appropriate for use as a yield function (since it does not have an inside and an
outside, thereby dividing stress space into elastic and plastic regions).
Mohr-Coulomb Material (Hydrostatic Stress Dependence)
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear includes options for elastic-plastic behavior based on a yield surface
that exhibits hydrostatic stress dependence. Such behavior is observed in a wide class of soil and
rock-like materials. These materials are generally classified as Mohr-Coulomb materials (generalized
von Mises materials). Ice is also thought to be a Mohr-Coulomb material. The generalized
Mohr-Coulomb model developed by Drucker and Prager is implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear. There are two types of Mohr-Coulomb materials: linear and parabolic. Each is discussed on
the following pages.
CHAPTER 10 321
Materials
f Z J 1 H J 21 2 JJJJJJJ Z 0
3
(10-117)
where
J1 Z i i
(10-118)
1
J 2 Z JJJ
2 ij ij
(10-119)
c Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ X
12
[ 3 ( 1 12 2 ) ]
3
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ Z sin
( 1 3 2 ) 1 2
(10-120)
Yield Envelope
R
c
x + y
2
Figure 10-21
3J 1 ) 1 2 Z 0
(10-121)
Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
( 3 ( 3c 2 2 ) ) 1 2
2
Z 3 c JJJJJJ
(10-122)
x + y
2
Figure 10-22
c2
f Z 3J 1 H J 1 H 3J 2
(10-123)
CHAPTER 10 323
Materials
h~=e~
e~
l~
E
E
E
+4
4
5
6
5 6
2 1
2
(b) von Mises Yield Surface
Figure 10-23
Let 4 be the stress level at point 4. Then, the reverse yield can only take place at a stress level of 4
(point 5).
For many materials, the isotropic workhardening model is inaccurate if unloading occurs (as in cyclic
loading problems). For these problems, the kinematic hardening model or the combined hardening model
represents the material better.
CHAPTER 10 325
Materials
Kinematic Hardening
Under the kinematic hardening rule, the von Mises yield surface does not change in size or shape, but
the center of the yield surface can move in stress space. Figure 10-23d illustrates this condition. Zieglers
law is used to define the translation of the yield surface in the stress space.
The loading path of a uniaxial test is shown in Figure 10-23c. The specimen is loaded in the following
order: from stress free (point 0) to initial yield (point 1), 2 (loading), 3 (unloading), 2 (reloading), 4
(loading), 5 and 6 (unloading). As in isotropic hardening, stress at 1 is equal to the initial yield stress y ,
and stresses at 2 and 4 are higher than y , due to workhardening. Point 3 is elastic, and reverse yield
takes place at point 5. Under the kinematic hardening rule, the reverse yield occurs at the level of
5 Z ( 4 2 y ) , rather than at the stress level of 4 . Similarly, if the specimen is loaded to a higher
stress level 7 (point 7), and then unloaded to the subsequent yield point 8, the stress at point 8 is
8 Z ( 7 2 y ) . If the specimen is unloaded from a (tensile) stress state (such as point 4 and 7), the
reverse yield can occur at a stress state in either the reverse (point 5) or the same (point 8) direction.
For many materials, the kinematic hardening model gives a better representation of loading/unloading
behavior than the isotropic hardening model. For cyclic loading, however, the kinematic hardening
model can represent neither cyclic hardening nor cyclic softening.
Combined Hardening
Figure 10-25 shows a material with highly nonlinear hardening. Here, the initial hardening is assumed to
be almost entirely isotropic, but after some plastic straining, the elastic range attains an essentially
constant value (that is, pure kinematic hardening). The basic assumption of the combined hardening
model is that such behavior is reasonably approximated by a classical constant kinematic hardening
constraint, with the superposition of initial isotropic hardening. The isotropic hardening rate eventually
decays to zero as a function of the equivalent plastic strain measured by
p
Z
dt Z
2p p
JJ3J i j i j
12
(10-124)
dt
c=e~
m=h~
o~
`
e~
o~
f~
b~
o~
f~
v
lJ~=`
b~=o~
h~=pI
P
O
p~
Figure 10-24
This implies a constant shift of the center of the elastic domain, with a growth of elastic domain around
this center until pure kinematic hardening is attained. In this model, there is a variable proportion between
the isotropic and kinematic contributions that depends on the extent of plastic deformation (as measured
p
by ).
The workhardening data at small strains governs the isotropic behavior, and the data at large strains
( p > 1000 ) governs the kinematic hardening behavior. If the last workhardening slope is zero, the
behavior is the same as the isotropic hardening model.
Experimental Determination of Work Hardening Slope
In a uniaxial test, the workhardening slope is defined as the slope of the stress-plastic strain curve. The
workhardening slope relates the incremental stress to incremental plastic strain in the inelastic region and
dictates the conditions of subsequent yielding. A number of workhardening rules (isotropic, kinematic,
and combined) are available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. A description of these workhardening
rules is given below. The uniaxial stress-plastic strain curve can be represented by a piecewise linear
function or through the user subroutine WKSLP . This requires the use of MARCIN to specify the MARC
WORKHARD option.
Stress
2
1
1
Figure 10-25
Workhardening Slopes
E
Strain
CHAPTER 10 327
Materials
Slope
Breakpoint
JJJJJJJJJ1J
p
1
0.0
2
JJJJJJJJJJ
p
2
JJJJJJJJJ3J
p
3
1 H 2
The data points should be based on a plot of the stress versus plastic strain for a tensile test.
The elastic strain components should not be included.
The yield stress and the workhardening data must be compatible with the procedure used in the analysis.
For small strain analyses, the engineering stress and engineering strain are appropriate. If only
PARAM,LGDISP is used, the yield stress should be entered as the second Piola-Kirchhoff stress, and
the workhard data be given with respect to plastic Green-Lagrange strains. If PARAM,LGDISP,1 or 2
are used, the yield stress must be defined as a true or Cauchy stress, and the workhardening data with
respect to logarithmic plastic strains. Engineering stress and strain may be defined and Bulk Data
parameter MRTABLS1 used to provide the program with rules to convert to the proper stress and strain
measures. See MRTABLS1 (p. 755) in the .
Flow Rules
Yield stress and workhardening rules are two experimentally related phenomena that characterize plastic
material behavior. The flow rule is also essential in establishing the incremental stress-strain relations for
p
plastic material. The flow rule describes the differential changes in the plastic strain components d as
a function of the current stress state. So long as a material point is elastic, Hookes law provides a
relationship between total stress and strain. After a material becomes plastic, however, there is no longer
a unique relationship between total stress and strain. The problem then is usually solved incrementally,
following the exact loading path.
For points which are plastic, a flow rule is used to relate increments of stress to plastic strain.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses an associated flow rule, which prescribes that increments of
plastic strain are computed as a constant times the gradient of the yield function.
In other words, considering the yield function as a surface in stress space, the plastic strain increment is
a vector in the direction of the outward normal to the surface at the point where it is touched by the
stresses on the loading path.
(10-125)
(10-126)
F J
d ypz Z JJJJJJJJJJ
y z
F
d zpx Z JJJJJJJJJJ
J
x z
These stress vs. plastic strain equations are analogous to the stress vs. total strain equations of elasticity,
where elastic strains can be computed as the gradient of a strain energy potential function, namely;
U
d i j Z JJJJJJJJJJ
i j
(10-127)
Thus, the yield function F plays the role of a plastic potential. If a theory of plasticity uses something
other than the yield function as a plastic potential, a so-called nonassociated flow rule results.
Nonassociated flow rules are not available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
CHAPTER 10 329
Materials
For the von Mises and modified Hill yield functions programmed in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear,
the derivatives in the yield function are obtained simply by differentiating with respect to individual
components of stress. For example, for the modified Hill function, we have:
2 x x y y
z z
d xpx Z JJJJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJ
J
2
Fx Fy Fx Fz
Fx
x x
2 y y
z z
d ypy Z JJJJJJJJJJJ
J H JJJJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJJ
J
2
Fx Fy
F
Fy
y Fz
xx
y y
2 z z
d zpz Z JJJJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJJ
J H JJJJJJJJJJJ
J
Fx Fz Fy Fz
F z2
x y
d xpy Z JJJJJJJJJ
F x2y
(10-128)
x z
d y2z Z JJJJJJJJJ
F y2z
y z
d zpx Z JJJJJJJJJ
F z2x
The constant in these flow rule equations is evaluated automatically by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
on the basis of material stability during plastic flow (i.e., by the requirement that the stress state remain
on the yield surface during plastic straining).
The Prandtl-Reuss representation of the flow rule is available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. In
conjunction with the von Mises yield function, this can be represented as:
p
d i j Z d p JJJJJJJJJJJJ
ij
(10-129)
where d p and are equivalent plastic strain increment and equivalent stress, respectively.
The significance of this representation is illustrated in Figure 10-26. This figure illustrates the
stress-space for the two-dimensional case. The solid curve gives the yield surface (locus of all stress
states causing yield) as defined by the von Mises criterion.
Equation (10-139) expresses the condition that the direction of inelastic straining is normal to the yield
surface. This condition is called either the normality condition or the associated flow rule.
If the von Mises yield surface is used, then the normal is equal to the deviatoric stress.
p
d2
dp
dp
1
1
Yield Surface
Figure 10-26
i j Z L i jk l k l H r i j
L i jk l Z C i jk l C i jm n JJJJJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJ C p q k l D
mn p q
(10-130)
and
2
(10-131)
where
4
ij
kl
(10-132)
CHAPTER 10 331
Materials
As strain rates increase, many materials show an increase in yield strength. The model provided in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for this purpose is
where:
Z D JJJJJJ 1 for 0
pl
pl
0 ( , T )
D ( T ), p ( T )
pl
Yield stress variation with strain rate is given using one of three options:
1. The breakpoints and slopes for a piecewise linear approximation to the yield stress strain rate
curve are given. The strain rate breakpoints should be in ascending order, or
2. The Cowper and Symonds model is used. The yield behavior is assumed to be completely
determined by one stress-strain curve and a scale factor depending on the strain rate.
Note:
If multiple material models are used, they must all be expressed as piecewise linear, or as
Cowper and Symonds model.
Perfectly Plastic
A material is said to be perfectly plastic if, upon the stress state touching the yield surface, an
infinitesimal increase in stress causes an arbitrarily large plastic strain. The uniaxial stress-strain diagram
for an elastic-perfectly plastic material is shown in Figure 10-27. Some materials, such as mild steel,
behave in a manner which is close to perfectly plastic.
xx
YS
E
1
xx
Figure 10-27
Inelastic
Region
Stress
Yield
Stress
Strain
Elastic Region
Note: Stress and strain are total quantities.
Figure 10-28
CHAPTER 10 333
Materials
Within the elastic region, the stress-strain relationship is unique. As illustrated in , if the stress in the
specimen is increased (loading) from zero (point 0) to 1 (point 1), and then decreased (unloading) to
zero, the strain in the specimen is also increased from zero to 1 , and then returned to zero. The elastic
strain is completely recovered upon the release of stress in the specimen.
The loading-unloading situation in the inelastic region is different from the elastic behavior. If the
specimen is loaded beyond yield to point 2, where the stress in the specimen is 2 and the total strain is
e
2
2 , upon release of the stress in the specimen the elastic strain, , is completely recovered. However,
p
the inelastic (plastic) strain, 2 , remains in the specimen. Figure 10-29 illustrates this relationship.
Similarly, if the specimen is loaded to point 3 and then unloaded to zero stress state, the plastic strain
p
p
3
p
2
3 remains in the specimen. It is obvious that is not equal to . We can conclude that in the
inelastic region:
Plastic strain permanently remains in the specimen upon removal of stress.
The amount of plastic strain remaining in the specimen is dependent upon the stress level at
Yield Stress
y
1
0
2
p
2
p
3
Strain
2 Z 2 H 2
2e
Figure 10-29
3 Z 3 H 3
e
3
Total Stress
Plastic Strain
H = tan (Workhardening Slope)
= d/dp
Figure 10-30
The stress-strain curve shown in Figure 10-29 is directly plotted from experimental data. It can be
simplified for the purpose of numerical modeling. A few simplifications are shown in Figure 10-31 and
are listed below:
1. Bilinear representation constant workhardening slope.
2. Elastic perfectly-plastic material no workhardening.
3. Perfectly-plastic material no workhardening and no elastic response.
4. Piecewise linear representation multiple constant workhardening slopes.
5. Strain-softening material negative workhardening slope.
In addition to elastic material constants (Youngs modulus and Poissons ratio), it is essential to include
yield stress and workhardening slopes when dealing with inelastic (plastic) material behavior. These
quantities can vary with parameters such as temperature and strain rate. Since the yield stress is generally
measured from uniaxial tests, and the stresses in real structures are usually multiaxial, the yield condition
of a multiaxial stress state must be considered. The conditions of subsequent yield (workhardening rules)
must also be studied.
CHAPTER 10 335
Materials
Figure 10-31
Geological Materials
Data for geological materials are most commonly available from triaxial compression testing. In such a
test, the specimen is confined by pressure and an additional compression stress is superposed in one
direction. Thus, the principal stresses are all negative, with 0 1 Z 2 3 .
-1
-3
1=2>3
1
Figure 10-32
1>2=3
hc
ht
d
p
Figure 10-33
CHAPTER 10 337
Materials
(10-133)
Using the results above (for the stress invariants p, q, and r), in triaxial compression and tension, allows
the Drucker-Prager model to be written for triaxial compression as
1
1 JJJ tan
0
tan
3
1 3 H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ( 1 H 3 ) H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ c Z 0
1
2 H 1
1 H JJJ tan
JJJ tan
6
3
and, for triaxial tension, as
(10-134)
1
1 JJJ tan
0
tan
3
1 3 H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ( 1 H 3 ) H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ c Z 0
1
2 1
JJJ
JJJJ 1
JJJ tan
J JJJ tan
K 3
K 6
(10-135)
We wish to make the equations for triaxial compression and biaxial tension identical to the general
Mohr-Coulomb equation for all values of (1,3).
Comparing the equations for triaxial compression and triaxial tension requires that:
1
1 1
1 H JJJ tan Z JJJ
J JJJ tan
6
K 6
(10-136)
so that
1
K Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
1
1 H JJJ tan
3
(10-137)
Comparing the coefficients of (1+3) in the equation for triaxial compression and that for triaxial
tension provides:
6 sin
tan JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
3 sin
(10-138)
(10-139)
Finally, comparing the last terms in the general expression for the Mohr-Coulomb model and the equation
for triaxial compression and using the expression for tan provides:
0
2c cos J
c Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
1 sin
(10-140)
The expression for tan, K, and this last expression and thus provide Drucker-Prager parameters that
match the Mohr-Coulomb model in triaxial compression and tension.
The value of K in the Drucker-Prager model is restricted to K 0.778 for the yield surface to remain
convex. Rewriting the expression for K as:
1K
sin Z 3 JJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
1 H k
(10-141)
shows that this implies 22 . Many real materials have a larger Mohr-Coulomb friction angle than
this value. In such circumstances, one approach is to choose K = 0.778 and then to use the expression for
0
0
tan to define and the expression for c to define c , ignoring the expression for K. This matches the
CHAPTER 10 339
Materials
models for triaxial compression only, while providing the closest approximation that the model can
provide to failure being independent of the intermediate principal stress. If is significantly larger than
22, this approach may provide a poor Drucker-Prager match of the Mohr-Coulomb parameters.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear uses K=1 by default.
Matching Plane Strain Response
Plane strain problems are often encountered in geotechnical analysis: examples are long tunnels,
footings, and embankments. For this reason, the constitutive model parameters are often matched to
provide the same flow and failure response in plane strain.
The Drucker-Prager flow potential defines the plastic strain increment as:
pl
where
pl
1
Z d JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ( t p tan )
1 JJJ tan
3
d
pl
(10-142)
Since we only wish to match the behavior in one plane we can assume K=1, which implies that t=q. Then:
pl
pl
1
p
Z d JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ q tan
1
1 JJJ tan
3
(10-143)
pl
pl
1
1
1
d 1 Z d JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJ ( 2 1 2 3 ) H JJJ tan
2q
1
3
1 JJJ tan
3
(10-144)
pl
pl
with similar expressions for d 2 and d 3 .
pl
Assume plane strain in the 1-direction. Then, at limit load, we must have d 1 =0. From the above
expression, this provides the constraint:
1
1
JJJJJJ ( 2 ) H JJJ tan Z 0
1
2
3
2q
3
(10-145)
so that:
1
1
1 Z JJJ ( 2 H 3 ) JJJ tan q
3
2
(10-146)
Using this constraint, we can rewrite q and p in terms of the principal stresses in the plane of deformation,
3 3
q Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ( 2 3 )
2
2 9 ( tan )
(10-147)
and
tan
1
p Z JJJ ( 2 H 3 ) H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ( 2 3 )
2
2
2 3 ( 9 ( tan ) )
(10-148)
With these expressions, the Drucker-Prager yield surface can be written in terms of 2 and 3 as
1
9 tan tan
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ( ) H JJJ tan ( H ) d Z 0
2
3
2
3
2
2
2 3 ( 9 ( tan ) )
(10-149)
(10-150)
By comparison,
2
tan 3 ( 9 ( tan ) )
sin Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
9 tan tan
(10-151)
2
3 ( 9 ( tan ) )
c cos Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ d
9 tan tan
(10-152)
Now consider the two extreme cases of flow definition: associated flow, =, and nondilatant flow, when
=0.
Assuming associated flow, the last two equations provide:
3 sin
tan Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
2
1
1 H JJJ ( sin )
3
(10-153)
and
d Z
3 cos
JJJ
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
c
2
1
1 H JJJ ( sin )
3
while for nondilatant flow they give tan Z
(10-154)
d
3 sin and JJJ Z cos
c
CHAPTER 10 341
Materials
0
In either case, c is immediately available as:
0
1
c Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ d
1
1 JJJ tan
3
(10-155)
The difference between these two approaches increases with the friction angle but, for typical friction
angles, the results are not very different, as illustrated in the table below.
Mohr-Coulomb
Friction Angle,
10
20
30
40
50
Associated Flow
Drucker-Prager
friction angle,
16.7
30.2
39.8
46.2
50.5
d/c
1.70
1.60
1.44
1.24
1.02
Nondilatant Flow
Drucker-Prager friction
angle,
16.7
30.6
40.9
48.1
53.0
d/c
1.70
1.63
1.50
1.33
1.11
Temperature-Dependent Behavior
This section discusses the effects of temperature-dependent plasticity on the constitutive relation.
The following constitutive relations for thermo-plasticity were developed by Naghdi. Temperature
effects are discussed using the isotropic hardening model and the von Mises yield condition.
The stress rate can be expressed in the form
i j Z L i jk l k l H h i j T
(10-156)
L i jk l Z C i jk l C i jm n JJJJJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJ C p q k l D
mn p q
and for purely elastic response
(10-157)
L i jk l Z C i jk l
(10-158)
The term that relates the stress increment to the increment of temperature for elastic-plastic behavior is
2
h i j Z X i j C i j k l k l C i jk l JJJJJJJJJJJ p q X p q JJJ JJJJJJJ D
k l
3 T
(10-159)
(10-160)
where
4
D Z JJJ 2 JJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJJJ C i jk l JJJJJJJJJJJ
k l
9
p i j
(10-161)
and
C i jk l e
X i j Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
T k l
(10-162)
CHAPTER 10 343
Materials
subcase 3
temp(load)=13
LOAD = 300
BEGIN BULK
param,mrafflow,mymat0
param,mrtabls1,4
param,mrtabls2,1
NLPARM
2
10
AUTO
1
20
P
PARAM,LGDISP,1
tempd, 10, 70.
tempd, 11, 110.
tempd, 12, 700.
tempd, 13, 1100.
$LOAD, 20, 1.0, 2.0, 1, 1.0, 2
load, 100, 1., 1., 1
load, 200, 1., -.5, 1
load, 300, 1., 1.1, 1
PLOAD4
1
1
-15.
.
.
.
$ Constraint Set 1 : Untitled
SPC
1
1 123456
0.
SPC
1
8 123456
0.
SPC
1
15 123456
0.
SPC
1
22 123456
0.
SPC
1
29 123456
0.
$ Property 1 : Untitled
PSHELL
1
1
0.125
1
1
0.
$ Material 1 : AISI 4340 Steel
MATEP, 1,TABLE, 35000., 2,CAUCHY,ISOTROP,ADDMEAN
MAT1
1 2.9E+7
0.327.331E-4 6.6E-6
70.
+MT
+MT
1 215000. 240000. 156000.
MAT4
14.861E-4
38.647.331E-4
$
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
$2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678
MATTEP
1
21
MATT1
1
7
TABLEM1
7
+
70.0
6.6E-6
1000. 6.5E-6
1200. 6.4E-6 1500.
6.3E-6
+
2000.
6.2E-6
ENDT
$2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678 2345678
TABLEST
21
+
70.0
31
1000.
32
1200.
33
1500.
34
+
2000.
35
ENDT
TABLES1, 31
, 0., 15000., 1.0, 16000., 10., 25000., 100., 30000.,
, 99999., 40000., ENDT
TABLES1, 32
, 0., 13000., 1.0, 14000., 10., 23000., 100., 28000.,
, 99999., 28000., ENDT
TABLES1, 33
, 0., 11000., 1.0, 12000., 10., 21000., 100., 26000.,
, 99999., 25000., ENDT
TABLES1, 34
, 0., 9000., 1.0, 10000., 10., 19000., 100., 22000.,
, 99999., 24000., ENDT
TABLES1, 35
, 0., 5000., 1.0, 7000., 10., 9000., 100., 13000.,
, 99999., 15000., ENDT
GRID
.
.
.
CQUAD4
.
.
.
ENDDATA
0.
0.
0.
In this input, the stress strain curves are specified by TABLES1 entries. The collection of stress-strain
curves to be used is specified in the TABLEST entry and the corresponding temperatures at which they
apply is specified in the TABLEM1 entry. The TABLEM1 ID is called out in field 7 of the MATT1 entry
and the TABLEST ID is called out in field 5 of the MATTEP entry. TABLEST must list the stress strain
TABLES1 IDs in order of increasing temperature and the first ID must be at the lowest temperature
specified anywhere in the analysis. In this example, it is a temperature of 70 corresponding to
temp(init)=10 in the Case Control. Similarly, the temperatures in the TABLEM1 entry must be in
increasing order. The stress-strain curves should cover the entire range of temperatures for the analysis
so that no extrapolation is needed. The actual temperatures for each subcase are given by the temp(load)
specifications for each subcase.
There is one parameter that is critical to this analysis:
param,mrafflow,mymat0
Description
Specifies elasto-plastic material properties to be used for large
deformation analysis.
Specifies temperature-dependent elasto-plastic material properties to be used
for static, quasi-static, or transient dynamic analysis.
References
MATEP (SOL 600), 1539 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
MATTEP (SOL 600), 1596 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
CHAPTER 10 345
Materials
Mohr-Coulomb
Drucker-Prager
Strain Rate
Method
Piecewise
Linear
Cowper-
Symonds
Parabolic Mohr-
Coulomb
Buyukozturk Concrete
Oak Ridge National
Lab
2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL
Reversed Plasticity
ORNL
Full Alpha Reset
ORNL
Hardening Slope
Isotropic
von Mises
Kinematic
Tresca
Combined
Mohr-Coulomb
Drucker-Prager
None
Strain Rate
Method
Piecewise
Linear
Linear Mohr-Coulomb
Cowper Parabolic MohrSymonds
Coulomb
Buyukozturk Concrete
Oak Ridge National
Lab
2-1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL
Reversed Plasticity
ORNL
Full Alpha Reset
ORNL
Power Law
Rate Power Law
Johnson-Cook
Kumar
Piecewise
Linear
None
Piecewise
Linear
Cowper-
Symonds
Nonlinear Data Input
The type of nonlinear data input you choose to use to define elastoplastic material behavior determines
the input data required for the Input Properties subform on the Materials Application form.
Stress/Strain Curve - All stress-strain curves are input as piecewise linear. MSC.Patran transfers
the stress-strain curve input on the material property field directly to the TABLES1 entry.
The number of linear segments used to define the stress-strain curve may be different from one
material to another. The same strain breakpoints need not be used for all of the different
materials stress-strain curves. It is recommended to define the stress-strain curves throughout
the range of strains which the analysis is likely to predict. If the analysis predicts a plastic strain
greater than the last point defined by the user, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear continues the
analysis after shifting the last strain breakpoint on that curve to match the predicted value,
thereby changing (reducing) the work hardening slope for the last segment of the curve.
Hardening Slope - The hardening slope and the yield point are required with this Nonlinear Data
Input option.
Perfectly Plastic - Perfect plasticity is described by simply specifying the yield point.
CHAPTER 10 347
Materials
The tables below provide descriptions for the input data for each of the four types of nonlinear input.
Isotropic - Stress/Strain Curve or Perfectly Plastic:
All Yield Functions
Property Name
Description
Defines the Cauchy stress vs. logarithmic strain (also called equivalent
tensile stress versus total equivalent strain) by reference to a tabular
field. The field is selected from the Field Definition list. The field is
created using the Fields application. See Fields Create (Spatial, Tabular
Input) (p. 153) in the MSC Patran Reference Manual, Part 5:
Functional Assignments. For Perfectly Plastic models, only a Yield
Stress needs to be entered.
or
Yield Stress
When set to ORNL, accepts field of 10th cycle yield stress vs. plastic
strain. Can be temperature dependent also. For Perfectly Plastic
models, only a 10th Cycle Yield Stress needs to be entered.
or
10th Cycle Yield Stress
Coefficient C
Inverse Exponent P
Alpha
Beta
Note:
2 1/4 Cr-Mo ORNL, Reversed Plasticity ORNL, Full Alpha Reset ORNL are the same as
Oak Ridge National Labs. Generalized Plasticity is the same as von Mises.
Perfectly Plastic is identical to Stress/Strain except that no hardening rules apply.
Stress 11/22/33 Yield Ratios Defines the ratios of direct yield stresses to the isotropic yield stress in
the elements coordinate system.
Stress 12/23/31 Yield Ratios Defines the ratios of shear yield stresses to the isotropic shear yield
stress (yield divided by square root three) in the elements
coordinate system.
Note:
Perfectly Plastic is identical to Elastic-Plastic except that no hardening rules apply. Stress
vs Plastic Strain is replaced with Yield Stress data only as is 10th Cycle Yield vs. Strain
replaced with 10th Cycle Yield Stress data. Thus no tabular data is necessary.
Description
Hardening Slope
Yield Point
CHAPTER 10 349
Materials
Maximum Stress
Maximum Strain
2-D Orthotropic
Hill
Hoffman
Tsai-Wu
1.
2.
1
JJJJJJJ F
X t
if
1
JJJJJJJ F
X c
if
2
JJJJJJ F
Yt
1 > 0
(10-163)
if
1 < 0
2 > 0
(10-164)
2
JJJJJJ F
Y c
if
2 < 0
3.
JJJJJ3J F
Zt
if
3 > 0
(10-165)
JJJJJ3J F
Z
if
3 < 0
1 2J F
4. JJJJJJJJ
S 12
(10-166)
23J F
5. JJJJJJJ
S 23
(10-167)
31J F
6. JJJJJJJ
S 31
(10-168)
where
F
X t, X c
are the maximum allowable stresses in the 1-direction in tension and compression.
Y t, Y c
Z t, Z c
S 12
S 23
S 31
1.
1
JJJJJJ
J F
e 1 t
if
1 > 0
(10-169)
1
JJJJJJJ
F
e
1c
if
1 < 0
CHAPTER 10 351
Materials
2
JJJJJJ
J F
e 2 t
2.
if
2 > 0
(10-170)
2
JJJJJJJ
F
e
if
2 < 0
3
JJJJJJ
J F
e 3 t
if
3 > 0
3
JJJJJJJ
F
e
if
2c
3.
(10-171)
3 < 0
3c
12J F
4. JJJJJJJ
g 12
(10-172)
2 3J F
5. JJJJJJJ
g 23
(10-173)
31J F
6. JJJJJJJ
g 31
(10-174)
where
F
e 1 t, e 1 c
are the maximum allowable strains in the 1 direction in tension and compression.
e 2 t, e 2 c
are the maximum allowable strains in the 2 direction in tension and compression.
e 3 t, e 3 c
are the maximum allowable strains in the 3 direction in tension and compression.
g 12
g 23
g 31
(10-175)
1 1 2 2 12
JJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJJ F
2
X2
Y 2 S 12
X2
(10-176)
where
X
are as before
[ C1 ( 2 3 ) H C2 ( 3 1 ) H C3 ( 1 2 ) H C4 1 H C5 2
2 H C 2 H C 2 ] F
H C 6 3 H C 7 23
8 13
9 12
with
(10-177)
CHAPTER 10 353
Materials
1 1
1 1
H JJJJJJJJJJJJ
C 1 Z JJJ JJJJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJJJJ
2 Z t Z c Y t Y c X t X c
1 1
1
1
C 2 Z JJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJ
2 X t X c Z t Z c Y t Y c
1 1
1
1
C 3 Z JJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJ
2 Xt Xc Yt Yc Zt Zc
1
1
C 4 Z JJJJJ JJJJJJ
Xt Xc
1
1
C 5 Z JJJJJ JJJJJJ
Yt Yc
(10-178)
1
1
C 6 Z JJJJJ JJJJJJ
Zt Zc
1
C 7 Z JJJJJJJJ
2
S 23
1
C 8 Z JJJJJJJJ
2
S 13
1
C 9 Z JJJJJJJ
J
2
S 12
For plane stress condition, it becomes
2
2
12 1 2
1
1
1
1
1
J JJJJJJJJJJJJJ F
JJJJJ JJJJJJ 1 H JJJJJ JJJJJJ 2 H JJJJJJJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJ
2
Yt Yc
X t X c Y t Y c S 12
Xt Xc
Xt Xc
(10-179)
Note:
1
For small ratios of, for example, JJJJJJ , the Hoffman criteria can become negative due to the
Xt
presence of the linear terms.
22
32
12
1
1
1
1
1
1
JJJJJ
JJJJJJ 1 H JJJJJ JJJJJJ 2 H JJJJJ JJJJJJ 3 H JJJJJJJJJJJJ
J H JJJJJJJJJJJJ
J H JJJJJJJJJJJ
X X
Y Y
Z Z
Xt Xc Yt Yc Zt Zc
t
c
t
c
t
c
2
2
2
23
13
12
H JJJJJJJ
J H JJJJJJJJ
H JJJJJJJJ
H 2F 12 1 2 H 2F 23 2 3 H 2F 13 1 3 ] F
2
2
2
S 12
S 23
S 13
(10-180)
F 12
F 23
F 13
2
1 2
1
1
1
1
1
JJJJJ JJJJJJ 1 H JJJJJJJ JJJJJJ 2 H JJJJJJJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJJ H 2F 12 1 2 F
X t X c Y t Y c S 12
Y2 Yc
Xt Xc
Note:
(10-181)
1
1
2 < JJJJJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJJ
F 23
Yt Yc Zt Zc
1
1
2 < JJJJJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJJ
F 31
Xt Xc Zt Zc
See Wu, R.Y. and Stachurski, 2, Evaluation of the Normal Stress Interaction Parameter in the Tensor
Polynomial Strength Theory for Anisotropic Materials, Journal of Composite Materials, Vol. 18, Sept.
1984, pp. 456-463.
Interlaminar Shear for Thick Shell and Beam Elements
Calculation of interlaminar shear stress (a parabolic distribution through the thickness direction) for thick
shells and beams is available. These interlaminar shears are printed in the local coordinate system above
and below each layer selected for printing. These values are also available for postprocessing.
PARAM,MRTSHEAR,1 must be used for activating the parabolic shear distribution calculations.
In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, the distribution of transverse shear strains through the thickness for
thick shell and beam elements was assumed to be constant. From basic strength of materials and the
equilibrium of a beam cross section, it is known that the actual distribution is more parabolic in nature.
As an additional option, the formulations for certain beam and shell elements have been modified to
include a parabolic distribution of transverse shear strain. The formulation is exact for MSC.Marc beam
element 45, but is approximate for MSC.Marc thick shell elements 22, 75, and 140. Nevertheless, the
CHAPTER 10 355
Materials
approximation is expected to give improved results from the previous constant shear distribution.
Furthermore, interlaminar shear stresses for composite beams and shells can be easily calculated.
1
With the assumption that the stresses in the V and V direction are uncoupled, the equilibrium
condition through the thickness is given by
( z ) ( z )
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ Z 0
z
x
(10-182)
where ( z ) is the layer axial stress; ( t ) is the layer shear stress. From beam theory, we have
M
V H JJJJJJJJ Z 0
x
(10-183)
where M is the section bending moment and V is the shear force. Assuming that
( z ) Z f ( z )M
(10-184)
by taking the derivative of Equation (10-184) with respect to x, substituting the result into
Equation (10-182), using Equation (10-183) and integrating, we obtain
(z) Z
f ( z )dz V
(10-185)
(10-186)
is the layer initial Youngs modulus, z is the location of the neutral axis and EI is the
section bending moment of inertia. Equation (10-186) and Equation (10-184) express
the usual bending relation
Mz
( z ) Z JJJJJJJJ
I
(10-187)
except that these two equations are written so that the z Z 0 axis is not necessarily the neutral axis of
bending. With respect to this axis, membrane and bending action is, in general, coupled. Note that
zE ( z )dz
z
z Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J
E ( z )dz
z
(10-188)
Description
MATF
Specifies failure model properties for linear elastic materials to be used for
static, quasi static or transient dynamic analysis in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
References
MATF (SOL 600), 1551 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
2. Click on Input Properties.... , and choose Failure from the Constitutive Model pull-down menu.
3. If the failure model applies to a 2-D orthotropic material, you can select Stress or Strain from the
Failure Limit pull-down menu.
CHAPTER 10 357
Materials
Property Name
Description
Compression Stress Limit Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in the elements
coordinate system. Absolute values are used.
Shear Stress Limit
Property Name
Description
Compression Stress (Strain) Limit 11 Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in direction 1
of the elements coordinate system. Absolute values are used.
Compression Stress (Strain) Limit 22 Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in direction 2
of the elements coordinate system. Absolute values are used.
Shear Stress (Strain) Limit
Interaction Term
Property Name
Description
Compression Stress Limit Defines the compression stress (or strain) limits in the elements
coordinate system. Absolute values are used.
Shear Stress Limit
Damage Models
In many structural applications, the finite element method is used to predict failure. This is often
performed by comparing the calculated solution to some failure criteria, or by using classical
fracture mechanics.
Ductile Metals
In ductile materials given the appropriate loading conditions, voids will form in the material, grow, then
coalesce, leading to crack formation and potentially, failure. Experimental studies have shown that these
processes are strongly influenced by hydrostatic stress. Gurson studied microscopic voids in materials
and derived a set of modified constitutive equations for elastic-plastic materials. Tvergaard and
CHAPTER 10 359
Materials
Needleman modified the model with respect to the behavior for small void volume fractions and for
void coalescence.
In the modified Gurson model, the amount of damage is indicated with a scalar parameter called the
void volume fraction f. The yield criterion for the macroscopic assembly of voids and matrix material is
given by:
q 2 k k
2
F Z JJJJJJ H 2q 1 f cosh JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ [ 1 H ( q 1 f ) 2 ] Z 0
y
2 y
(10-189)
f* Z 0
f * f u* = 0.01
0.5
0.9
0
Figure 10-34
0.6
0.3
0.1
4 k k 3 M
The parameter q 1 was introduced by Tvergaard to improve the Gurson model at small values of the void
volume fraction. For solids with periodically spaced voids, numerical studies [10] showed that the values
of q 1 Z 1.5 and q 2 Z 1 were quite accurate.
The evolution of damage as measured by the void volume fraction is due to void nucleation and growth.
Void nucleation occurs by debonding of second phase particles. The strain for nucleation depends on the
particle sizes. Assuming a normal distribution of particle sizes, the nucleation of voids is itself modeled
as a normal distribution in the strains, if nucleation is strain controlled. If void nucleation is assumed to
be stress controlled in the matrix, a normal distribution is assumed in the stresses. The original Gurson
model predicts that ultimate failure occurs when the void volume fraction f, reaches unity. This is too
high a value and, hence, the void volume fraction f is replaced by the modified void volume fraction f
in the yield function.
The parameter f is introduced to model the rapid decrease in load carrying capacity if void
coalescence occurs.
f Z f
if f c
f u* f c
f Z f c H JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ ( f f c )
f F f c
if f > fc
(10-190)
where fc is the critical void volume fraction, and f F is the void volume at failure, and f u* Z 1 q 1 . A
safe choice for f F would be a value greater than ( 1 q 1 ) namely, f F Z 1.1 q 1 . Hence, you can control
the void volume fraction, f F , at which the solid loses all stress carrying capability.
Numerical studies show that plasticity starts to localize between voids at void volume fractions as low as
0.1 to 0.2. You can control the void volume fraction f c , beyond which void-void interaction is modeled
by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. Based on the classical studies, a value of f c Z 0.2 can be chosen.
The existing value of the void volume fraction changes due to the growth of existing voids and due to the
nucleation of new voids.
f Z fg r o w t h H fn u c l e a t i o n
(10-191)
The growth of voids can be determined based upon compressibility of the matrix material surrounding
the void.
p
f g r o w t h Z ( 1 f ) k k
(10-192)
As mentioned earlier, the nucleation of new voids can be defined as either strain or stress controlled. Both
follow a normal distribution about a mean value.
In the case of strain controlled nucleation, this is given by
p
2
fN
p
1 m n
f n u c l e a t i o n Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJ exp JJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ m
2 S
S 2
(10-193)
where f N is the volume fraction of void forming particles, n the mean strain for void nucleation and S
the standard deviation.
In the case of stress controlled nucleation, the rate of nucleation is given by:
2
1
H JJJ k k n
1
fN
1
3
f n u c l e a t i o n Z JJJJJJJJJJJJJJ exp JJJ JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ * H JJJ k k
S
3
2
S 2
(10-194)
If the second phase particle sizes in the solid are widely varied in size, the standard deviation would be
larger than in the case when the particle sizes are more uniform. The MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
CHAPTER 10 361
Materials
user can also input the volume fraction of the nucleating second phase void nucleating particles in the
input deck, as the variable f N .
A typical set of values for an engineering alloy is given by Tvergaard for strain controlled nucleation as
n Z 0.30 ; f N Z 0.04 ; S Z 0.01
(10-195)
It must be remarked that the determination of the three above constants from experiments is extremely
difficult. The modeling of the debonding process must itself be studied including the effect of differing
particle sizes in a matrix. It is safe to say that such an experimental study is not possible. The above three
constants must necessarily be obtained by intuition keeping in mind the meaning of the terms.
When the material reaches 90 percent of f F , the material is considered to be failed. At this point, the
stiffness and the stress at this element are reduced to zero.
Elastomers
Under repeated application of loads, elastomers undergo damage by mechanisms involving chain
breakage, multi-chain damage, micro-void formation, and micro-structural degradation due to
detachment of filler particles from the network entanglement. Two types of phenomenological models
namely, discontinuous and continuous, exists to simulate the phenomenon of damage.
Discontinuous Damage
The discontinuous damage model simulates the Mullins effect as shown in Figure 10-35.
Figure 10-35
Discontinuous Damage
This involves a loss of stiffness below the previously attained maximum strain. The higher the maximum
attained strain, the larger is the loss of stiffness. Upon reloading, the uniaxial stress-strain curve remains
insensitive to prior behavior at strains above the previously attained maximum in a cyclic test. Hence,
there is a progressive stiffness loss with increasing maximum strain amplitude. Also, most of the stiffness
loss takes place in the few earliest cycles provided the maximum strain level is not increased. This
phenomenon is found in both filled as well as natural rubber although the higher levels of carbon black
particles increase the hysteresis and the loss of stiffness. The free energy, W, can be written as:
W Z K ( , )W
(10-196)
Z max ( W )
(10-197)
determines the evolution of the discontinuous damage. The reduced form of Clausius-Duhem dissipation
inequality yields the stress as:
0
W
S Z 2K ( I ) JJJJJJJJJJJ
C
(10-198)
Mathematically, the discontinuous damage model has a structure very similar to that of strain space
plasticity. Hence, if a damage surface is defined as:
Z W0
(10-199)
The loading condition for damage can be expressed in terms of the Kuhn-Tucker conditions:
Z 0
(10-200)
K W
W
W
C Z 4 K JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ H JJJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJ JJJJJJJJJJJ
C
CC W 0 C
(10-201)
Continuous Damage
The continuous damage model can simulate the damage accumulation for strain cycles for which the
values of effective energy is below the maximum attained value of the past history as shown in
Figure 10-36.
CHAPTER 10 363
Materials
Figure 10-36
Continuous Damage
This model can be used to simulate fatigue behavior. More realistic modeling of fatigue would require a
departure from the phenomenological approach to damage. The evolution of continuous damage
parameter is governed by the arc length of the effective strain energy as:
t
0
JJJJJJJ W ( s ) ds
s
(10-202)
K ( , ) Z d H
n Z 1
2
K ( , ) Z d H
n Z 1
dn
exp JJJJJJ H
n
n Z 1
d n exp JJJJJ
n
(10-203)
H n
d n exp JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
(10-204)
is not defined, it
is automatically determined such that, at zero values of and , the Kachanov factor K Z 1 . If,
according to Equation (10-203) or Equation (10-204) the value of K exceeds 1, K is set back to 1.
The above damage model is available for deviatoric behavior. In addition, viscoelastic behavior can be
included. Finally, the user subroutine, UELDAM available starting in version 2005, can be used to define
damage functions different from Equation (10-211) to Equation (10-214).
The parameters required for the continuous or discontinuous damage model can be obtained using the
experimental data fitting option in Mentat.
Specifying Hyperelastic Damage Model Entries
The hyperelastic damage model described above can be selected with the MATHED Bulk Data entry.
Entry
MATHED
Description
Specifies damage model properties for hyperelastic materials to be used for
static, quasi static or transient dynamic analysis in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear (SOL 600) only.
References
MATHED (SOL 600), 1565 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
CHAPTER 10 365
Materials
Creep
Creep is an important factor in elevated-temperature stress analysis. In MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear,
creep is represented by a Maxwell model. Creep is a time-dependent, inelastic behavior, and can occur
at any stress level (that is, either below or above the yield stress of a material). The creep behavior can
be characterized as primary, secondary, and tertiary creep, as shown in Figure 10-39. Engineering
analysis is often limited to the primary and secondary creep regions. Tertiary creep in a uniaxial
specimen is usually associated with geometric instabilities, such as necking. The major difference
between the primary and secondary creep is that the creep strain rate is much larger in the primary creep
region than it is in the secondary creep region. The creep strain rate is the slope of the creep strain-time
curve. The creep strain rate is generally dependent on stress, temperature, and time.
The creep data can be specified in either an exponent form or in a piecewise linear curve.
d cJ
c Z JJJJJJJ
dt
(10-205)
Creep Strain
C
Tertiary
Creep
Secondary
Creep
Primary
Creep
Time (t)
Note:
Figure 10-37
Creep Strain Versus Time (Uniaxial Test at Constant Stress and Temperature)
dk ( t )
Z A f ( ) g ( c ) h ( T ) JJJJJJJJJJJJJ
dt
(10-206)
c
c
where A is a constant; is equivalent creep strain rate; and , , T , and t are equivalent
stress, equivalent creep strain, temperature and time, respectively. The functions f , g , h , and k
are piecewise linear. This representation is shown in Figure 10-40. (Any of the functions ( f , g ,
h , or k ) can be set to unity by setting the number of piecewise linear slopes for that relation to
zero on the input data.)
2. The dependence of equivalent creep strain rate on any independent parameter can be given
directly in power law form by the appropriate exponent. The equivalent creep strain rate is
Z A m ( ) T p ( qt q 1 )
(10-207)
This is often adequate for engineering metals at constant temperature where Nortons rule is a
good approximation.
Z A n
(10-208)
3. Use the MATEP material to activate the ORNL (Oak Ridge National Laboratory rules) capability
of the program.
Isotropic creep behavior is based on a von Mises creep potential described by the equivalent
creep law
Z f ( ,
c, T, t )
(10-209)
F4
F3
Function F (X)
[Such as t ( ) ,
F2
S3
S2
g ( ) , h (T),
k (t)]
S1
F1
X1
X2
X3
X4
Figure 10-38
CHAPTER 10 367
Materials
c
ij
Z c JJJJJJJJJJ
i j
(10-210)
During creep, the creep strain rate usually decreases. This effect is called creep hardening and can be a
function of time or creep strain. The following section discusses the difference between these two types
of hardening.
Consider a simple power law that illustrates the difference between time and strain-hardening rules for
the calculation of the creep strain rate.
Z t n
(10-211)
where is the creep strain, and n are values obtained from experiments and t is time. The creep rate
c
Z d
JJJJJJJJ Z nt n 1
dt
(10-212)
t Z JJJJJ
(10-213)
c ((n 1 ) n)
Z nt n 1 Z n ( 1 n ( )
(10-214)
Equation (10-213) shows that the creep strain rate is a function of time (time hardening).
Equation (10-214) indicates that the creep strain rate is dependent on the creep strain (strain hardening).
The creep strain rates calculated from these two hardening rules generally are different. The selection of
a hardening rule in creep analysis must be based on data obtained from experimental results.
Figure 10-41 and Figure 10-42 show time and strain hardening rules in a variable state of stress. It is
assumed that the stress in a structure varies from 1 to 2 to 3 ; depending upon the model chosen,
different creep strain rates are calculated accordingly at points 1, 2, 3, and 4. Obviously, creep strain
rates obtained from the time hardening rule are quite different from those obtained by the strain
hardening rule.
1
2
1
4
2
0
Figure 10-39
Time Hardening
1
2
3
1
0
t
Figure 10-40
Strain Hardening
CHAPTER 10 369
Materials
ee
evp
Plastic Element
Inactive if < y
Figure 10-41
Z A
c n
P
q1
( ) T qt
(10-215)
where i j is the deviatoric stress at the end of the increment and y is the back stress. A is a function
of temperature, time, etc. Creep only occurs if sigma is greater y .
One of three tangent matrices may be formed. The first uses an elastic tangent, which requires more
iterations, but can be computationally efficient because re-assembly might not be required. The second
uses an algorithmic tangent that provides the best behavior for small strain power law creep. The third
uses a secant (approximate) tangent that gives the best behavior for general viscoplastic models.
Description
MATVP
References
MATVP (SOL 600), 1613 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Description
Coefficient
Exponent of Temperature
Exponent of Stress
CHAPTER 10 371
Materials
Isotropic-Anisotropic-Orthotropic
Description
Exponent of Time
Back Stress
Composite
Composite materials are composed of a mixture of two or more constituents, giving them mechanical and
thermal properties which can be significantly better than those of homogeneous metals, polymers and
ceramics.
Laminate composite materials are based on layering homogeneous materials using one of several
methods. In order to define a laminate composite material, you must define the homogeneous materials
that form the layers, the thickness of each layer, and the orientation angle of the layers relative to the
standard coordinate axis being used for the model. The orientation is particularly important for
orthotropic and anisotropic materials, whose properties vary in different directions. The material in each
layer may be either linear or nonlinear. Tightly bonded layers (layered materials) are often stacked in the
thickness direction of beam, plate, shell structures, or solids.
CHAPTER 10 373
Materials
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Figure 10-42
Figure 10-43 shows the location of integration points through the thickness of continuum elements.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear forms the element stiffness matrix by performing numerical integration
based on the standard isoparametric concept.
*
*
*
*
Figure 10-43
*
*
*
*
Integration Points through the Thickness of Continuum Elements
Description
PCOMP
The stacking direction for 3-D composite solids was added with a new entry, MSTACK.
Gasket
Engine gaskets are used to seal the metal parts of the engine to prevent steam or gas from escaping. They
are complex (often multi-layer) components, usually rather thin and typically made of several different
materials of varying thickness. The gaskets are carefully designed to have a specific behavior in the
thickness direction. This is to ensure that the joints remain sealed when the metal parts are loaded by
thermal or mechanical loads. The through-thickness behavior, usually expressed as a relation between
the pressure on the gasket and the closure distance of the gasket, is highly nonlinear, often involves large
plastic deformations, and is difficult to capture with a standard material model. The alternative of
modeling the gasket in detail by taking every individual material into account in the finite element model
of the engine is not feasible. It requires a lot of elements which makes the model unacceptably large.
Also, determining the material properties of the individual materials might be cumbersome.
The gasket material model addresses these problems by allowing gaskets to be modeled with only one
element through the thickness, while the experimentally or analytically determined complex
pressure-closure relationship in that direction can be used directly as input for the material model. The
material must be used together with 2-D or 3-D first-order solid composite element types or 2-D
axi-symmetric elements. In that case, these elements consists of one layer and have only one integration
point in the thickness direction of the element.
Constitutive Model
The behavior in the thickness direction, the transverse shear behavior, and the membrane behavior are
fully uncoupled in the gasket material model. In subsequent sections, these three deformation modes
are discussed.
Local Coordinate System
The material model is most conveniently described in terms of a local coordinate system for the
integration points of the element (see Figure 10-44). For three-dimensional elements, the first and second
directions of the coordinate system are tangential to the midsurface of the element at the integration point.
The third direction is the thickness direction of the gasket and is perpendicular to the midsurface. For
two-dimensional elements, the first direction of the coordinate system is the direction of the midsurface
at the integration point, the second direction is the thickness direction of the gasket and is perpendicular
to the midsurface, and the third direction coincides with the global 3-direction.
In a total Lagrange formulation, the orientation of the local coordinate system is determined in the
undeformed configuration and is fixed. In an updated Lagrange formulation, the orientation is
determined in the current configuration and is updated during the analysis.
CHAPTER 10 375
Materials
3
2
1
1
Midsurface
Integration Point
Figure 10-44
Integration Point
Midsurface
The Location of the Integration Points and the Local Coordinate Systems in
Two- and Three-dimensional Gasket Elements
closure cp that is constructed by interpolation from the elastic part of the loading path (section AB) and
the unloading path CD.
E
loading path
py1
D
G
py
B
py0
Gasket Pressure p
unloading path
A
cp0
F
cp
cy0
C
cp1
cy
cy1
Figure 10-45
The compressive behavior in the thickness direction is implemented by decomposing the gasket closure
rate into an elastic and a plastic part:
e p
c Z c Hc
(10-216)
Of these two parts, only the elastic part contributes to the pressure. The constitutive equation is given by
the following rate equation:
e
p
p Z Dc c Z Dc ( c c )
(10-217)
CHAPTER 10 377
Materials
Initial Gap
The thickness of a gasket can vary considerably throughout the sealing region. Since the gasket is
modeled with only one element through the thickness, this can lead to meshing difficulties at the
boundaries between thick regions and thin regions. The initial gap parameter can be used to solve this.
The parameter basically shifts the loading and unloading curves in the positive closure direction. As long
as the closure distance of the gasket elements is smaller than the initial gap, no pressure is built up in the
gasket. The sealing region can thus be modeled as a flat sheet of uniform thickness and the initial gap
parameter can be set for those regions where the gasket is actually thinner than the elements of the finite
element mesh used to model it.
Thickness Direction - Tension
The tensile behavior of the gasket in the thickness direction is linear elastic and is governed by a tensile
modulus Dt. The latter is defined as a pressure per unit closure distance (that is, length).
Transverse Shear and Membrane Behavior
The transverse shear is defined in the 2-3 and 3-1 planes of the local coordinate system (for threedimensional elements) or the 1-2 plane (for two-dimensional elements). It is linear elastic and
characterized by a transverse shear modulus Gt.
The membrane behavior is defined in the local 1-2 plane (for three-dimensional elements) or the local
3-1 plane (for two-dimensional elements) and is linear elastic and isotropic. Youngs modulus Em and
Poissons ratio m that govern the membrane behavior are taken from an existing material that must be
defined using the MAT1 bulk data entry. Multiple gasket material can refer to the same isotropic material
for their membrane properties (see also the GASKET model definition option in MSC.Marc Volume C:
Program Input).
Thermal Expansion
The thermal expansion of the gasket material is isotropic and the thermal expansion coefficient are taken
from the isotropic material that also describes the membrane behavior.
Constitutive Equations
As mentioned above, the behavior in the thickness direction of the gasket is formulated as a relation
between the pressure p on the gasket and the gasket closure distance c. In order to formulate the
constitutive equations of the gasket material, this relation must first be written in terms of stresses and
strains. This depends heavily on the stress and strain tensor employed in the analysis. For small strain
analyses, for example, the engineering stress and strain are used. In that case, the gasket closure rate and
the pressure rate are related to the strain rate and the stress rate by
c Z h and p Z
in which h is the thickness of the gasket.
(10-218)
The resulting constitutive equation for three-dimensional elements, expressed in the local coordinate
system of the integration, now reads
11
22
33
12
23
31
Em m Em
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ 0
2
2
1 m 1 m
m Em Em
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ 0
2
2
1 m 1 m
0
11
22
33 33
0
0
Em
0 JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ 0
2 ( 1 H m )
12
23
Gt 0
0 Gt
(10-219)
31
11
22
33
12
0
C
0
0
m E m
Em
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ 0 JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
J 0
2
2
1 m
1 m
0
11
p
22 22
33
(10-220)
12
Gt
For large deformations in a total Lagrange formulation, in which the Green-Lagrange strains and the
second Piola-Kirchhoff stresses are employed (as well as in an updated Lagrange environment) in
which the logarithmic strains and Cauchy stresses are being used, similar but more complex relations
can be derived.
Description
MATG
MATTG
CHAPTER 10 379
Materials
References
MATG (SOL 600), 1556 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
MATTG (SOL 600), 1598 of the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Material Damping
In direct integration analysis, the user very often defines energy dissipation mechanisms as part of the
basic model - dashpots, inelastic material behavior, etc. In such cases, there is usually no need to
introduce additional structural or general damping: it is unimportant compared to these other
dissipative effects. However, some models do not have such dissipation sources (an example is a linear
system with chattering contact, such as a pipeline in a seismic event). In such cases, it is usually desirable
to introduce some general low level of damping. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides Rayleigh
damping for this purpose. The user includes the two Rayleigh damping factors, R for mass proportional
damping and R for stiffness proportional damping on the NLSTRAT Bulk Data entry. In the case of
elements the damping values must be used in conjunction with these property references. For a linear
problem, these provide a damping matrix [C] as described above:
[C]=R[M]+R[K].
Since the model may have quite general nonlinear response, the concept of stiffness proportional
damping must be generalized, since it is possible for the tangent stiffness matrix to have negative
eigenvalues (which would imply negative damping). To overcome this problem, R is interpreted as
defining viscous material damping which creates an additional damping stress, d, proportional to the
total strain rate:
el
d Z D 0
(10-221)
Here D0el is the materials initial (virgin) elastic stiffness. This damping stress is added to the stress
caused by the constitutive response at the integration point when the dynamic equilibrium equations are
formed, but it is not included in the stress output. This allows damping to be introduced for any nonlinear
case, and provides standard Rayleigh damping for linear cases.
Since the R factor introduces damping proportional to the strain rate, this may be thought of as damping
associated with the material itself, while the R factor introduces damping forces caused by the absolute
velocities of the model, and so simulates the idea of the model moving through a viscous ether (a
permeating, still fluid, so that any motion of any point in the model causes damping).
The R factor is applied to all elements that have mass. The R factor applies to all elastic elements and
to beam and shell elements. The R factor is not applied to spring elements. Discrete dashpot elements
should be used as needed for springs.
CHAPTER 10 381
Materials
Description
Defines transient analysis damping parameters BETA, GAMMA,
GAMMA1, GAMMA2.
Defines damping constants for nonlinear analysis when MSC.Marc is
executed from MSC.Nastran used in SOL 600 only (Not supported in
MSC.Patran 2004).
References
NLSTRAT (SOL 600) (p. 2005) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
NLDAMP (SOL 600) (p. 1987) in the MSC.Nastran Quick Reference Guide.
Isotropic
Description
Gamma (Newmark)
Beta (Newmark)
Skip widget.
You may edit the raw data file after selecting it by using the Edit File... button. The editor is
Notepad on Windows platforms and vi on UNIX platforms unless you change the
environment variable P3_EDITOR to reference a different editor. The editor must be in the
users path or the entire pathname must be referenced.
CHAPTER 10 383
Materials
Raw data files may have up to three columns of data. By default the first column of data is the
independent variable value. The second column is the measured data, and the last column can
be the area reduction or volumetric data. More than three columns is not accepted. If the third
column is blank, the material is considered incompressible.
The data may be space, tab, or comma delimited.
If you have cross sectional area reduction data in the third column, you can give it an optional
field name also. If you do not specify that you have this data and a third column is detected,
two fields will still be created and a _C1 and _C2 will be appended to the given field name.
If for some reason the independent and dependent columns need to be interchanged, you can
turn this toggle on. Check your imported fields before proceeding to ensure they are correct.
This is done in the Fields application.
When you press the Apply button, you will be taken to the second step. If you need to import
more than one file, you will have to reset the Action pull-down.
Experimental Data Fitting
Import Raw Data
Description
New Field
The field name under which the raw data will be saved. For an explanation of
what the raw data files should contain, see the description on each mode
(Uniaxial, Biaxial, etc.) in the table for Select Test Data.
Area Data
If volumetric data or cross sectional area reduction data is stored in the third
column of a raw data file it will be imported automatically and two field will
be created, one with a _C1 and the other with a _C1 appended to the name.
Optionally, you can give it its own name by turning this toggle ON.
If the Area Data toggle is on, you supply the name to the field of volumetric
or area data here.
Independent
Variable
This defines the independent variable. The material field created from reading
the raw data will be tagged with this independent variable. This is simply a
label and has no effect on the actual curve fits.
Header Lines to
Skip
If any header lines in the data file are to be skipped before the raw data is
processed, you can specify this with this databox.
Select File
Select a raw data file. The .dat and .csv file types are filtered by default. csv
files are comma separated and created by Microsoft Excel.
Edit File
Once a file has been selected you may edit it with Notepad on Windows and
vi on UNIX. The editor can be changed by setting the environment variable
P3_EDITOR to the editor or choice. The editor command must be in the
users path or the full path must be provided as part of the P3_EDITOR
environment variable.
Description
Apply
This command will import the raw data and save it as a field(s) in the name(s)
given in New Field (and/or Area Field Name) databoxes. You will also be
taken to automatically to the Select Test Data action which is the next step.
If you need to import multiple raw data files, you will have to set the Action
back to Import Raw Data.
Cancel
CHAPTER 10 385
Materials
Description
Select the field of raw test data corresponding to each of these tests if they
exist. You need to supply at least one. The stress-strain data field is
referenced in the Primary column. If you have volumetric or area data
fields, they are referenced in the Secondary column. If no Secondary field
is supplied, the material models are assumed incompressible.
Simple Shear
Volumetric
For time independent elastomeric materials (uniaxial, biaxial, planar
shear, simple shear and volumetric tests) the data should be as such in the
raw data file:
eng. strain_1, eng. stress_1, volumetric data_1
eng. strain_2, eng. stress_2, volumetric data_2
.
Description
Not yet supported. Turn this toggle ON if you wish to do a data fit on
damage models. For continuous damage (resulting from a constant strain
amplitude test) the data in the raw input file should be:
cycle_1, str_energy_d_1
cycle_2, str_energy_d_2
.
cycle_n, str_energy_d_n
In addition, before fitting the data, the free energy (which is the strain
energy density corresponding to the undamaged state) is required. Notice
that the data points should not include the range of cycles at which
damage did not start to evaluate.
str_energy_d_n, strain_energy_d_n/str_energy_d_n_undamaged
Notice that the data points should not include the range of cycles at which
damage did not start to evaluate.
Viscoelastic/Damage
In this field, select the Viscoelastic or Damage raw test data field.
From this listbox you select the field corresponding to the Deformation
Mode or the Viscoelastic/Damage data.
Apply
Once the test data is associated to the respective modes, the Apply button
will take you to the Calculate Properties action.
Cancel
CHAPTER 10 387
Materials
Calculate Properties
Once test data has been associated to a test
type or mode, the curve fit is done by following
these steps:
1. Select the material Model you wish to do
a curve fit for. The available models will
depend on the test data selected in the
previous step. Hyperelastic models will
be available for deformation mode test
data. Viscoelastic models will be
available for relaxation test data.
2. In general you will leave Use Test Data
to All for hyperelastic models. If
however you only want the curve fit to
use one of the deformation modes, you
may set it here.
3. Press the Compute button. The
coefficient values will be displayed in the
Coefficients spreadsheet.
4. To visually see the curve fit, press the
Plot button.
You may repeat the above four steps for
as many material models as you wish to
curve fit.
5. Select an existing material or type in a
New Material Name and press the
Apply button to save the material model
as either a Hyperelastic or Viscoelastic
constitutive model for use in a
subsequent analysis.
The following notes are made:
The plots are appended to the existing
important. These additional modes are predicted for you. You should always know your
models response to each mode of deformation due to the different types of stress states. For
example, a rule of thumb for natural rubber and some other elastomers is that the tensile
tension biaxial response should be about 1.5 to 2.5 times the uniaxial tension response.
You can turn ON/OFF these additional modes or any of the curves under the Plot
Parameters button as well as change the appearance of plot. More control and formatting of
the plot can be done under the XY Plot application on the MSC.Patran application switch on
the main form.
Viscoelastic constitutive models are useless without a Hyperelastic constitutive model
also. Be sure your model has both defined under the same material name if you use
viscoelastic properties.
You may actually change the coefficient values in the Coefficients spread sheet if you wish
to see the effect they have on the curve fit. Select one of the cells with the coefficient you wish
to change, then type in a new coefficient value in the Coefficient Value data box and press
the Return or Enter key. Then press the Plot button again. If you press the Apply button, the
new values will be saved in the supplied material name.
For viscoelastic relaxation data, the Number of Terms used in the data fit should, as a rule of
CHAPTER 10 389
Materials
The following tables more fully describes each widget in the Experimental Data Fitting tool:
Calculate Properties
Description
Model:Neo-Hookean*
This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the NeoHookean strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3)
where I1 is the first invariant of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor and
C10 is the material parameter to be determined. For this model, a
volumetric test can not be supplied. The user may enter a bulk modulus.
If no bulk modulus is given, nearly incompressible material behavior
is assumed.
Model:Mooney(2)*
This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the two
term Mooney-Rivlin strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3)
where I1 and I2 are the first and second invariant of the right CauchyGreen strain tensor and C10 and C01 are the material parameters to be
determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The user
may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly
incompressible material behavior is assumed.
Model:Mooney(3)*
This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the three
term Mooney-Rivlin strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3) + C11*(I1 - 3)*(I2 - 3)
where I1 and I2 are the first and second invariant of the right CauchyGreen strain tensor and C10, C01 and C11 are the material parameters to
be determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The
user may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given nearly
incompressible material behavior is assumed.
Model:Signiorini*
where I1 and I2 are the first and second invariant of the right CauchyGreen strain tensor and C10, C01 and C20 are the material parameters to
be determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The
user may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly
incompressible material behavior is assumed.
Calculate Properties
Model:2nd Order
Invariant*
Description
This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the second
order invariant strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3) + C11*(I1 - 3)*(I2-3) +
C20*(I1 - 3)^2
where I1 and I2 are the first and second invariant of the right CauchyGreen strain tensor and C10, C01, C11 and C20 are the material parameters
to be determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The
user may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly
incompressible material behavior is assumed.
Model:3rd Order
Deform*
This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the third
order deformation strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C01*(I2 - 3)+ C11*(I1 - 3)*(I2 - 3) +
C20*(I1 - 3)^2 + C30*(I1 - 3)^3
where I1 and I2 are the first and second invariant of the right CauchyGreen strain tensor and C10, C01, C11, C20 and C30 are the material
parameters to be determined. For this model, a volumetric test can not be
supplied. The user may enter a bulk modulus. If no bulk modulus is given,
nearly incompressible material behavior is assumed.
Note:
The data input for all of these options has been consolidated under the Jamus-GreenSimpson option of the MSC.Patran Materials-Input-Data-Hyperelastic form.
Model:Yeoh
This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the Yeoh
strain energy function W, which is given by:
W = C10*(I1 - 3) + C20*(I1 - 3)^2 + C30*(I1 - 3)^3
where I1 is the first invariant of the right Cauchy-Green strain tensor and
C10, C20 and C30 are the material parameters to be determined. For this
model, a volumetric test can not be supplied. The user may enter a bulk
modulus. If no bulk modulus is given, nearly incompressible material
behavior is assumed.
CHAPTER 10 391
Materials
Calculate Properties
Model:Ogden
Description
This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the Ogden
strain energy function W, which is given by:
N
W Z
n Z 1
{(mu_n/alpha_n) * (J^(-alpha_n/3)) *
(lam1^alpha_n + lam2^alpha_n + lam2^alpha_n
- 3)} + 4.5 * K * (J^(1/3) - 1)^2
where lam1, lam2 and lam3 are the principal stretch ratios, J is the
determinant of the deformation gradient, N is the number of terms and
mu_n, alpha_n and K are the material parameters to be determined. The
maximum number of terms is 10, but it is recommended to use no more
terms than necessary to get a sufficiently good fit. This model can be used
for incompressible as well as for slightly compressible elastic materials.
Compressibility is included based on a constant bulk modulus. In case of
compressibility, volumetric information is needed, preferably using a
volumetric test, but volumetric data can also be included for uniaxial,
biaxial and planar shear tests. In order to perform a plausible extrapolation
for the compressible Ogden model, dilatational information is needed
beyond the data set. This is achieved using linear extrapolation based on
the two start and/or end points of the measured data. This linear
extrapolation may restrict the validity of the response outside the range of
the measured data. For dual mode plotting (except for simple shear),
dilatational information is needed for the compressible Ogden model. For
a volumetric test, this readily follows from the strain, but for uniaxial,
biaxial and planar shear tests this must be calculated. This calculation is
based on the requirement that the stress in perpendicular direction must be
zero. If the fitted coefficients do not fulfil this requirement, zero stresses
are returned for such a dual mode.
Note:
Calculate Properties
Model:Foam
Description
This command is used if experimental data must be fitted using the foam
strain energy function W, which is given by:
N
W Z
n Z 1
{(mu_n/alpha_n)*(lam1^alpha_n +
lam2^alpha_n + lam2^alpha_n - 3)
+(mu_n/beta_n)*(1 - J^beta_n)}
where lam1, lam2 and lam3 are the principal stretch ratios, J is the
determinant of the deformation gradient, N is the number of terms and
mu_n, alpha_n and beta_n are the material parameters to be determined.
The maximum number of terms is 10, but it is recommended to use no
more terms than necessary to get a sufficiently good fit. This model should
be used for highly compressible elastic materials. Except for the simple
shear test, volumetric information must be available. In order to perform a
plausible extrapolation for the foam model, dilatational information is
needed beyond the data set. This is achieved using linear extrapolation
based on the two start and/or end points of the measured data. This linear
extrapolation may restrict the validity of the response outside the range of
the measured data. For dual mode plotting (except for simple shear),
dilatational information is needed for the foam model. For a volumetric
test, this readily follows from the strain, but for uniaxial, biaxial and planar
shear tests this must be calculated. This calculation is based on the
requirement that the stress in perpendicular direction must be zero. If the
fitted coefficients do not fulfil this requirement, zero stresses are returned
for such a dual mode.
CHAPTER 10 393
Materials
Calculate Properties
Model:Arruda-Boyce
Description
Elastomer Free Energy Function; Number of coefficients 1
For this model, the calculation of the Bulk Modulus is not required. A
volumetric test need not be supplied.
Calculate Properties
Model:Gent
Description
Elastomer Free Energy Function; Number of coefficients 2
For this model, the calculation of the Bulk Modulus is not required and a
volumetric test need not be supplied.
CHAPTER 10 395
Materials
Calculate Properties
Model:Visco
Shear Relax
Description
This command is used if experimental shear relaxation data must be fitted
using the following Prony series expansion for the shear modulus G:
N
G(t) = G_infinity W Z
{G_n*exp(-t/tau_n)}
n Z 1
where t is the time, N is the number of terms and G_infinity, G_n and tau_n
are material parameters to be determined. The data points provided by the
user must give the value of the shear modulus at different time stations,
which do not need to be equi-spaced.
Model:Visco
Bulk Relax
{K_n*exp(-t/tau_n)}
n Z 1
where t is the time, N is the number of terms and K_infinity, K_n and tau_n
are material parameters to be determined. The data points provided by the
user must give the value of the bulk modulus at different time stations,
which do not need to be equi-spaced.
Model:Visco Energy
Relax
{delta_n*W0*exp(-t/tau_n)}
n Z 1
where t is the time, N is the number of terms, W0 is the instantaneous strain
energy and W_infinity, delta_n and tau_n are material parameters to be
determined. The data points provided by the user must give the value of the
strain energy at different time stations, which do not need to be equispaced.
Model:Cont. Damage
Model:Disc. Damage
Calculate Properties
Compute
Description
This command starts the data fitting program with the selected data. After
fitting, the measured and fitted curves can be displayed and the
corresponding material model coefficients and the least squares error are
reported. For the Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Foam, Arruda-Boyce and Gent
models, the response in the modes for which no data is measured, is
predicted. Notice that if volumetric data is relevant in order to predict a
uniaxial, biaxial or planar shear mode, this is calculated using the
constraint of a zero stress component in a direction perpendicular to the
direction of the measured stress component. If this calculation fails, the
predicted mode will contain zero stresses.
If the data set contains a large number of entries, or if the model is highly
non-linear and/or contains many coefficients, then the fitting procedure
may take some time.
Since the curve fitting procedure does not use weighting factors per data
point, it might be useful to have many data points near regions where an
accurate response is desired.
Coefficient Value
This option allows the user to manually enter the coefficients of the
material model and updates the response curves. You must select the
coefficient to be modified from the spread sheet and then enter the value
by pressing the Return or Enter key after putting in the new coefficient.
Notice that, although no fit is performed, at least one set of test data must
be selected. This feature is available for the Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Foam,
Arruda-Boyce and Gent material models.
Plot
This plots the current curve fit. The raw data and the calculated curve
fits for the supplied experimental data and the other predicted modes
are plotted.
Unpost Plot
This clears the plot of all curves. By default additional data fit curves are
appended the XY Window.
If a new name is supplied here and this material name does not yet exist, it
will be created with the appropriate constitutive models when the Apply
button is pressed.
Select Material
Apply
Cancel
CHAPTER 10 397
Materials
Description
Uniaxial Test: A/Ao V/Vo Volumetric data of a uniaxial test can be given as: the ratio of the current
cross sectional area and the original cross sectional area (A/A0) or: the
ratio of the current volume and the original volume (V/V0). By default,
the volumetric data is expected to be in terms of A/A0. If the actual data
is in terms of V/V0, use this switch to change the type of input. Not all
material models need this information and therefore these widgets may
appear dimmed.
Biaxial Test: t/to V/Vo
Volumetric data of an equibiaxial test can be given as: the ratio of the
current thickness and the original thickness (t/t0) or: the ratio of the
current volume and the original volume (V/V0). By default, the
volumetric data is expected to be in terms of t/t0. If the actual data is in
terms of V/V0, use this switch to change the type of input. Not all
material models need this information and therefore these widgets may
appear dimmed.
Volumetric data of a planar shear test can be given as: the ratio of the
current thickness and the original thickness (t/t0) or: the ratio of the
current volume and the original volume (V/V0) If the actual data is in
terms of V/V0, use this switch to change the type of input. Not all
material models need this information and therefore these widgets may
appear dimmed.
Mathematical Checks
Positive Coefficients
Description
Extrapolate
Error
The least squares error to be minimized during data fitting can be based
on absolute or relative errors:
Err_Abs = sum {[data_measured(i) data_calculated(i)]^2}
i
Err_Rel = sum {[1 data_calculated(i)/data_measured(i)]^2}
i
Number of Iterations
Convergence Tolerance
The data fitter uses the Downhill Simplex method to find a (local)
minimum. This method uses several sets of material coefficients and
calculates the corresponding objective functions. Based on the values of
the objective functions, the sets of material coefficients are modified.
This process is terminated when:
2*abs{(fh-fl)/(abs(fh)+abs(fl))} < convergence
tolerance
CHAPTER 10 399
Materials
Description
For Foam models, toggle this value to ON in order to use the fictive
Poisson's ratio to create volumetric information.
Fictive Coefficient
OK
Description
Append Curves
X-Axis Options
Y-Axis Options
Deformation Modes
OK
Note:
The plotting and deleting of plots in this utility tool is fairly self contained and little, if any,
need to use the XY Plot application is necessary. If however, you find it necessary to use
the XY Plot application and post/unpost curves, the naming convention is as such:
: Uniaxial
: Biaxial
: Planar Shear
: Simple Shear
: Volumetric
: VisCoelastic
: Neo-Hookean
: Mooney 2
: Mooney 3
: Signiorini
: Second Order Invariant
: Third Order Deformation
: Yeoh
: Ogden # where # is the number of terms, e.g., O2
: Foam # where # is the number of terms, e.g., F3
: Boyce
: Gent
: Continuous damage
: Discontinuous Damange
: Shear Relaxation Visco
: Bulk Relaxation Visco
: Energy Relaxation Visco
11
Element Library
Overview
Element Selection
Gap Elements
409
Line Elements
410
Solid Elements
402
404
406
413
417
411
407
Overview
The heart of a finite element program lies in its element library which allows you to model a structure for
analysis. MSC.Nastran has a very comprehensive element library which lets you model 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D
structures. This section gives some basic definitions of the element types available in MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear. Please note, these elements differ from those used in other portions of MSC.Nastran.
Element Types
Each element has five definitive characteristics that determine its behavior:
Class
Number of Nodes
Interpolation
Degrees of Freedom
Integration Method
Class
The type of geometric domain that an element represents determines the class of the element. Listed
below are the classes of elements in the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear element library.
Beam Elements - is a 3-D bar with axial, bending, and torsional stiffness.
Shell Elements - is a curved, thin or thick structure with membrane/bending capabilities.
Plate Elements - is a flat thin structure carrying in-plane and out-of-plane loads.
Continuum Elements
Plane stress is a thin plate with in-plane stresses only. All normal and shear stresses associated
with the out-of-plane direction are assumed to be zero. (All plane strain elements lie in the
global x-y plane.)
Generalized plane strain is the same as plane strain except that the normal z-strain can be a
CHAPTER 11 403
Element Library
Number of Nodes
The number of nodes for an element define where the displacements are calculated in the analysis.
Elements with only corner nodes are classified as first order elements and the calculation of
displacements at locations within the element are made by linear interpolation. Elements that
contain midside nodes are second order elements and quadratic interpolations are made for
calculating displacements.
In MSC.Nastran the number of nodes is designated at the end of the element name. For example, a
CQUAD4 has 4 nodes.
Interpolation
Interpolation (shape) function is an assumed function relating the displacements at a point inside an
element to the displacements at the nodes of an element. In MSC.Nastran, three types of shape functions
are used: linear, quadratic, and cubic. Certain types of enhancements, such as Assumed Strain, shape
functions, may increase the elements ability to capture accurately certain types of deformation states.
Degrees of Freedom
Degrees of freedom is the number of unknowns at a node. In the general case, there are six degrees of
freedom at a node in structural analysis (three translations, three rotations). In special cases, the number
of degrees of freedom is two (translations) for plane stress, plane strain, and axisymmetric elements;
three (translations) for 3-D truss element; six (three translations, three rotations) for a 3-D beam
element).
Integration
Numerical integration is a method used for evaluating integrals over an element. Element quantities
such as stresses, strains, and temperatures are calculated at each integration point of the element. Full
integration (quadrature) requires, for every element, 2d integration points for linear interpolation and 3d
points for quadratic interpolation, where scalar d is the number of geometric dimensions of an element
(that is, d = 2 for a quad; d = 3 for a hexahedron). Reduced integration uses a lower number of integration
points than necessary to integrate exactly. For example, for an 8-node quadrilateral, the number of
integration points is reduced from 9 to 4 and, for a 20-node hexahedron, from 27 to 8. For some elements,
an hourglass control method is used to insure an accurate solution.
Element Selection
The MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear element library provides a complete finite element modeling
capability. Selecting elements to use for a SOL 600 analysis can be very different than elements you
might use for other solution sequences. In particular, the large strains encountered in nonlinear analysis
have implications for the element formulations.
SOL 600 selects appropriate element formulations based on the analysis type, the elements you use in
constructing your model, element properties, and global parameters. While most of the element
formulation decisions made by SOL 600 require no additional user input, some of the formulation
principles are discussed in this section. Certain analyses may require element types other than the default
which can be specified using
Element Interpolation
All of the elements in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear are formulated in element coordinate systems
described in the MSC.Marc Volume B: Element Library. For almost all elements, primary vector
quantities (such as displacements) are defined in terms of nodal values with scalar interpolation
functions. When the interpolation function for these vector quantities are the same interpolation functions
used to define the geometry (i.e., the position vector) the elements are called isoparametric. Such
elements are guaranteed to be able to exactly represent all rigid body modes and homogeneous
deformation modes, a necessary condition for convergence to the exact solution as the mesh is refined
(i.e. the patch test).
Element Integration
All elements are integrated numerically. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear normally uses full
integration elements but reduced integration elements are also available. For full integration, the
number of integration points is sufficient to integrate the governing virtual work expression exactly, at
least for linear material behavior. All triangular and tetrahedral elements in MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear use full integration. Reduced integration can be used for quadrilaterals and hexahedral
elements; in this procedure, the number of integration points is sufficient to exactly integrate the
contributions of the strain field that are one order less then the order of the interpolation. The
(incomplete) higher-order contributions to the strain field present in these elements will not be integrated.
Hourglassing
The advantage of the reduced integration elements is that the strains and stresses are calculated at the
location that provide optimal accuracy, the so-called Barlow points. The reduced integration elements
also tend to underestimate the stiffness of the element which often gives better results in a typically
overly-stiff finite element analysis displacement method. An additional advantage is that the reduced
number of integration points decreases CPU time and storage requirements. The disadvantage is that the
reduced integration procedure may admit deformation modes that cause no straining at the integration
points. These zero-energy modes cause a phenomenon called hourglassing, where the zero energy
mode starts propagating through the mesh, leading to inaccurate solutions. This problem is particularly
CHAPTER 11 405
Element Library
Figure 11-1
Hourglassing
Incompressible Elements
Sometimes fully integrated solid elements are unsuitable for the analysis of (approximately)
incompressible material behavior. The reason for this is that the material behavior forces the material to
deform (approximately) without volume changes. Fully integrated solid element meshes, and in
particular lower-order element meshes, do not allow such deformations (other than purely homogeneous
deformation). For fully incompressible behavior, another complication occurs: the bulk modulus and
hence the stiffness matrix becomes infinitely large. For this case, a mixed (Herrmann) formulation is
required, where the displacement field is augmented with a hydrostatic pressure field. In this
formulation, only the inverse of the bulk modulus appears, and consequently the contribution of the
operator matrix vanishes. In this formulation, the hydrostatic pressure field play the role of a Lagrange
multiplier enforcing the incompressibility constraints.
Constant Dilatation
When performing nearly incompressible analysis with displacement based elements, the conventional
isoparametric interpolation methods result in poor behavior for lower order elements. To address this
case, an integration scheme option is included (default) which makes the dilatational strain constant
throughout the element. Constant dilatational element formulation is preferred in approximately
incompressible, inelastic analysis, such as large strain plasticity, because conventional elements can
produce volumetric locking due to overconstraints for nearly incompressible behavior. This option is also
the formulation of choice for elastic-plastic analysis and creep analysis because of the potentially nearly
incompressible behavior. Use PARAM, MARCDILT, 1 to activate this option.
2. Use the check boxes to turn OFF and ON Assumed Strain and Constant Dilatation.
CHAPTER 11 407
Element Library
Description
CMASSi
CMASS1, 1171
CONM1,
CONM2
CONM1, 1180
CELAS1
CELAS1, 1126
CDAMPi
CDAMP1, 1116
CVISC
CVISC, 1288
CBUSH
CBUSH, 1103
CBUSH1D
CBUSH1D, 1107
CONM2, 1181
*The bush element features are implemented only partially in SOL 600. Certain features such as
coordinate system ID location of the damper etc., are not available until the 2006 release. Use of these
features will cause the job to terminate with a SEVERE WARNING. If your model does not need
fields 6-9 of CBUSH or the continuation entry, you can allow the job to run by entering bulk data
PARAM, MARCBUSH,1.
PBUSHT support has been added for nonlinear springs. TABLED1 can be used to specify the loaddeflection curve. The PBUSHT/TBLED1 data is mapped to MSC.Marcs SPRINGS option with tabledriven force-deflection curves.
Bolt elements were added to support MSC.Marc both outside the USA and within the USA.
MSC.Nastran Bulk Data entries, MBOLT and MBOLTUS reflect these new additions.
Type
Options
0D
Mass
CONM1, CONM2
1D
Mass
CMASSi
0D
Grounded Spring
CELAS1
Object
Type
Options
1D
Spring
0D
Grounded Damper
1D
Damper
OD
Grounded Bush
CBUSH
1D
Bush
CBUSH1D
CELAS1
Scalar, Viscous
CDAMPi, CVISC
CHAPTER 11 409
Element Library
Gap Elements
Gap elements are an obsolete method to model contact problems. These elements allow for gap opening
and closing as well as friction along a surface. Gap elements should normally be replaced with 2D or 3D
contact. Gaps for SOL 600 are only offered for compatibility with other MSC.Nastran solution
sequences and cannot be simulated exactly the same in SOL 600 as in the other solution sequences. There
use is not recommended.
Entry
Description
CGAP
CGAP, 1141
Type
Options
1D
Gap
Adaptive, Nonadaptive
CGAP
Line Elements
MSC.Nastran offers a wide variety of line elements that include beams, bars, rods. Beams can be defined
using standard cross sections supplied in a library or general cross sections that are user defined.
Entry
Description
CBAR
CBAR, 1084
CBEAM
CBEAM, 1091
CBEND
CBEND, 1100
CROD
CROD, 1238
CONROD
CONROD, 1183
CTUBE
CTUBE, 1287
Type
Options
1D
Beam
General Section
CBAR
CBEND
CBEND
Lumped Section
CBEAM/PBCOMP
Tapered Section
CBEAM
CBEAM
General Section
CROD/CONROD
Pipe Section
CTUBE
1D
Rod
CHAPTER 11 411
Element Library
Description
CTRIA3,
Defines an isoparametric
CTRIA3, 1271
membrane-bending or plane strain triangular
plate element.
CTRIA6
CTRIA6, 1274
CQUAD4,
Defines an isoparametric
membrane-bending or plane strain
quadrilateral plate element.
CQUAD4, 1214
CQUAD8
CQUAD8, 1218
CTRIAR
Defines an isoparametric
CTRIAR, 1278
membrane-bending triangular plate element.
CQUADR
CQUADR, 1222
CSHEAR
CSHEAR, 1251
Type
Option 1
Option 2
2-D
Shell
Homogeneous
Standard
CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
Revised
CTRIAR, CQUADR
w/PSHELL
Laminate
Standard
CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PCOMP
Revised
CTRIAR, CQUADR
w/PCOMP
Equlvalent Section
Standard
CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
Revised
CTRIAR, CQUADR
w/PSHELL
2-D
Bending Panel
Standard
CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
Revised
CTRIAR, CQUADR
w/PSHELL
2-D
Membrane
Standard
CTRIA3, CTRIA6,
CQUAD4, CQUAD8
w/PSHELL
Revised
CTRIAR, CQUADR
w/PSHELL
2-D
Note:
Shear Panel
CSHEAR w/PSHEAR
For SOL 600 CQUADR and CQUAD4 are the same and CTRIAR is the same as CTRIA3.
CHAPTER 11 413
Element Library
Solid Elements
MSC.Nastran Advanced Nonlinear (SOL 600) contains continuum elements that can be used to
model plane stress, plane strain, generalized plane strain, axisymmetric and three-dimensional solids.
These elements have only displacement degrees of freedom. As a result, solid elements are not
efficient for modeling thin structures dominated by bending. Either beam or shell elements should be
used in these cases.
The solid elements that are available in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear have either linear or quadratic
interpolation functions.
They include
4-, 6-, and 8-node plane stress elements (create plane stress elements using PARAM, MRALIAS)
3-, 4-, 6-, and 8-node plane strain elements
3-, 4-, 6-, and 8-node axisymmetric ring elements
8-, 10-, and 20-node brick elements
4- and 10-node tetrahedron
In general, the elements in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear use a full-integration procedure. Some
elements use reduced integration. The lower-order reduced integration elements include an hourglass
stabilization procedure to eliminate the singular modes.
Continuum elements are widely used for thermal stress analysis. For each of these elements, there is a
corresponding element available for heat transfer analysis in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear. As a
result, you can use the same mesh for the heat transfer and thermal stress analyses.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has no singular element for fracture mechanics analysis. The
simulation of stress singularities can be accomplished by moving the midside nodes of 8-node
quadrilateral and 20-node brick elements to quarter-point locations near the crack tip. Many fracture
mechanics analyses have used this quarter-point technique successfully.
The 4- and 8-node quadrilateral elements can be degenerated into triangles, and the 8-and 20-node solid
brick elements can be degenerated into wedges and tetrahedra by collapsing the appropriate corner and
midside nodes. The number of nodes per element is not reduced for degenerated elements. The same
node number is used repeatedly for collapsed sides or faces. When degenerating incompressible
elements, exercise caution to ensure that a proper number of Lagrange multipliers remain. You are
advised to use the higher-order triangular or tetrahedron elements wherever possible, as opposed to using
collapsed quadrilaterals and hexahedra.
Axisymmetric Elements
Solids of revolution (axisymmetric solids) subjected to axially symmetric loading can be modeled using
the elements described in this section. For these problems, the coordinate convention is a cylindrical
system. Because of symmetry, the stress components are independent of the angular coordinate so the
components uq, grq, gqz, trq, and tqz are zero. The nonzero components are sr, sq, sz, and trz.
Entry
Description
CTRIAX6
CTRIAX6, 1283
CTRIAX
CTRIAX, 1281
CQUADX
CQUADX, 1225
Type
Options
2-D
2-D Solid
Axisymmetric
Standard
CTRIAX6,
Hyperelastic
CTRIAX, CQUADX
PLPLANE
CTRIAX, CQUADX
(11-1)
CHAPTER 11 415
Element Library
Entry
Description
CTRIA3,
Defines an isoparametric
membrane-bending or plane strain
triangular plate element.
CTRIA3, 1271
CTRIA6
CQUAD4,
Defines an isoparametric
membrane-bending or plane strain
quadrilateral plate element.
CQUAD8
CTRIAR
Defines an isoparametric
membrane-bending triangular plate
element.
CTRIAR, 1278
CQUADR
CQUADR, 1222
CQUAD4, 1214
Type
Options
2-D
2-D Solid
Plane Strain
Standard
Revised
CTRIAR, CQUADR
w/PSHELL
Hyperelastic
Description
CHEXA
CHEXA, 1158
CTETRA
CTETRA, 1266
CPENTA
Type
3-D
Solid
Options
Homogeneous
Laminate
Options
Standard
CHEXA, CTETRA,
CPENTA w/PSOLID
Hyperelastic
w/PLSOLID
CHEXA, CTETRA,
CPENTA w/PCOMP
CHAPTER 11 417
Element Library
12
Contact
Overview
Contact Methodology
References
420
480
421
447
477
467
Overview
The simulation of many physical problems requires the ability to model the contact phenomena. This
includes analysis of interference fits, rubber seals, tires, crash, and manufacturing processes among
others. The analysis of contact behavior is complex because of the requirement to accurately track the
motion of multiple geometric bodies, and the motion due to the interaction of these bodies after contact
occurs. This includes representing the friction between surfaces and heat transfer between the bodies if
required. The numerical objective is to detect the motion of the bodies, apply a constraint to avoid
penetration, and apply appropriate boundary conditions to simulate the frictional behavior and heat
transfer. Several procedures have been developed to treat these problems including the use of Perturbed
or Augmented Lagrangian methods, penalty methods, and direct constraints. Furthermore, contact
simulation has often required the use of special contact or gap elements. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
allows contact analysis to be performed automatically without the use of special contact elements. A
robust numerical procedure to simulate these complex physical problems has been implemented in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Contact problems can be classified as one of the following types of contact.
Deformable-Deformable contact between two- and three-dimensional deformable bodies.
Rigid - Deformable contact between a deformable body and a rigid body, for two- or
three-dimensional cases.
Glued contact in two and three dimensions. This is a general capability for tying (bonding) two
CHAPTER 12 421
Contact
Contact Methodology
This section describes how contact is implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear (SOL 600).
Contact Bodies
There are two types of contact bodies in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear deformable and rigid.
Deformable bodies are simply a collection of finite elements as shown below.
Figure 12-1
Deformable Body
surface (3-D) can be placed through them. The BCBODY option is used to activate this procedure. This
improves the accuracy of the calculation of the normal.
Rigid bodies are composed of curves (2-D) or surfaces (3-D) or meshes with only thermal elements in
coupled problems. The most significant aspect of rigid bodies is that they do not distort. Deformable
bodies can contact rigid bodies, but contact between rigid bodies is not considered.
They can be created either in CAD systems and transferred through MSC.Patran or some other GUI into
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear, created within MSC.Patran, or created directly through the
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear input. There are several different types of curves and surfaces that can
be entered including:
2-D
3-D
line
4-node patch
circular arc
ruled surface
spline
surface of revolution
NURB
Bezier
poly-surface
cylinder
sphere
NURB
trimmed NURB
Within MSC.Patran, all contact curves or surfaces are mathematically treated as NURB surfaces. This
allows the greatest level of generality. Within the analysis, these rigid surfaces can be treated in two ways
discrete piecewise linear lines (2-D) or patches (3-D), or as analytical NURB surfaces. When the
discrete approach is used, all geometric primitives are subdivided into straight segments or flat patches.
You have control over the density of these subdivisions to approximate a curved surface within a desired
degree of accuracy. This subdivision is also relevant when determining the corner conditions ( see Corner
Conditions, 433). The treatment of the rigid bodies as NURB surfaces is advantageous because it leads
to greater accuracy in the representation of the geometry and a more accurate calculation of the surface
normal. Additionally, the variation of the surface normal is continuous over the body which leads to a
better calculation of the friction behavior and a better convergence.
To create a rigid body, you can either read in the curve and surface geometry created from a CAD system
or create the geometry in MSC.Patran, or directly enter it into the MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear bulk
data. You then use the BCBODY option to select which geometric entities are to be a part of the rigid
body. An important consideration for a rigid body is the definition of the interior side and the exterior
side. For two-dimensional analysis, the interior side is formed by the right-hand rule when moving along
the body.
CHAPTER 12 423
Contact
2
1
3
1
Interior
Side
4
Interior Side
Figure 12-2
For three-dimensional analysis, the interior side is formed by the right-hand rule along a patch. The
interior side is visualized in MSC.Patran as the side with markers, the exterior side is visualized in
MSC.Patran as the side without markers.
It is not necessary for rigid bodies to define the complete body. Only the bounding surface needs to be
specified. You should take care, however, that the deforming body cannot slide out of the boundary curve
in 2D (Figure 12-3). This means that it must always be possible to decompose the displacement
increment into a component normal and a component tangential to the rigid surface.
Incorrect
Figure 12-3
Correct
Contact Detection
During the incremental procedure, each potential contact node is first checked to see whether it is near a
contact segment. The contact segments are either edges of other 2-D deformable bodies, faces of 3-D
deformable bodies, or segments from rigid bodies. By default, each node could contact any other segment
including segments on the body that it belongs to. This allows a body to contact itself. To simplify the
computation, it is possible to use the BCTABLE entry to indicate that a particular body will or will not
contact another body. This is often used to indicate that a body will not contact itself. During the iteration
process, the motion of the node is checked to see whether it has penetrated a surface by determining
whether it has crossed a segment.
Because there can be a large number of nodes and segments, efficient algorithms have been developed
to expedite this process. A bounding box algorithm is used so that it is quickly determined whether a node
is near a segment. If the node falls within the bounding box, more sophisticated techniques are used to
determine the exact status of the node.
During the contact process, it is unlikely that a node exactly contacts the surface. For this reason, a
contact tolerance is associated with each surface.
rance
2 x Tole
Figure 12-4
Contact Tolerance
If a node is within the contact tolerance, it is considered to be in contact with the segment. The contact
tolerance is calculated by the program as the smaller of 5% of the smallest element side or 25% of the
smallest (beam or shell) element thickness. It is also possible for you to define the contact tolerance
through the input.
(t)
( trial )
( trial )
CHAPTER 12 425
Contact
A(t)
Atrial (t + t)
Figure 12-5
The size of the contact tolerance has a significant impact on the computational costs and the accuracy of
the solution. If the contact tolerance is too small, detection of contact is difficult, leading to higher costs.
Also many nodes are more likely to be considered penetrating leading to increase in increment splitting,
therefore, increasing the computational costs. If the contact tolerance is too large, nodes are considered
in contact prematurely, resulting in a loss of accuracy. Furthermore, nodes might penetrate the surface
by a large amount.
An effective compromise is to bias the tolerance area so that a smaller distance is on the outside surface
than on the inside surface. This is done by entering a bias factor. The bias factor should have a value
between 0.0 and 1.0. The default in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear is 0.9. This results in good accuracy
and reasonable computational costs. In analyses involving frictional contact, a bias (recommended value:
0.95 - 0.99) to the contact core is also found beneficial to facilitate convergence.
In some instances, you might wish to influence the decision regarding the deformable segment a node
contacts (or does not contact). This can be done using the EXCLUDE variable on the BCBODY bulk
data entry.
(1 - Bias)* tolerance
(1 + Bias)* tolerance
Figure 12-6
Shell Contact
A node on a shell makes contact when the position of the node plus or minus half the thickness projected
with the normal comes into contact with another segment. In 2-D, this can be shown as:
x1 Z A H n t 2
x2 Z A n t 2
Shell
Midsurface
1
rance
2x tole
Figure 12-7
x A
If point x or y falls within the contact tolerance distance of segment S, node A is considered in contact
with the segment S. Here x 1 and x 2 are the position vectors of a point on the surfaces 1 and 2 on the
shell, A is the position vector of a point (node in a discretized model) on the midsurface of the shell, n
is the normal to the midsurface, and t is the shell thickness.
As the shell has finite thickness, the node (depending on the direction of motion) can physically contact
either the top surface, bottom surface, or mathematically contact can be based upon the midsurface. You
can control whether detection occurs with either both surfaces, the top surface, the bottom surface, or the
middle surface. In such cases, either two or one segment will be created at the appropriate physical
location. Note that these segments will be dependent, not only on the motion of the shell, but also the
current shell thickness.
S 1, S 2 are segments associated with shell consisting of node 1 and 2.
CHAPTER 12 427
Contact
S1
2
S1
S2
1
1
Include Both Segments
S1
S2
1
1
Figure 12-8
Neighbor Relations
When a node is in contact with a rigid surface, it tends to slide from one segment to another. In 2-D, the
segments are always continuous and so are the segment numbers. Hence, a node in contact with segment
n slides to segment n 1 or to segment n H 1 . This simplifies the implementation of contact.
n-1
n+1
Figure 12-9
In 3-D, the segments are often discontinuous. This can be due to the subdivision of matching surfaces or,
more likely, the CAD definition of the under lying surface geometry.
Nonmatching
Segments
Continuous Surface Segments
Figure 12-10
Continuous surface geometry is highly advantageous as a node can slide from one segment to the next
with no interference (assuming the corner conditions are satisfied). Discontinuous surface geometry
results in additional operations when a node slides off a patch and cannot find an adjacent segment.
Hence, it is advantageous to use geometry clean-up tools to eliminate small sliver surfaces and make the
surfaces both physically continuous and topologically contiguous.
Dynamic Impact
The Newmark-beta and the Single Step Houbolt procedure have the capability to allow variable time
steps and, when using the user-defined fixed time step procedure, the time step is split by the algorithm
to satisfy the contact conditions.
For most dynamic impact problems, the Single Step Houbolt method is recommended, as this procedure
possesses high-frequency dissipation. This is often necessary to avoid numerical problems by contactinduced high-frequency oscillations. If the other dynamic operators are used, it is recommended that
numerical damping be used during the analysis.
In dynamic analysis, the requirement of energy conservation is supplemented with the requirement of
momentum conservation. In addition to the constraints placed upon the displacements, additional
constraints are placed on the velocity and acceleration of the nodal points in contact, except for the Single
Step Houbolt method.
When a node contacts a rigid surface, it is given the velocity and acceleration of the rigid surface in the
normal direction. The rigid surfaces are treated as if they have infinite mass, hence, infinite momentum.
CHAPTER 12 429
Contact
Results Evaluation
The MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear post files t16 and t19 contain the results for both the deformable
bodies and the rigid bodies. In performing a contact analysis, you can obtain three types of results. The
first is the conventional results from the deformable body. This includes the deformation, strains,
stresses, and measures of inelastic behavior such as plastic and creep strains. In addition to reaction
forces at conventional boundary conditions, you can obtain the contact forces and friction forces
imparted on the body by rigid or other deformable bodies. By examining the location of these forces, you
can observe where contact has occurred, and MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear also allows you to select
the contact status.
It is also possible to obtain the resultant force following from contact on the deformable bodies and the
resultant force and moment on the rigid bodies. The moment is taken about the user-defined centroid of
the rigid body. The time history of these resultant forces are of significant issues in many engineering
analysis. Of course, if there is no resultant force on a rigid body, it implies that body is not in contact with
any deformable body.
Finally, if the additional print is requested using PARAM,MARCPRN,1 or 2, the output file reflects
information showing when a node comes into contact, what rigid body/segment is contacted, when
separation occurs, when a node contacts a sharp corner, the displacement in the local coordinate system,
and the contact force in the local coordinate system. For large problems, this can result in a significant
amount of output.
The motion of the rigid bodies can be displayed in MSC.Patran as well as the deformable bodies. Rigid
bodies which are modeled using the piecewise linear approach are displayed as line segments for flat
patches. When the rigid surfaces are modeled as analytical surfaces, the visualization appears as
trimmed NURBS.
Tolerance Values
Five tolerances can be set for determination of the contact behavior. Not entering any values here means
that MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear calculates values based on the problem specification.
Relative Sliding Velocity Between Surfaces Below Which Friction Forces Drop
As discussed in Friction Modeling, 438, the equations of friction are smoothed internally in the program
to avoid numerical instabilities. The equations are inequalities whenever two contacting surfaces stick to
each other and equalities whenever the surfaces slide (or slip). Thus, the character of contact constraints
change depending on whether there is sticking or slipping. The smoothing procedure consist of
modifying it in such a way, that there is always slip; the amount is a function of the relative velocity and
a constant RVcnst. The value of this constant must be specified. It actually means, that if we specify a
small value in comparison to the relative velocity, the jump behavior is better approximated, but
numerical instabilities can be expected. A large value means, that we need a large relative velocity before
we get the force at which the slip occurs.
It is suggested to use values between 0.1 and 0.01 times a typical surface velocity.
Numerical Procedures
Lagrange Multipliers
In performing contact analyses, you are solving a constrained minimization problem where the constraint
is the no penetration constraint. The Lagrange multiplier technique is the most elegant procedure to
apply mathematical constraints to a system. Using this procedure, if the constraints are properly written,
overclosure or penetration does not occur. Unfortunately, Lagrange multipliers lead to numerical
difficulties with the computational procedure as their inclusion results in a nonpositive definite
mathematical system. This requires additional operations to insure an accurate, stable solution which
leads to high computational costs. Another problem with this method is that there is no mass associated
with the Lagrange multiplier degree of freedom. This results in a global mass matrix which cannot be
decomposed. This precludes the used of Lagrange multiplier techniques in explicit dynamic calculations
CHAPTER 12 431
Contact
which are often used in crash simulations. The Lagrange multiplier technique has often been
implemented in contact procedures using special interface elements such as the MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear gap element. This facilitates the correct numerical procedure, but puts a restriction on the
amount of relative motion that can occur between bodies. The use of interface elements requires an
apriori knowledge of where contact occurs. This is unachievable in many physical problems such as
crash analysis or manufacturing simulation.
Penalty Methods
The penalty method or its extension, the Augmented Lagrangian method, is an alternative procedure to
numerically implement the contact constraints. Effectively, the penalty procedure constrains the motion
by applying a penalty to the amount of penetration that occurs. The penalty approach can be considered
as analogous to a nonlinear spring between the two bodies. Using the penalty approach, some penetration
occurs with the amount being determined by the penalty constant or function. The choice of the penalty
value can also have a detrimental effect on the numerical stability of the global solution procedure. The
penalty method is relatively easy to implement and has been extensively used in explicit dynamic
analysis although it can result in an overly stiff system for deformable-to-deformable contact since the
contact pressure is assumed to be proportional to the pointwise penetration. The pressure distribution is
generally oscillatory.
Hybrid and Mixed Methods
In the hybrid method, the contact element is derived from a complementary energy principle by
introducing the continuity on the contact surface as a constraint and treating the contact forces as
additional elements. Mixed methods, based on perturbed Lagrange formulation, usually consist of
pressure distribution interpolation which is an order less than the displacement field, have also been used
to alleviate the difficulties associated with the pure Lagrange method.
Direct Constraints
Another method for the solution of contact problems is the direct constraint method. In this procedure,
the motion of the bodies is tracked, and when contact occurs, direct constraints are placed on the motion
using boundary conditions both kinematic constraints (MPC and SPC) on transformed degrees of
freedom and nodal forces. This procedure can be very accurate if the program can predict when contact
occurs. This is the procedure that is implemented in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear through the
BCBODY option. No special interference elements are required in this procedure and complex changing
contact conditions can be simulated since no apriori knowledge of where contact occurs is necessary.
Mathematical Aspects of Contact
Please refer to MSC.Marc Volume A, Theory and User Information, section 8 for the
complete description.
Automatic Penetration Checking Procedure
To detect contact between bodies whose boundaries are moving towards each other, an automatic
penetration checking procedure is available. This procedure significantly increases accuracy and
stability for models in which boundary nodes are displacing significantly. Typical examples include
metal forming processes (sheet forming and forging), highly deformable elastomeric models (rubber
boots), and snap-fit problems (inserting a key into a lock).
The automatic penetration checking procedure is automatically activated if the adaptive loading
procedure is selected. If the automatic penetration checking procedure is selected for these two options,
a different procedure, as described below, is used instead.
From a computational perspective, the automatic penetration checking procedure detects penetration
each time displacements are updated.
For implicit analysis, this typically happens after a matrix solution which produces a change in the
displacements due to a change in applied loads and internal forces. The procedure detects nodes
traversing a contact boundary due to the change in displacements. If at least one node penetrates a contact
surface, a scale factor is applied to the change in displacements such that the penetrating nodes are moved
back to the contact surface.
The automatic penetration checking procedure can, therefore, be considered to be a type of a line search.
The procedure also looks at the magnitude of the change in displacement of nodes which already are
contacting and not necessarily penetrating. Using stability considerations, the scale factor calculated
above may be further modified. In addition, for nodes on a contact boundary which are not yet contacting,
a similar procedure is followed to enhance stability.
Because the procedure can reduce the change in displacements, it may require more iterations to
complete an increment. It is important to ensure that the maximum allowable number of iterations to
complete an increment is set to a sufficiently large value. When the adaptive loading procedure is used,
or when the fixed time stepping procedure is used with automatic restarting, the increment automatically
restarts if the maximum allowable number of iterations is exceeded. In the case of the adaptive loading
procedure, the time step is modified.
When dynamics or the arc length control method is used, the above procedure is not available. Instead,
penetration is checked for when convergence is achieved, usually after multiple iterations.
Note:
The automatic penetration checking procedure is always used with the default time
stepping procedures in MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear.
Contact Tolerance
A node comes into contact with another body when it enters the contact tolerance zone. This area is
dependent upon the value of ERROR and BIAS entered on the BCPARA bulk data entry. When BIAS is
zero (the default is 0.9), the tolerance is equidistant from the actual surface as shown in Figure 12-11(a);
otherwise, the situation shown in Figure 12-11(b) is used. If a node would have moved past line B, then
an additional iteration is required.
CHAPTER 12 433
Contact
ERROR
ERROR*(1-BIAS)
ERROR
ERROR*(1+BIAS)
B
(a) Equidistant Default
Figure 12-11
(b) Biased
Contact Tolerances
Separation
A node on a body separates from another surface when a tensile load is required to keep it on the surface.
The procedure used is either based upon the nodal force or an effective nodal stress. The default
separation force is the maximum residual force (separation based upon nodal force method) or the
maximum stress at reaction nodes times the convergence tolerance (nodal stress method).
Corner Conditions
When a node slides along a surface composed of multiple segments, three conditions can occur based
on the angle that the segments make. This is true for both two-dimensional and three-dimensional
problems. The Figure 12-12 shows the two-dimensional case for simplicity. If the angle between the two
segments is between 180 - < < 180 + , the node smoothly slides between the segments. If the angle
is such that 0 < < 180 - , the node sticks in the sharp concave corner. If the angle is such that > 180
+ , the node separates. The value of is 8.625 for two-dimensional problems and 20 for
three-dimensional problems.
Smooth
Sharp Concave
Sharp Convex
Figure 12-12
Corner Conditions
Implementation of Constraints
For contact between a deformable body and a rigid surface, the constraint associated with no penetration
is implemented by transforming the degrees of freedom of the contact node and applying a boundary
condition to the normal displacement. This can be considered solving the problem:
K a a K a b u a
f a
K b a K b b u b
fb
where a represents the nodes in contact which have a local transformation, and b represents the nodes
not in contact and, hence, not transformed. Of the nodes transformed, the displacement in the normal
direction is then constrained such that u a n is equal to the incremental normal displacement of the rigid
body at the contact point.
t
P
Figure 12-13
As a rigid body can be represented as either a piecewise linear or as an analytical (NURB) surface, two
procedures are used. For piecewise linear representations, the normal is constant until node P comes to
the corner of two segments as shown in Figure 12-14. During the iteration process, one of three
circumstances occur. If the angle is small ( smooth < < smooth ) , the node P slides to the next
segment. In such a case, the normal is updated based upon the new segment. If the angle is large
( > smooth or < smooth ) the node separates from the surface if it is a convex corner, or sticks if
it is a concave corner. The value of smooth is important in controlling the computational costs. A larger
value of smooth reduces the computational costs, but might lead to inaccuracies. The default values are
8.625 for 2-D and 20 for 3-D. These can be reset using the ANG2D or ANG3D fields on the NLSTRAT
entry for each subcase.
CHAPTER 12 435
Contact
Convex Corner
Figure 12-14
Concave Corner
In 3-D, these corner conditions are more complex. A node (P) on patch A slides freely until it reaches
the intersection between the segments. If it is concave, the node first tries to slide along the line of
intersection before moving to segment B. This is the natural (lower energy state) of motion.
These corner conditions also exist for deformable-to-deformable contact analysis. Because the bodies
are continuously changing in shape, the corner conditions (sharp convex, smooth or sharp concave) are
continuously being re-evaluated.
When a rigid body is represented as an analytical surface, the normal is recalculated at each iteration
based upon the current position. This leads to a more accurate solution, but can be more costly because
of the NURB evaluation.
A
B
P
Figure 12-15
When a node of a deformable body contacts a deformable body, a multipoint constraint (MPC) is
automatically imposed. Recalling that the exterior edges (2-D) or faces (3-D) of the other deformable
bodies are known, a constraint expression is formed. For 2-D analysis, the number of retained nodes is
three two from the edge and the contacting node itself. For 3-D analysis, the number of retained nodes
is five four from the patch and the contacting node itself. The constraint equation is such that the
contacting node should be able to slide on the contacted segment, subject to the current friction
conditions. This leads to a nonhomogeneous, nonlinear constraint equation. In this way, a contacting
node is forced to be on the contacted segment. This might introduce undesired stress changes, since a
small gap or overlap between the node and the contacted segment will be closed. During initial detection
of contact (increment 0), the stress-free projection option avoids those stress changes for deformable
contact by adapting the coordinates of the contacting nodes such that they are positioned on the contacted
segment. This stress-free projection can be activated using the BCTABLE entry. A similar option exists
for glued contact; however, in this case, overlap will not be removed.
During the iteration procedure, a node can slide from one segment to another, changing the retained nodes
associated with the constraint. A recalculation of the bandwidth is automatically made. Because the
bandwidth can radically change, the bandwidth optimization is also automatically performed.
A node is considered sliding off a contacted segment if is passes the end of the segment over a distance
more than the contact tolerance. As mentioned earlier, the node separates from the contacted body if this
happens at a convex corner. For deformable contact, this tangential tolerance at convex corners can be
enlarged by using the delayed sliding off option activated via the BCTABLE bulk data entry.
Separation
After a node comes into contact with a surface, it is possible for it to separate in a subsequent iteration or
increment. Mathematically, a node should separate when the reaction force between the node and surface
becomes tensile or positive. Physically, you could consider that a node should separate when the tensile
force or normal stress exceeds the surface tension. Rather than use an exact mathematical definition, you
can enter the force or stress required to cause separation.
Separation can be based upon either the nodal forces or the nodal stresses. The use of the nodal stress
method is recommended as the influence of element size is eliminated.
In many analysis, contact occurs but the contact forces are small; for example, laying a piece of paper on
a desk. Because of the finite element procedure, this could result in numerical chattering. MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear has some additional contact control parameters that can be used to minimize this
problem. As separation results in additional iterations (which leads to higher costs), the appropriate
choice of parameters can be very beneficial.
When contact occurs, a reaction force associated with the node in contact balances the internal stress of
the elements adjacent to this node. When separation occurs, this reaction force behaves as a residual force
(as the force on a free node should be zero). This requires that the internal stresses in the deformable body
be redistributed. Depending on the magnitude of the force, this might require several iterations.
You should note that in static analysis, if a deformable body is constrained only by other bodies (no
explicit boundary conditions) and the body subsequently separates from all other bodies, it would then
have rigid body motion. For static analysis, this would result in a singular or nonpositive definite system.
This problem can be avoided by appropriate boundary conditions.
Release
A special case of separation is the intentional release of all nodes from a rigid body. This is often used in
manufacturing analysis to simulate the removal of the workpiece from the tools. After the release occurs
in such an analysis, there might be a large redistribution of the loads. It is possible to gradually reduce
the residual force to zero, which improves the stability, and reduces the number of iterations required.
The BCMOVE Bulk Data entry allows the release (separation) of all the nodes in contact with a particular
CHAPTER 12 437
Contact
surface at the beginning of the increment. The rigid body should be moved away using the BCMOVE
Bulk Data entry or deactivated using the BCTABLE entry to ensure that the nodes do not inadvertently
recontact the surface they were released from.
2. The two-dimensional beams can come into contact with deformable bodies either of continuum
elements or other beam elements. As the beams are in two dimensions, they do not intersect
one another.
3-D Beams
Three-dimensional beam elements can be used in contact in three modes.
1. The nodes of the beams can come into contact with rigid bodies composed of surfaces. The normal
is based upon the normal of the rigid surface.
2. Nodes of the three-dimensional beams can also come into contact with the faces of
three-dimensional continuum elements or shell elements.
3. The three-dimensional elastic beams can also contact other elastic beams. In this case, we can
consider beams crossing one another. In such cases, the beams are automatically subdivided
such that four beams are created. As the beams slide upon each other, they are adaptively changed
in length.
Contact Occurs
Figure 12-16
Beam-to-Beam Contact
Shell Elements
All nodes on shell elements are potential contact nodes. As the midside nodes of shell elements are
automatically tied, the high-order shell elements have no benefit. Shell elements can contact either rigid
bodies, continuum elements, or other shell elements. Shell-shell contact involves a more complex
analysis because it is necessary to determining which side of the shell contact occurs.
Friction Modeling
The regularized form of the Coulomb friction model can be written as:
2f n
vr
f t Z JJJJJJJJJJJJ arctan JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
RVCNST
CHAPTER 12 439
Contact
is a nonlinear relation between the relative sliding velocity and the friction force. Implementation in
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear has been done using a nonlinear spring model. Noting that the behavior
of a nonlinear spring, as shown in Figure 12-17, is given by the equation:
u1
K K
K K
F1
u2
F2
u, F
u, F
Figure 12-17
Spring Model
in which K is the spring stiffness and u 1 , u 2 , F 1 , and F 2 are displacements and forces of points 1 and
2, the equivalent in terms of velocities is readily seen to read
v1
K K
K K
F1 t
v2
F2 t
Since K is a nonlinear function of the relative velocity, the above equation is solved incrementally,
where within each increment a number of iterations may be necessary. For a typical iteration i , the
equation to be solved looks like
K
K
i
v 1
v 2
F 1 t
(12-1)
F 2 t
v1 Z v1
i
v2
i1
v2
H v 1
i1
Notice that v 1
(12-2)
i
v 2
i1
and v 2
v 2 Z 0 ,
(12-3)
since the motion of a rigid body (to which node 2 belongs) is exactly prescribed by you. In a static
analysis, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear provides no direct information about velocities, so they
have to be calculated from the displacement and time increments. Denoting a time increment by t , we
can write
i
v 1
u
Z JJJJJJJJ1J ,
t
(12-4)
i1
i1
u 1 Z u 1
H u 1
(12-5)
Substituting Equation (12-3) and Equation (12-6) into Equation (12-1) yields
i
1 i i
JJJJJ K u 1 Z F 1
t
(12-6)
For the first iteration of an increment, an improvement of Equation (12-6) can be achieved by taking into
p
account the velocity v 1 at the end of the previous increment. Then Equation (12-3) can be rewritten as
1
u
1
p
v 1 Z JJJJJJJJJ1J v 1 ,
t
(12-7)
(12-8)
(12-9)
i
In Equation (12-9), v r denotes the relative velocity between the points 1 and 2 at the end of the previous
increment. It must be noted that the additional term in Equation (12-9) is especially important if the
velocity of the rigid body differs much from the relative velocity. This is usually the case in rolling
processes, when the roll has been modeled as a rigid body. For this reason, this improved friction model
is called friction for rolling.
Friction is a complex physical phenomena that involves the characteristics of the surface such as
surface roughness, temperature, normal stress, and relative velocity. The actual physics of friction
continues to be a topic of research. Hence, the numerical modeling of the friction has been simplified to
two idealistic models.
The most popular friction model is the Adhesive Friction or Coulomb Friction model. This model is used
for most applications with the exception of bulk forming such as forging. The Coulomb model is:
f r n t
CHAPTER 12 441
Contact
where
n
f r
v
t Z JJJJJJJrJ
vr
v r is the relative sliding velocity.
The Coulomb model is also often written with respect to forces
f t f n t
where
ft
fn
Quite often in contact problems, neutral lines develop. This means that along a contact surface, the
material flows in one direction in part of the surface and in the opposite direction in another part of the
surface. Such neutral lines are, in general, not known a priori.
For a given normal stress, the friction stress has a step function behavior based upon the value of v r
or u .
ft or fr
Stick
vr
Slip
Figure 12-18
This discontinuity in the value of f r can result in numerical difficulties so a modified Coulomb friction
model is implemented:
vr
2
f r n JJJ arctan JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ t
RVCNST
Physically, the value of RVCNST is the value of the relative velocity when sliding occurs. The value of
RVCNST is important in determining how closely the mathematic model represents the step function. A
very large value of RVCNST results in a reduced value of the effective friction. A very small value results
in poor convergence. It is recommended that the value of RVCNST be 1% or 10% of a typical relative
sliding velocity, v r . Because of this smoothing procedure, a node in contact always has some slipping.
Besides the numerical reasons, this ever slipping node model has a physical basis. Oden and Pires
pointed out that for metals, there is an elasto-plastic deformation of asperities at the microscopic level
(termed as cold weld) which leads to a nonlocal and nonlinear frictional contact behavior. The arctan
representation of the friction model is a mathematical idealization of this nonlinear friction behavior.
When the Coulomb model is used with the stress based model, the integration point stresses are first
extrapolated to the nodal points and then transformed so a direct component is normal to the contacted
surface. The tangential stress is then evaluated and a consistent nodal force is calculated.
For shell elements, since n 0 a nodal force based Coulomb model is used:
vr
2
f t Z f n JJJ arctan JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ t
RVCNST
ft
C = 0.01
C = 0.1
C=1
C = 10
C = 100
-10
10
-1
Figure 12-19
CHAPTER 12 443
Contact
This nodal forced based model should not be used if a nonlinear friction coefficient is to be used, as this
nonlinearity is, in general, dependent upon the stress, not the force. This model can also be used for
continuum elements.
The Coulomb friction model can also be utilized as a true stick-slip model. In this procedure, a node
completely sticks to a surface until the tangential force reaches the critical value f n . Also, to model the
differences in static versus dynamic friction coefficients, an overshoot parameter, , can be used.
The stick-slip model is always based upon the nodal forces. When using the stick-slip procedure, the
program flow is:
Initial Contact
No
Yes
u t 0
Assume Slipping
Mode
Assume Sticking
Mode
Determine Solution
of Next Iteration
Note that this procedure requires additional computations to determine if the stick-slip condition has
converged. It requires that
ft
1 e JJJJpJ 1 H e
ft
p
fn
fn
ft
2
2
Coulomb friction is a highly nonlinear phenomena dependent upon both the normal force and relative
velocity. Because the Coulomb friction model is an implicit function of the velocity or displacement
increment, the numerical implementation of friction has two components: a force contribution and a
contribution to the stiffness matrix. The stiffness is calculated based upon:
f t
K i j Z JJJJJJJJJi
v r
This later contribution leads to a nonsymmetric system. Because of the additional computational costs
both in terms of memory and CPU costs, the contribution to the stiffness matrix is symmetrized. For the
CHAPTER 12 445
Contact
calculation of the instabilities associated with brake squeal, the nonsymmetric friction contribution to the
stiffness is made.
When the stress based friction model is used, the following steps are taken.
1. Extrapolate the physical stress, equivalent stress, and temperature from the integration points to
the nodes using the conventional element shape functions.
2. Calculate the normal stress.
3. Calculate the relative sliding velocity. At the beginning of an increment, the previously calculated
relative sliding velocity is used as the starting point. When a node first comes into contact, it is
assumed that it is first sticking, so the relative sliding velocity is zero.
4. Numerically integrate the friction forces and the stiffness contribution.
For the case of deformable-deformable contact, loads equal in magnitude and opposite in direction are
applied to the body that is contacted. Each of these loads is extrapolated to the closest boundary nodes.
With this procedure, it is guaranteed that all friction forces applied are in self equilibrium.
The Coulomb friction model often does not correlate well with experimental observations when the
normal force/stress becomes large. If the normal stress becomes large, the Coulomb model might predict
that the frictional shear stresses increase to a level that can exceed the flow stress or the failure stress of
the material. As this is not physically possible, the choices are either to have a nonlinear coefficient of
friction or to use the cohesive, shear based friction model.
fr
Observed Behavior
Figure 12-21
The shear based model states that the frictional stress is a fraction of the equivalent stress in the material:
f r m JJJJJJJ t
3
Again, this model is implemented using an arctangent function to smooth out the step function:
vr
2
f r m JJJJJJJ JJJ arctan JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ t
RVCNST
3
This model is available for all elements using the distributed load approach.
When a node contacts a rigid body, the coefficient of friction associated with the rigid body is used. When
a node contacts a deformable body, the average of the coefficients for the two bodies are used. Various
BCTABLE options can be used if complex situations occur.
Recalling that friction is a complex physical phenomena, due to variations in surface conditions, lubricant
distribution, and lubricant behavior, relative sliding, temperature, geometry, and so on.
The above two friction models may be extend, if necessary, by means of user subroutine UFRIC. In such
a routine, you provide the friction coefficient or the friction factor as
Z ( x, f n, T, v r, y )
or
m Z m ( x, f n, T, v r y )
x
fn
vr
Glue Model
A special type of friction model is the glue option, which imposes that there is no relative tangential
motion. The glue motion is activated through the BCTABLE bulk data entry.
A novel application of contact is to join two dissimilar meshes. In such a case, by specifying a very large
separation force and that the glue motion is activated, the constraint equations are automatically written
between the two meshes.
CHAPTER 12 447
Contact
Motion of Surfaces
Deformable surfaces can move either because of contact with other surfaces, or because of directly
applied displacement boundary conditions or loads.
To each surface, we associate a point (center of rotation) that can be anywhere in space. A translative
velocity and a rotational velocity around that point define the instantaneous motion of the surface. These
velocities are integrated forward in time to define the motion of the surfaces. It is also possible to directly
prescribe the location of the rigid body. As an alternative, you can prescribe a force or SPCD which is
consider a special type of force to the rigid body.
The BCBODY model definition option can be used for the input of constant rigid body motions which
do not change with time during the analysis. However, changes in rigid body motion (time dependent
motion) can be simulated either applying the proper motion to the GRID point at the CG of the rigid body
or by the user subroutine MOTION activated through the model definition option UMOTION.
Cautions
In static analysis, it is necessary to artificially connect (for instance, by very low stiffness springs)
deformable bodies that during an analysis might be completely separated from other deformable bodies
and have no kinematic boundary conditions applied. This is to avoid rigid body motion (PARAM,
MRSPRING).
A debug printout parameter (PARAM,MARCPRN) is available in contact analysis, it produces
information on when any node on the boundary comes into contact or separates from any surface. It also
produces information on whether a contact node is fixed to a surface or is free to slide along it. In addition
to the printed contact information, the incremental displacement and the reaction forces for those nodes
in contact with rigid surfaces are printed in a local coordinate system.
There are three implied loops in the portion of the program dealing with contact: the outermost loop is
over the number of surfaces; the next loop is over the number of sets of geometrical data for each surface;
and the innermost loop is over the number of points comprised in each set. In case of deformable surfaces,
the two inner loops reduce to the list of elements.
CHAPTER 12 449
Contact
During each load increment, separations can occur. You can control the maximum number of nodal
separations allowed in each increment to reduce computational costs. During each load increment, if the
contact of a node (or a group of nodes) is detected, iteration occurs in order to accommodate the contact
condition. Depending on the occurrence of further contact, the load increment recursively split until the
total incremental load is reached.
Line Segments
When the Line Segment option is chosen, the number NPOINT and the coordinates (x, y) of (NPOINT)
points must be entered for the definition of the rigid surface. MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
automatically creates a rigid surface consisting of (NPOINT -1) linear segments for the contact problem.
A two-dimensional rigid surface consisted of line segments is shown in Figure 12-22.
This entity supports analytic description/procedure.
Start point
1
Rigid body
3
4
Figure 12-22
End point
6
Circular Arc
When the Circular Arc option is chosen, one circular segment is created by MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear. There are five different methods available to define a circular arc in two dimensions. Each
method requires four data blocks with the following type of data may be used to describe the arcs:
Starting Point of Arc
(SP)
Ending Point of Arc
(EP)
Center of Circle
(C)
Radius of Circle
(R)
Tangent Angles
(TA)
Swept Angle
(SA)
Number of Subdivisions (NS)
Clearly, not all of this information is required for each method. The table below describes which data is
required. The default number of subdivisions is 10. If the analytical approach is used, the number of
subdivisions does not influence the accuracy, but is only used for visualization purposes.
Method
Data Block
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
EP
EP
EP
EP
blank
TA1, TA2
R, NS
R, NS
R, NS
R, NS
SA, NS
CHAPTER 12 451
Contact
For methods 1 and 3, a positive radius means the center of the circle is on the surface side. A negative
radius means the center of the circle is on the outside.
For method 2, the first coordinate of the center is taken into account, determining whether the center is
above (>0) or below (<0) the segment defined by the end points.
For planar problems, SP, EP and C are X, Y data.
For axisymmetric problems, SP, EP and C are Z, R data.
For methods 0, 1 and 2, if R is zero, it is calculated as distance from the center to the starting point.
This entity supports analytical description/procedure.
A two-dimensional rigid surface represented by a circular arc is shown in Figure 12-23 and Figure 12-24.
End point
Center
+
Start point
1
Radius
Note:
Figure 12-23
EP
EP
SP
R
SP
Method 0 Positive R
Method 1 Negative R
EP
TA2
SP
SA
SP
TA1
Method 3 Positive R
Figure 12-24
Method 4 Positive R
Spline
When the Spline option is chosen, MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear creates a spline by passing from the
second point through to the second to last point entered. The first and the last points entered are used to
define the tangents at the beginning and end of the spline. If a nonanalytical approach is used, then the
spline is internally split into linear segments in such a way that the maximum difference between any of
them and the spline is less than the contact tolerance ERROR. This operation is done before the automatic
tolerance calculation; therefore, a value for ERROR must be entered whenever a spline is used.
Figure 12-25 shows a two-dimensional rigid surface defined by a spline.
6
End point
Note:
4
Rigid body
Start point
Figure 12-25
This entity supports analytical description/procedure if only one spline is used in a particular rigid body.
Three-dimensional Rigid Surfaces
In a three-dimensional problem, the rigid surfaces are represented by any of or a combination of the
following three-dimensional surface entities:
Surface Entity Type
Ruled surface
Surface of revolution
Bezier surface
4-node patch
Poly-surface
NURB
Cylinder
10
Sphere
11
The variable ITYPE defines the type of surface entity to be used for a rigid surface. Since most of the
three-dimensional surfaces can be easily and adequately represented by a finite element mesh of 4-node
plate (patch) elements, the option ITYPE = 7 is a very convenient way of representing three-dimensional
rigid surfaces. Both the connectivities and the coordinates of the 4-node patches can be generated using
MSC.Patran, or entered through user subroutine DIGEOM.
CHAPTER 12 453
Contact
The three-dimensional surface entities mentioned above, except 4-node patches, can in turn be generated
from three-dimensional geometric entities. Available three-dimensional geometric entities are:
Geometric Entity Type
Spline
Bezier Curve
Poly line
The variable JTYPE defines the type of geometric entities to be used for the generation of
three-dimensional rigid surfaces.
For the (PWL) approach, note that all geometrical data in 3-D space is reduced to 4-node patches. The
four nodes will probably not be on the same plane. The error in the approximation is determined by the
number of subdivisions of the defined surfaces. Note that the normal to a patch is defined by the
right-hand rule, based on the sequence in which the four points are entered.
Note:
MSC.Patran produces a nurbs description for all 3-D rigid surfaces, even when patches or
other geometrical shapes are specified. If rigid bodies made of patches are desired then the
geometry should be meshed, and the elements specified as the application region.
Ruled Surface
When the Ruled surface option is chosen, a ruled surface is created by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear
based on the input of two surface generators, defined by straight line segment (JTYPE = 1), 3D circular
arc (JTYPE = 2), spline (JTYPE = 3) or Bezier curve (JTYPE = 4). If the surface generator is not a 3D
circular arc, the number NPOINT1 (NPOINT2) and the coordinates (x, y, z) of these NPOINT1
(NPOINT2) points must be entered for the definition of the surface generators. In case the surface
generator is a 3D circular arc, a method (METH) must be selected for the definition of the circular arc.
A 3D circular arc is defined by four points. In addition, the number of subdivisions, NDIV1, along the
first (surface generator) and the NDIV2 along the second (from the first surface generator to second
surface generator) direction must also be entered. For a (PWL) approach, MSC.Nastran Implicit
Nonlinear creates (NDIV1) x (NDIV2) 4-node patches automatically to represent the prescribed ruled
surface. For analytical approach, (NDIV1 + 1) x (NDIV2 + 1) points are created and a NURB surface is
general which passes exactly through these points. The accuracy in general is controlled by the number
of points. Figure 12-26 shows a typical ruled surface.
Start point
End point
2
2nd Geometric entity
Start point
1
End point
1st Geometric entity
1: first direction
2: second direction
: normal direction into the rigid body
z
y
x
NDIV2 = 3
NDIV1 = 4
NDIV1 = number of divisions in the first direction
NDIV2 = number of divisions in the second direction
Figure 12-26
Surface of Revolution
When the Surface of revolution option is chosen, a surface of revolution is created by MSC.Nastran
Implicit Nonlinear based on the input of one surface generator, defined by straight line segment (JTYPE
= 1), 3-D circular arc (JTYPE = 2), spline (JTYPE = 3) or Bezier curve (JTYPE = 4). If the surface
generator is not a 3-D circular arc, the number NPOINT and the coordinates (x, y, z) of these NPOINT
points must be entered for the definition of the surface generator. In case the surface generator is a 3-D
circular arc, a method (METH) must be selected for the definition of the circular arc. A 3-D circular arc
is defined by four points. In addition, the number of subdivisions NDIV1 along the surface generator and
NDIV2 along the second (circumferential) direction must also be entered.
MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear then creates (NDIV1 x NDIV2) four-node patches automatically, to
represent the prescribed surface of revolution. The axis of revolution is defined by the coordinates (x, y,
z) of two points in space, and an angle of rotation from the initial position is also needed for the definition
of the surface of revolution. A positive rotation is about the axis formed from point 1 to point 2.
Figure 12-27 shows a typical surface of revolution.
CHAPTER 12 455
Contact
Point 1
Angle of
rotation
End point
Point 2
z
Figure 12-27
1: First direction
2: Second direction
: Normal direction into the rigid body
Bezier Surface
When the Bezier Surface option is chosen, a Bezier surface is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of
NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 control points. NPOINT1 points are entered along the first direction and then
repeated NPOINT2 times to fill through the second direction of the surface. NPOINT1 and NPOINT2
have to be at least equal to 4. Number of subdivisions (NDIV1, NDIV2) entered has to be equal or greater
than NPOINT1 and NPOINT2 for Bezier surface. (NPOINT1-1) x (NPOINT2-1) 4-node patches are
created by MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear for the definition of a Bezier surface. Figure 12-28 shows
a typical Bezier surface. If it can be treated as an analytical surface, an exact conversion to NURBS
is performed.
r13
r23
r33
r22
r03
r32
r12
r21
r11
r31
NPOINT2 = 4 r02
NDIV2 = 4
2
r20
r01
r10
r30
1
y
Figure 12-28
r00
NPOINT1 = 4
NDIV1 = 4
1: First direction
2: Second direction
: Normal direction into the rigid body
Four-node patches
When the Four-Node Patches option is chosen, you enter directly all the 4-node patches that comprise
this surface. They are entered following the same format MSC.Nastran Implicit Nonlinear would use to
specify connectivities and coordinates of a mesh of CQUAD4 elements. In this way, a finite element
preprocessor can be used to create surfaces. Alternatively, this data can be entered via the user subroutine
DIGEOM further permitting you to read by yourself from any data you have access to. Figure 12-29
shows a typical 4-node patch surface. It cannot be used as an analytical surface.
CHAPTER 12 457
Contact
Number of patches = 12
Number of nodes = 20
12
y
x
13
7
8
12
Rigid body
13
12
13
1
Rigid body
8
1: First direction
2: Second direction
: Normal vector (right-hand rule) into the rigid body
Figure 12-29
Poly-surface
When the Poly-Surface option is chosen, a poly-surface is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of
NPOINT1 x NPOINT2 control points. NPOINT1 points are entered along the first direction and then
repeated NPOINT2 times to fill through the second direction of the surface. NPOINT1 and NPOINT2
have to be at least equal to 4 for a poly-surface and there is no need to divide it. A typical poly-surface
is shown in Figure 12-30.
53
54
52
43
51
55
44
42
45
34
33
41
35
32
NPOINT2 = 5
24
23
31
25
22
2
21
12
y
Figure 12-30
14
13
15
11
NPOINT1 = 5
1: First direction
2: Second direction
: Normal direction into the rigid body
CHAPTER 12 459
Contact
+10
+8
+6
+9
+7
+5
+4
+2
+3
Z
Y
+1
Figure 12-31
R1
C1
R2
C2
Y
Z
Figure 12-32
Sphere Surface
When the Spherical Surface option is chosen, a sphere is defined by the coordinates (x, y, z) of the center,
C1, with radius, R1. The normal vector of sphere is inwards. If a negative value of R1 is entered, the
normal vector is outwards. A typical sphere is shown in Figure 12-33.
R1
C1
Figure 12-33
CHAPTER 12 461
Contact
Method
Data Block
SP
SP
SP
EP
MP
AP
EP
SAF
SA
For Method 1, a positive radius means the center of the circle is on the surface side. A negative radius
means the center of the circle is on the outside.
For Method 2, SAF that is positive means an angle less than 180, a negative value an angle greater
than 180.
For Method 3, the starting point, arbitrary point and center define the plane in which the circular arc lies.
SP, EP, C, MP and AP are X, Y, Z data.
For an arc with 180 degrees, either Method 1 or Method 2 is recommended.
A three-dimensional rigid surface represented by a circular arc is shown in Figure 12-34.
EP
EP
MP
SP
SP
Method 0
Method 1
SA
SP
AP
Method 2
Figure 12-34
Spline
When JTYPE = 3 is chosen, the spline passes by all NPOINT declared, and has zero curvature at the ends
(enter at least 4 points).
Bezier curve
When JTYPE = 4 is chosen, a Bezier curve is defined by NPOINT control points (enter at least 4 points).
Poly-line
When JTYPE = 5 is chosen, a poly-line defined by NPOINT control points.
Selective Contact Surfaces
In both the two- and three-dimensional contact problems, contact is always detected between nodes on
the surface of a deformable body and the geometrical profile of another surface. There are two modes of
the order in which a node checks contact with other bodies. The default version is the double-sided
contact procedure. In the single-sided contact procedure, the nodes on a lower numbered body can come
into contact with equally or higher numbered surfaces. For instance, the boundary nodes of body number
1 are checked against the surface profiles of bodies 1, 2, 3, .... The boundary nodes of body number 2,
however, are only checked against surface profiles of bodies 2, 3, ... It is possible, therefore, that due to
surface discretization, a node of body 2 slightly penetrates the surface of body 1.
The double-sided contact option checks possible contact between any two surfaces (surface i is checked
for contact with surface j, and surface j is also checked for contact with surface i, where i, j = 1, 2, 3, ...,
total number of surfaces in the problem).
In addition, the BCTABLE entry is provided to you for the selection of contact surfaces. Through this
option, you can choose, for instance, the surface no. 1 to be in contact with surfaces 3, 5, 6, 7, but not
with surfaces 2 and 4. This option can repeatedly be used during an analysis by specifying different
BCTABLE entries for different subcases.
You can further restrict the potential contact by using the BCHANGE bulk data entry.
Description
BCBODY
GMNURB
BSURF
BCBOX
CHAPTER 12 463
Contact
Entry
Description
BCPROP
BCMATL
BCHANGE
The Application Region form for contact is used to select the contact bodies whether they be deformable
or rigid. Deformable contact bodies are always defined as a list of elements, the boundary of which
defines the contact surface. Rigid bodies are translated as ruled surfaces (2D) or straight line segments
(1D) if a mesh or geometry with an associated mesh is selected. Otherwise, if no mesh is associated
with the selected geometry, the contact definition will be written as geometric NURB surfaces
during translation.
Deformable Body
Defining a deformable contact body requires the following data via the Input Properties subform on the
Loads/Boundary Conditions Application form.
Description
Friction
Coefficient (MU)
Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between
two bodies with different friction coefficients, the average value is used.
Environment Sink
Temperature
Boundary
Exclusion Region
Rigid Body
Defining a rigid contact body requires the following data via the Input Properties subform on the
Loads/Boundary Conditions Application form. The input data form differs for 1-D and 2-D rigid bodies.
One dimensional rigid surfaces are defined as beam elements, or as curves (which may be meshed with
beam elements prior to translation) and used in 2-D problems. The lines or beams must be in the global
X-Y plane. Two dimensional rigid surfaces must be defined as Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements, or as surfaces
(which may be meshed with Quad/4 or Tri/3 elements prior to translation) and are used in 3-D problems.
The elements will be translated as 4-node patches if meshed or as NURB surfaces if not meshed.
CHAPTER 12 465
Contact
Input
Description
Symmetry Plane
This toggle is enabled only for Velocity and Position type of Motion
Control. If it is ON, the initial velocity, position, and angular
velocity/rotation are set to zero in the CONTACT option regardless of
their settings here (for increment zero).
Motion Control
Velocity (vector)
Angular Velocity
(rad/time)
For velocity controlled rigid bodies, if the rigid body rotates, give its
angular velocity in radians per time (seconds usually) about the center
of rotation (global Z axis for 2-D problems) or axis of rotation (for
3-D problems).
If a rigid body velocity changes with time, its time definition may be
defined through a non-spatial field, which can then be selected via this
widget. It will be scaled by the vector definition of the velocity as defined
in the Velocity widget. The Angular Velocity will also be scaled by this
time field.
Coefficient of static friction for this contact body. For contact between
two bodies with different friction coefficients the average value is used.
This is a point or node that defines the center of rotation of the rigid body.
If left blank the rotation reference point will default to the origin.
Input
Description
Axis of Rotation
For 2D rigid surfaces in a 3-D problem, aside from the rotation reference
point, if you wish to define rotation you must also specify the axis in the
form of a vector.
This is for Force or SPCD controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which
the force or SPCD is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the
force, but the application node must also be specified here. If both force
and moment are specified, they must use different control nodes even if
they are coincident. If only 1 control node is specified the rigid body will
not be allowed to rotate.
This is for Moment controlled rigid motion. It is the node to which the
moment is applied. A separate LBC must be defined for the moment, but
the application node must also be specified here. It also acts as the
rotation reference point. If both force and moment are specified, they
must use different control nodes even if they are coincident.
Note:
After defining rigid bodies in your model, you can preview the rigid body motion by
selecting Preview Rigid Body Motion...
Slideline
Slideline contact is not supported by SOL 600.
CHAPTER 12 467
Contact
Contact Parameters
This section describes the general parameters available in SOL 600 for detecting contact, controlling
separation, and modeling friction.
Entry
Description
BCONTACT
BCPARA
BOUTPUT
Note:
For all solution sequences other than SOL 600, BOUTPUT request line contact output. For
SOL 600, BOUTPUT request 2-D or 3-D contact output. Only SORT1 output is available for
SOL 600.
DeformableDeformable Method
In Double-Sided method, for each contact body pair, nodes of both bodies
will be checked for contact. In Single-Sided method, for each contact body
pair, only nodes of the lower-numbered body will be checked for contact.
Results are dependent upon the order in which contact bodies are defined.
Penetration Check
Reduce Printout of
Surface Definition
CHAPTER 12 469
Contact
Distance Tolerance
Contact tolerance BIAS factor. The value should be within the range
of zero to one. Models with shell elements seem to be sensitive to this
parameter. You may need to experiment with this value if you have
shell element models that will not converge.
Check Layers
Ignore Thickness
Activate 3D Beam-Beam
Contact
Quadratic Contact
Separation
5. On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Separation... This form controls general
contact parameters for contact separation.
Maximum Separations
Retain Value on
NCYCLE
Increment
Chattering
Separation Criterion
Force Value
Stress Value
Force/Stress Value is placed in the 5th field of the 3rd data block.
Friction Parameters
6. On the Contact Control Parameters subform, select Friction Parameters...
CHAPTER 12 471
Contact
Friction Type
Available options for friction Type are: None (default), Shear (for metal
forming), Coulomb (for normal contact - default), Shear for Rolling,
Coulomb for Rolling, Stick-Slip.
Note:
Method
For Coulomb type of friction models, there are two methods for
computing friction: Nodal Stress (by default), Nodal Forces.
Relative Sliding Velocity Critical value for sliding velocity below which surfaces will be
simulated as sticking.
Transition Region
Multiplier to Friction
Coefficient
Contact Table
This option is useful for controlling or activating contacting bodies and individual contact pairs. To avoid
unnecessary detection of contact between bodies, you can control which bodies potentially may come
into contact with other bodies. By default MSC.Patran writes BCONTACT=ALLBODY which specifies
is that every body detects the possibility of contact relative to all other bodies and itself if it is a flexible
body. When the BCTABLE option is entered (MSC.Patran writes this entry only if you change
something on the contact table form), the default of detection for every body is overridden. Instead, you
specify the relationship of detection between bodies for contact. The touching body does not contact
itself unless you request it. Whenever the touched body is a flexible one, by default, the capability of
double-sided contact is applied between the contacting bodies. This can be switched off by selecting
single-sided contact or by setting the searching order in the BCTABLE entry. A positive value of the
interference closure implies that there is an overlap between the bodies; a negative value implies that a
gap exists.
The following control variables of contact between bodies can be modified throughout the table: contact
tolerance, separation force, friction coefficient, interference closure and contact heat transfer coefficient
(for coupled thermal-stress-contact analysis starting in version 2006). In addition, you can invoke the
glue option, delayed slide off a deformable body, and stress-free initial contact. The previous value of
those control variables is not overridden unless nonzero values are entered here.
In the glue option, when a node contacts a rigid body, the relative tangential displacement is zero. When
a node contacts a deformable body, all the translational degrees of freedom are tied.
By default, if a node slides off the boundary of a deformable body at a sharp corner by a distance more
than the contact tolerance, contact between the node and the contacted body is lost. By invoking the
delayed sliding off option, the tangential contact tolerance is increased by a factor of 10.
In any static contact analysis, a node contacting a body will be projected onto the contacted segment of
this body. Due to inaccuracies in the finite element model, this might introduce undesired stress changes,
since an overlap or a gap between the node and the contacted segment will be closed. The option for
stress-free initial contact forces a change of the coordinates of a node contacting a deformable body, thus
avoiding the stress changes. In combination with the glue option, a similar effect can be obtained;
however, the overlap or gap will remain.
Specifying a Contact Table Entry
Entry
Description
BCTABLE
Note:
MSC.Patran will only write out the contact table if something on the contact table form is
changed. The default is to write out BCONTACT=ALLBODY which does not require that
the BCTABLE entry be written out
CHAPTER 12 473
Contact
Input
Contact Detection
Description
Default (by body #) -This is the default where contact is checked in the
order the bodies are written to the input deck. In this scenario, the most
finely meshed bodies should be listed first. There will be contact checks
first for nodes of the first body with respect to the second body and then
for nodes of the second body with respect to the first body. If Single
Sided contact is activated on the Contact Parameters subform, then only
the first check is done.
Automatic -Unlike the default, the contact detection is automatically
determined and is not dependent on the order they are listed but
determined by ordering the bodies starting with those having the
smallest edge length. Then there will be only a check on contact for
nodes of the first body with respect to the second body and not the other
way around.
First ->Second - Blanks the lower triangular section of the table matrix
such that no input can be accepted. Only the contact bodies from the
upper portion are written, which forces the contact check of the first
body with respect to the second body.
Second-> First - Blanks the upper triangular section of the table matrix
such that no input can be accepted. Only the contact bodies from the
lower portion are written. Contact detection is done opposite of First>Second.
Double-Sided -Writes both upper and lower portions of the table
matrix. This overrules the Single Sided contact parameter set on the
Contact Parameters subform.
Touch All
Glue All
Deactivate All
Body Type
Lists the body type for each body; either deformable or rigid.
Release
This cell can be toggled for each body to Y or N (yes or no). If Y, this indicates
that the particular contact body is to be removed from this subcase. The forces
associated with this body can be removed immediately in the first increment or
gradually over the entire Load Step with the Force Removal switch
described below.
Touching Body
Touched Body
Input
Description
Distance Tolerance
Set the Distance Tolerance for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the
Enter or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be
referenced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies
with time, temperature, or some other independent variable. This overrides any
other settings for Distance Tolerance.
Separation Force
Set the Separation Force for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the Enter
or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be
referenced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies
with time, temperature, or some other independent variable. This overrides any
other settings for Separation Force.
Friction Coefficient Set the Friction Coefficient for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the
Enter or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be
referenced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies
with time, temperature, or some other independent variable. This overrides any
other settings for Friction Coefficient.
Interference
Closure
Set the Interference Closure for this pair of contact bodies. You must press the
Enter or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field can be
referenced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter varies
with time, temperature, or some other independent variable. This overrides any
other settings for Interference Closure.
Heat Transfer
Coefficient
Set the Heat Transfer Coefficient for this pair of contact bodies. You must press
the Enter or Return key to accept the data in this data box. A nonspatial field
can be referenced that will write this data in TABLE format, if this parameter
varies with time, temperature, or some other independent variable. This
overrides any other settings for Heat Transfer Coefficient. This is only used in
Coupled analysis.
Retain
Gaps/Overlaps
This is only applicable for the Glued option. Any initial gap or overlap between
the node and the contacted body will not be removed (otherwise the node is
projected onto the body which is the default). For deformable-deformable
contact only.
Stress-free Initial
Contact
This is only applicable for initial contact in increment zero, where coordinates
of nodes in contact can be adapted such that they cause stress-free initial
contact. This is important if, due to inaccuracies during mesh generation, there
is a small gap/overlap between a node and the contacted element edge/face. For
deformable-deformable contact only.
By default, at sharp corners, a node will slide off a contacted segment as soon
as it passes the corner by a distance greater than the contact error tolerance. This
extends this tangential tolerance. For deformable-deformable contact only.
CHAPTER 12 475
Contact
Associated with the rigid body is a point labeled the centroid. When the first two methods are chosen,
you define the translational motion of this point, and the angular motion about an axis through this point.
The direction of the axis can be defined for three-dimensional problems. For two-dimensional problems,
it is a line normal to the plane. For complex time-dependent behavior, the MOTION user subroutine can
be used to prescribe the motion as an alternative to the input. The motion during a time increment is
considered to be linear. The position is determined by an explicit, forward integration of the velocities
based upon the current time step. A time increment must always be defined even if a static, rateindependent analysis is performed.
When load controlled (a more accurate name would be control node rigid bodies) rigid bodies are used,
two additional nodes, called the control nodes, are associated with each rigid body. In 2-D problems, the
first node has two translational degrees of freedom (corresponding to the global x- and y-direction) and
the second node has one rotational degree of freedom (corresponding to the global z-direction). In 3-D
problems, the first node has three translational degrees of freedom (corresponding to global x-, y-, and
z-direction) and the second node has three rotational degrees of freedom (corresponding to the global x-,
y-, and z-direction). In this way, both forces and moments can be applied to a body for the control nodes.
Alternatively, one may prescribe one or more degrees of freedom of the control nodes by using the SPCD
bulk data entries. Generally speaking, load-controlled bodies can be considered as rigid bodies with three
(in 2-D) or six (in 3-D) degrees of freedom. The prescribed position and prescribed velocity methods (see
Figure 12-35) have less computational costs than the prescribed load method (see Figure 12-36),
however it is possible to change the loads and constraints on the control node from one subcase to the
next to prescribe more complex motion of the rigid body.
2
Centroid
1
V
2
1
Figure 12-35
Fy
Mz
Extra Node
Figure 12-36
Fx
If the second control node is not specified, the rotation of the body is prescribed to be zero.
Specifying a Contact Movement Entry
Entry
Description
BCMOVE
This option is used in the Body Approach step which is created by MSC.Patran.
Initial Conditions
At the beginning of the analysis, bodies should either be separated from one another or in contact. Bodies
should not penetrate one another at the start of the analysis unless the objective is to perform an
interference fit calculation. Rigid body profiles are often complex, making it difficult for you to
determine exactly where the first contact is located.
Unlike other MSC.Nastran solution sequences, before a SOL 600 analysis begins, some calculations take
place. This is defined as increment zero. During increment zero, if a rigid body has nonzero motion, the
initialization procedure brings it into first contact with a deformable body. No motion or distortion occurs
in the deformable bodies during this process. In a coupled thermal mechanical analysis, no heat transfer
occurs during this process. If more than one rigid body exists in the analysis, each one with a nonzero
initial velocity is moved until it comes into contact. Because increment zero is used to bring the rigid
bodies into contact only, you should not prescribe any loads (distributed or point) or prescribed
displacements initially. For multistage contact analysis (often needed to simulate manufacturing
processes), the BCMOVE bulk data entry in conjunction with the BCTABLE bulk data entry allow you
to model contact bodies so that they just come into contact with the workpiece. This procedure is called
a Body Approach subcase in MSC.Patran.
CHAPTER 12 477
Contact
Input
Briefly, this type of analysis is accomplished using an input similar to that shown below (additional
examples are in the TPL directory with names tc*.dat)
SOL 600,153 path=1
CEND
ANALYSIS = HEAT
ECHO = NONE
TEMPERATURE(INITIAL) = 2
bcontact=0
SUBTITLE=casea
NLPARM = 1
SPC = 1
LOAD = 3
THERMAL(SORT1,PRINT)=ALL
FLUX(SORT1,PRINT)=ALL
BEGIN BULK
$$$$$param*,heatcmd,nast2005t1 <-- MSC development environment only
PARAM
POST
0
PARAM
AUTOSPC YES
PARAM
SIGMA
1.714-9
NLPARM
1
0
AUTO
5
25
PW
NO
.001
1.-7
PSHELL
1
1
.01
CQUAD4
26
1
55
56
64
63
0.
CQUAD4
27
1
56
57
65
64
0.
...
...
CQUAD4
173
1
226
227
238
237
0.
CQUAD4
174
1
227
228
239
238
0.
MAT4
1
150.
GRID
55
11.
11.
11.
GRID
56
11.
10.8571 11.
...
...
GRID
238
10.1
11.
10.
GRID
239
10.
11.
10.
SPC
1
240
1
0.
QBDY3
3
1000.
100001
QBDY3
3
1000.
100002
...
...
QBDY3
3
1000.
100048
QBDY3
3
1000.
100049
PCONV
1
1001
0
0.
CONV
100050 1
0
0
240
CONV
100051 1
0
0
240
...
...
CONV
100148 1
0
0
240
CONV
100149 1
0
0
240
bsurf, 101, 75, thru, 174
bsurf, 102, 26, thru, 74
bcbody, 111, , heat, 101
,
, heat, 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 4
,
, 0., 0., 0.
bcbody, 112, , heat, 102
,
, heat, 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 0., 4
,
, 0., 0., 0.
bctable, 0, , , 1
, slave, 111, 2.06
, , , , , , 2.01
,
,
, 500., 0., 0., 0., 0.
, master, 112
$ Initial Temperatures
TEMP
2
240
0.
$ Default Initial Temperature
TEMPD
2
0.
$ CHBDYG Surface Elements
CHBDYG
100001
AREA4
55
56
64
63
CHBDYG
100002
AREA4
56
57
65
64
...
...
CHBDYG
100148
AREA4
226
227
238
237
CHBDYG
100149
AREA4
227
228
239
238
$ Free Convection Heat Transfer Coefficients
MAT4
1001
1000.
MAT4
1002
500.
$ Scalar Points
SPOINT
240
ENDDATA
CHAPTER 12 479
Contact
jid.marc.dat
jid.marc.nthcnt
jid.nast.dat
jid.nast.f06
jid.nast.op2
Final output file, all standard jid.nast.* output files are also available
References
1. Oden, J. T. and Pires, E. B. Nonlocal and Nonlinear Friction Laws and Variational Principles for
Contact Problems in Elasticity, J. of Applied Mechanics, V. 50, 1983.
2. Ju, J. W. and Taylor, R. L. A perturbed Lagrangian formulation for the finite element solution of
nonlinear frictional contact problems, J. De Mechanique Theorique et Appliquee, Special issue,
Supplement, 7, 1988.
3. Simo, J. C. and Laursen, T. A. An Augmented Lagranian treatment of contact problems
involving friction, Computers and Structures, 42, 1002.
4. Peric, D. J. and Owen, D. R. J. Computational Model for 3D contact problems with friction based
on the Penalty Method, Int. J. of Meth. Engg., V. 35, 1992.
5. Taylor, R. L., Carpenter, N. J., and Katona, M. G. Lagrange constraints for transient finite
element surface contact, Int. J. Num. Meth. Engg., 32, 1991.
6. Wertheimer, T. B. Numerical Simulation Metal Sheet Forming Processes, VDI BERICHET,
Zurich, Switzerland, 1991
13
Brake Forming
505
Panel Buckling
510
482
500
CHAPTER 13 483
SOL 600 Example Problems
Model Description
The model consists of the engine block, the cylinder head, two connecting bolts, and the gasket.
Due to symmetry, one half of the block-cylinder head assembly is simulated with approximately
2000 3-D elements.
Geometry and Contact Regions
The three-dimensional model for this analysis includes symmetric sections of four separate structures:
the cylinder head, the engine block, the gasket, and the connecting bolts. A plane of symmetry is
introduced vertically through the two connecting bolts.
The primary structure of interest is the head gasket sandwiched between the contacting surfaces of the
cylinder head and engine block. The gasket measures 89mm across and 1 mm high with cutouts for the
cylinder and connecting bolts. An O-ring concentric to the cylinder is embedded within the gasket body.
The O-ring is 3mm wide and lies 2mm from the inside cylinder boundary.
The head, block, and bolts are modeled to fully reflect the contact between surfaces of all four structures.
Extending areas of the block and head panels are modeled with appropriate boundary conditions. The
contact surface between the gasket and the cylinder head and block is modeled as a glued surface. There
is an initial gap between the gasket body and the head and block of .0909mm and no gap between the
gasket ring and the head and block. The overall model measures 93mm length, by 355mm depth, by 44
mm height. The diameter of the cylinder is 48mm.
Finite Element and Contact Model
A total of 2138 hex and wedge elements comprise the finite element model.
The contact surface between the gasket and the cylinder head and block are modeled as glued and
defined in a contact table. The surface between the bolts and the block, head, and gasket are modeled
as touching surfaces.
Material
The head gasket body is constructed using a multi-layer steel material and for this example modeled as
an isotropic material, the in-plane properties are Elastic Modulus of 120 MPa and a Shear Modulus of 60
MPa. The gasket material is highly nonlinear in the thickness direction with a yield pressure of 52 MPa
and exhibits different loading and unloading behavior. The gasket ring is softer with a yield pressure of
42 MPa and also exhibits different loading and unloading curves. The loading and unloading curves for
both gasket body and ring are read in from an external file using the Fields capability in MSC.Patran.
Table 13-1
Gasket Properties
Property
Gasket Body
Gasket Ring
120
120
60
60
Poissons Ratio
0.0
0.0
52
42
72
64
35
35
All other components, including the cylinder head, the block, and the two connecting bolts are modeled
as a standard steel material with a elastic modulus 210000 MPa, and a Poissons Ratio of 0.3.
Loading
The focus of this example is on the pressures introduced on the head gasket as the gap between the
cylinder head and block is closed during bolt preloading. Using the Bolt Preload feature for SOL 600, a
prescribed initial displacement is applied to a cross-section of the connecting bolts. In turn, enforced
displacement entries are generated at the control grids.
Solution Procedure and Controls
The analysis is a single step procedure wherein the initial displacement on the bolts is evaluated to
determine the closure and pressure on the gasket body and ring. A default initial load increment of 1%
is used.
CHAPTER 13 485
SOL 600 Example Problems
body material.
body_unloading.csv - Defines the unloading curve of pressure vs. closure for the gasket
body material.
ring_loading.csv - Defines the loading curve of pressure vs. closure for the gasket ring material.
ring_unloading.csv - Defines the unloading curve of pressure vs. closure for the gasket
ring material.
Output Requests
Gasket Material
Output Requests
The MARCOUT entry specifies the individual output quantities requested. If nothing is specified,
MSC.Nastran produces a set of default output according to the type of analysis. In this example, N38 is
specifically requested to provide the Nodal Contact Status, E241 to provide Element Gasket Pressures,
and E242 to provide Element Gasket Closure.
CHAPTER 13 487
SOL 600 Example Problems
Gasket Material
The MATG entry defines the gasket material properties. Highlighted in the circle, 1 is the table ID for
the loading path and 2 is the table ID for the unloading path. Additional properties including yield
pressure, tensile modulus, transverse shear modulus, and the initial gap, follow the table IDs.
Bolt Preload
CHAPTER 13 489
SOL 600 Example Problems
Enforced Displacements
The FORCE and SPCD entries are used to enforce a displacement on the control grids that were specified
in the MBOLTUS entries above.
Results Files
As an alternative to recreating the analysis model and running the analysis, you may access the generated
results file as follows:
gasket.marc.out - results file that can be opened in a text editor.
gasket.marc.t16 - accessible in MSC.Patran from the gasket.db.
Results Plots
The fringe plot of pressure shows an uneven pressure distribution around the circumference of the gasket
ring with larger pressures concentrated around the bolts.
CHAPTER 13 491
SOL 600 Example Problems
the plastic collapse of the pipe. Initial contact with the external structures is expected to cause elastic
deformation of the steel pipe. Additional incremental movement potentially subjects the structure to
stresses beyond the proportional limit of the material. The yield stress defines the onset of plastic strains
that may initiate the collapse of the structure walls.
This example illustrates several of the capabilities in SOL 600 including large displacement analysis,
contact analysis of a deformable body by rigid body movement, and material plasticity modeled with an
elastic - perfectly plastic model. The resulting deformation data can establish the conditions for
catastrophic collapse of the pipe section and define allowable limits to contact of external structures.
Model Description
The model includes a 3-D representation of the deformable pipe structure and two semi-circular sections
of rigid pipes sections.
Geometry and Contact Regions
The primary structure is a continuous linear section of pipe 24 inches long with a diameter of 8 inches
and a homogeneous wall thickness of 0.4 inches. The pipe surface is void of attachments, holes, bends,
or other discontinuities and the internal volume is empty space. Two external pipe structures are oriented
in a perpendicular direction and lie directly on the top and underneath the primary pipe. The bottom pipe
measures 6 inches in diameter with a length of 10 inches and the top pipe measures 8 inches in diameter
also with a length of 10 inches.
The external pipe structures that lie directly on top and bottom surface of the primary pipe impose no
initial displacement or force, and no conditions are assumed to exist that might cause friction or slippage
at the interface. These external structures move laterally into the pipe section creating a sandwiching
effect. The pipe movement causes deformations on both the upper and lower side of the pipe.
Finite Element and Contact Model
Actual sections of oil and gas pipes can extend past 30 feet. Lengths beyond the 24-inch section modeled
in this problem are assumed be irrelevant in the local collapse of the pipe wall. Each end of the pipe model
is assigned boundary conditions to represent the extension of the pipe in both directions. In addition, the
pipe wall is sufficiently thin so that it is modeled with thick shell elements in this problem.
The finite element mesh for the primary pipe structure contains 18 elements around the circumference
and 18 elements along the length for a total of 324 elements. MSC.Nastran CQUAD4 elements are
selected along with the PSHELL entry that accounts for standard membrane, bending and transverse
shear behavior. All shell elements are assigned a thickness of 0.4 inches, designated with 5 layers, and
defined to be the steel material.
In defining the contact model, the primary pipe section is modeled as a deformable body and the two
external pipe structures are modeled as rigid bodies. Elements comprising the deformable pipe structure
are flagged so that contact by a rigid body creates forces that are used to calculate the deformation of the
pipe. The rigid body structures do not deform and their movement is described with the BCBODY option.
CHAPTER 13 493
SOL 600 Example Problems
The geometry profile of the rigid surface is defined using 3D NURB surfaces that describe the true
surface geometry and most accurately represent the curved surfaces.
Material
The entire pipe section is made of steel and modeled as an elastic-plastic material using the MAT1 and
MATEP entries for large displacement analysis. The linear elastic behavior model is effective up to a
yield stress of 36000psi. In this range imposed stresses induce linear proportional strains. The stressstrain relationship is defined using an elastic modulus of 3.0E+6 and a Poisons ratio of 0.3. Beyond the
yield point perfect plasticity causes complete yielding of the material upon any incremental stress.
Solution Procedure and Controls
A static analysis is performed to determine the pipe deformations that result from contacting rigid bodies.
The rigid body movement and material stiffness specified for this problem require that large
displacement effects be included (PARAM LGDISP).
Rigid body movement is spread over multiple load increments to allow for the history-dependent nature
of the material response. Thus the equilibrium state and material state at the end of the first increment
constitutes the beginning state for the second increment. The automatic load increment option
(NLAUTO) is used to control the magnitude of the load increment. The initial time increment is set at
.01 sec. The total load is 2 inches of imposed rigid body lateral movement on the top and bottom of the
pipe occurring over 1 sec.
Within each increment an iterative process obtains an equilibrium state. Iterations are based on the Full
Newton-Raphson method with a desired number of iterations per increment being 3, and a maximum set
at 2500. Convergence for each increment is defined based on relative residual forces of less than 0.1.
Output requests are made for four stress-strain components using the MARCOUT entry. Total strains
tensor, stress tensor, plastic strain tensor, and Cauchy stress tensor are requested to be included in the
t16 file.
Loading and Boundary Conditions
Because only a small section of the pipe is modeled, the ends of the pipe are constrained in all
translations. This boundary condition effectively represents the pipe extending a substantial distance in
both directions in which case no translation movement would occur at this sections boundary.
To model the contact, the top and bottom rigid surfaces are given velocity vectors of 2 in/sec., and
+2 in/sec. respectively in the y-direction (lateral). This causes the upper structure to be pushed onto the
top of the pipe section and the lower structure to be pushed up into the bottom of the pipe section at a
rate of 2 in/sec. for a total time of 1 second.
Move 2 in the -Y
R=4
Rigid Body 2
Pipe
R=3
Rigid Body 1
Move 2 in the Y
CHAPTER 13 495
SOL 600 Example Problems
Output Requests
Output Requests
This section of the MSC.Nastran bdf specifies the type of output requested. The PARAM MARCSLHT
5 entry defines the number of shell layers of output requested. The MARCOUT entry that follows lists
the individual output quantities. If nothing is specified, MSC.Nastran produces a set of default output
according to the type of analysis.
Material Entries
Contact Bodies
Material Entries
This section of the MSC.Nastran bdf describes the material behavior for the pipe. The MAT1 entry
defines the elastic part of the material and the MATEP entry describes the perfectly plastic behavior.
Contact Bodies
The BCBODY entry describes the rigid surface as defined by Nurbs geometry surfaces. The value of
analytical form is 1 (used with all Nurbs rigid geometry). Note the -2 describing the rigid body motion.
CHAPTER 13 497
SOL 600 Example Problems
Plasticity has occurred over most of the model as shown in Figure 13-2. Maximum stresses reaching
4.25E+4 psi occur as expected in the contact region. Also evident from this figure are high stresses
equivalent to those in the contact region occurring at the constrained boundary condition. This is a
consequence of the boundary condition. In a full-length pipe section we would not expect to see a stress
concentrated in this area.
Figure 13-1
CHAPTER 13 499
SOL 600 Example Problems
Figure 13-2
Model Description
This model consists of a planar representation of the rubber seal and a curve representation of the door.
The rubber seal and door are initially located approximately 0.1 apart.
CHAPTER 13 501
SOL 600 Example Problems
Geometry
This three-dimensional problem is idealized as a plane strain problem. The rubber seal geometry is
represented by several surfaces. The trunk door is represented by several curves.
Finite Element and Contact Model
The surfaces representing the seal are meshed with MSC.Nastran CQUD4 shell elements. The element
property is defined using the nonlinear hyperelastic plane strain property entry PLPLANE. All the seal
CQUAD4 elements are defined as a single deformable body using the BCBODY and BSURF entries.
The curves representing the trunk door are used to define a rigid contact body using the BCBODY entry.
The NURBS2D option is used to describe the rigid body geometry.
Material
The rubber seal material is defined using the Mooney Rivlin material model. The MSC.Nastran
hyperelastic material property entry MATHP is used with two material constant terms: A10=80 and
A01=20.
Loading and Boundary Conditions
Nodes along the bottom edge of the seal are fixed. A displacement of (-0.1, -0.7, 0.) is specified on the
rigid body to control the motion of the rigid body.
Solution Procedure and Controls
A nonlinear static analysis is performed to determine the seal deformations that result from contact with
the rigid trunk door. The rigid body movement and material stiffness specified for this problem require
that large displacement effects be included (PARAM,LGDISP,1).
The NLPARM entry is used to specify the nonlinear analysis iteration strategy. 10 uniform time
increments are used to solve this problem. The Full Newton-Raphson method is specified.
Output requests are made for stress and strain using the MARCOUT entry. These results are included in
the t16 output file.
CHAPTER 13 503
SOL 600 Example Problems
Large Displacement
Contact Definition
Results Plots
The plot below shows the final deformation and strain results.
CHAPTER 13 505
SOL 600 Example Problems
Brake Forming
Problem Statement
This problem illustrates the nonlinear analysis of a flat steel plate being formed into an angled bracket.
A cylindrical punch is used to bend the plate by pushing it into a die, then retracting away. This forming
process is commonly known as brake forming.
This simulation highlights several SOL 600 capabilities including multiple load steps, material plasticity,
large displacement, large strain, and contact between rigid and deformable bodies.
Model Description
This model consists of a planar representation of the plate and curve representations of the punch and die.
Geometry
This three-dimensional problem is idealized as a plane strain problem. The plate is represented by a
surface. The punch is represented by a circular curve. The die is represented by a composite curve.
CHAPTER 13 507
SOL 600 Example Problems
Large Displacement
Plasticity
Contact
CHAPTER 13 509
SOL 600 Example Problems
Panel Buckling
Problem Statement
This problem illustrates the nonlinear post-buckling analysis of a curved panel. This simulation
highlights several SOL 600 capabilities including large displacement, material plasticity, and contact
between multiple deformable bodies.
Model Description
The model consists of a stiffened panel approximately 14 by 22. The skin is constructed from
aluminum and has a slight curvature. A longitudinal Z stiffener is attached to the skin by a single row of
rivets. The stiffener has a joggle in it, and a doubler is used to fill the gap between the stiffener and the
skin. Two additional longitudinal doublers are attached to the outside edges of the skin.
This model was originally constructed in metric units and was converted to English units. As a result of
the conversion, some of the dimensions are rounded off.
CHAPTER 13 511
SOL 600 Example Problems
CHAPTER 13 513
SOL 600 Example Problems
Large Displacement
Plasticity
Contact
The plot below shows a graph of the total longitudinal reaction force vs. time increments.
jp`Kc~=n=p~=d
Index
MSC Nastran 2007 Implicit Nonlinear SOL 600 Users Guide
197
193
268, 318,
320, 349, 354, 355, 356, 372, 373, 374,
411, 482, 505, 506
516 MSC Nastran 2007 Implicit Nonlinear SOL 600 Users Guide
conditioning number 61
CONM1 407
CONM2 407
CONROD 165, 410
constant dilatation 406
constitutive material models 269
defining in MSC.Patran 269
constraints 50
multi-point 51, 236
single point 50
contact 250, 463
automatic penetration checking 431
beams 437
constraints 434
controlling 467
corner conditions 433
deformable 464
detection 424
dynamic impact 428, 449
glue model 446
neighbor relations 427
parameters 467
defining in MSC.Patran 467
penetration 468
rigid 464
separation 433, 436
shell 426, 437
tolerance 432
contact bodies 421, 447
defining in MSC.Patran 463
deformable surfaces 447
defining in MSC.Patran 464
movement 475
rigid surface
defining in MSC.Patran 464
rigid surfaces 447, 449
3D 452
circular arc 450
line segment 450
spline 452
slideline
defining in MSC.Patran 466
contact table 471
defining in MSC.Patran 472
convergence
controls 81, 128
damping 139
debugging 204
in MSC.Patran 213
deformable surfaces 447
degrees-of-freedom 164
direct linear transient 176
DMIG 25, 26, 130, 131, 201
domain decomposition 144
defining in MSC.Patran 144
ductile metals 358
EIGB 192
eigenvalue
analysis 126
buckling prediction
extraction 123
eigenvector
strain energy 125
EIGR 190
EIGRL 190, 192
121
INDEX
elasticity 107
elastomers 278, 361
element strain energy 40, 43
elements
3D solid
defining in MSC.Patran 416
axisymmetric 414
defining in MSC.Patran 414
bush 407
defining in MSC.Patran 407
damper
defining in MSC.Patran 407
dampers 407
gap 409
defining in MSC.Patran 409
line 410
defining in MSC.Patran 410
mass 407
defining in MSC.Patran 407
membrane 411
defining in MSC.Patran 412
overriding MSC.Nastran selections
panel 411
defining in MSC.Patran 412
plane strain 414
defining in MSC.Patran 415
selection 404
shell 411
defining in MSC.Patran 412
solid 413
spring 407
defining in MSC.Patran 407
types 402
ESE 41
Executive Control Statements 18
SOL 600 216
existing models 21
experimental data fitting 382
external superelements 154
405
517
518 MSC Nastran 2007 Implicit Nonlinear SOL 600 Users Guide
I
IFP (Input File Processing) Checking
INCLUDE 182
incompressible materials 107
inertia relief 149, 151, 152, 153
initial conditions 138, 265
INREL 149, 150, 153
inrel 153
inverse power sweep 126
isotropic hardening 323
isotropic materials 273
iteration methods 66
Newton-Raphson 66
secant 69
strain correction 68
iterations 57
J
Jamus-Green-Simpson model
16
282, 303
506, 511
493, 501,
MARCAUTO 195
MARCBAL 192
mass elements 407
MAT1 273
MAT2 275, 276
MAT3 275
MAT8 275
MATED 271
MATEP 270, 344
material
damping 380
defining in MSC.Patran
instabilities 111
nonlinearity 55, 106
381
INDEX
materials
2d anisotropic
failure 349
2d orthotropic
failure 349
anisotropic 276
defining in MSC.Patran 276
composite 372
ductile metals 358
elastomers 279, 361
gasket 374
defining in MSC.Patran 379
geological 335
hyperelastic 278, 287
defining in MSC.Patran 303
hypoelastic 278
inelastic
defining in MSC.Patran 345
isotropic 273
defining in MSC.Patran 273
plastic 345
linear elastic 272
metals 332
Mohr-Coulomb 320
nonlinear elastic 278
orthotropic 274
defining in MSC.Patran 275
viscoelastic
defining in MSC.Patran 315
MATF 206, 270, 356
MATG 270, 378, 483, 487
MATHE 269, 271, 278, 302, 391
MATHED 364
MATORT 271, 275
MATTEP 270, 344
MATTG 270, 378
MATTHE 271
MATTORT 271
MATTVE 113, 271, 315
MATVE 271
MATVP 195, 271, 370
maximum strain criterion 350
maximum stress criterion 349
membrane elements 411
mesh
severe distortion 110
message files 38
metal plasticity 318
METHOD 192
modal
stresses and reactions 128
modal neutral files (MNF) 154
mode shape 124
modified Drucker-Prager model
matching plane strain response 339
matching triaxial test response 337
Mohr-Coulomb
linear material 321
parabolic material 321
parameters 337
MOMENT 254
MOMENT1 254
MOMENT2 254
Mooney-Rivlin model 282, 303
MPC 236, 239
MSC.Adams 154
MSC.Marc 25, 130
Mullins effect 361
multi-point constraints (MPCs) 236
explicit 236
defining in MSC.Patran 236
RBAR 240
defining in MSC.Patran 241
RBE1 241
defining in MSC.Patran 242
RBE2 242
defining in MSC.Patran 242
RBE3 243
defining in MSC.Patran 244
rigid 238
defining in MSC.Patran 238
RROD 244
defining in MSC.Patran 245
RTRPLT 245
defining in MSC.Patran 246
sliding surface 239
defining in MSC.Patran 239
519
520 MSC Nastran 2007 Implicit Nonlinear SOL 600 Users Guide
368
148
INDEX
results
element 222
files 38
MSC.Marc quantities 226
defining in MSC.Patran 229
MSC.Nastran quantities 231
defining in MSC.Patran 231
nodal 220
postprocessing with MSC.Patran
types 226
RFORCE 259
rigid contact surfaces 447
Riks-Ramm method 78, 79
RROD 244
RTRPLT 246
secant method 69
shell
contact 426
elements 411
single step
Houbolt operator 133, 137
singularity ratio 84
SOL 600 172, 177
beam 21, 172
Bulk Data Entries
PARAMARC 146
Bulk Data Parameters
MARCFIL1 25, 130
MARCOUTR 146
MRAFFLOW 344
MRMTXNAM 25, 130
MRRCFILE 25, 130
MRSPAWN2 25, 130
CONTINUE 21, 172
dmap 21, 172
PATH keyword 26
procedure 59
solid elements 413
solution
parameters 182
defining in MSC.Patran
procedures 63
39
342
183
TEMPPi 257
TEMPRB 257
Thermo-Rheologically Simple material
TIC 265
time dependent
plasticity-creep
creep material law 365
time step 138
TLOAD 260, 261
transient dynamic analysis 132
subcase parameters 193
defining in MSC.Patran 194
translation parameters 179
defining in MSC.Patran 179
Tsai-Wu failure criterion 353
313
521
522 MSC Nastran 2007 Implicit Nonlinear SOL 600 Users Guide
TSTEPNL 182,
193
V
viscoelastic material
anisotropic 309
incompressible isotropic 309
isotropic 307
Thermo-Rheologically Simple 313
viscoelasticity 113, 119
viscoplasticity 113, 119, 369
explicit formulation 369
explicit method 114
implicit method 115
von Mises 318, 324
W
work hardening
combined 325
kinematic 325
rules 323
slope 333